[{"data":1,"prerenderedAt":-1},["ShallowReactive",2],{"help-content":3},{"success":4,"categories":5},true,[6,96,130,815,1066,1153,1438,1919,2091,2212,2262,2272,2308,2347,2544,3167],{"slug":7,"title":8,"lead":9,"entries":10,"groups":72},"getting-started","Getting started","How Podspun works and how to connect your show from YouTube, Apple Podcasts, or an RSS feed. No setup, no manual uploads: connect a source and Podspun imports, transcribes, and indexes every episode.",[11,15,19,23,27,31,35,39,43,47,51,56,60,64,68],{"slug":12,"question":13,"answerHtml":14},"change-account-type","How do I change what kind of website I have?","\u003Cp>The kind is set on each website. Your account has no type of its own, so one account can hold a podcast website, a film website and an art website at the same time.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Open the website from \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">Website Builder\u003C\u002Fa>, then Site Settings, General. Under What this website is, check Podcast, Social Media, Visual Artist or Filmmaker. More than one is fine. Checking one adds the pages it comes with and offers its blocks in the block picker on that website; nothing you already have is removed. You also choose the kind when you add a new website.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Art Studio appears in your account menu once one of your websites is a Visual Artist website. Films appears under Content on a Filmmaker website.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":16,"question":17,"answerHtml":18},"how-podspun-promotes-your-show","How does Podspun promote my show?","\u003Cp>Connect your channels. Every episode and post gets a page, and the site keeps itself current.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Every channel you add gets a page on podspun.com at its own address. While it is Active, Podspun.com Exposure in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fcollection\">Podspun.com Setup\u003C\u002Fa> sets how findable that page is: Full (promoted across Podspun and indexed by search engines), SEO Only (indexed by search engines but never featured by Podspun), or Unlisted (up for anyone with the link, but search engines skip it and Podspun does not list it anywhere). Keep it on Full to be included in the show strip, the topic pages, and what we share on our social media and in our newsletters.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":20,"question":21,"answerHtml":22},"how-does-podspun-work","How does Podspun work?","\u003Cp>Podspun pulls in your podcast episodes from YouTube, Apple Podcasts, or your RSS feed and creates a clean, searchable home for your show. It imports your transcripts and layers in AI so your audience can find what they are looking for, down to the exact moment you said it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Podspun also generates summaries, highlights, quote cards, badges, and analytics for each episode, making your content easier to explore.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":24,"question":25,"answerHtml":26},"move-a-wordpress-site","How do I move my WordPress site to Podspun and choose what comes across?","\u003Cp>Go to \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fimports\">Add New Site\u003C\u002Fa> and choose \u003Cstrong>Move a WordPress site\u003C\u002Fstrong>.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Col>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Get your file:\u003C\u002Fstrong> in your WordPress dashboard, go to Tools, then Export, leave All content selected, and click Download Export File. A file ending in .xml lands in your Downloads folder.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Upload it\u003C\u002Fstrong> with your website's address (we bring your pictures across from it; the file holds only the words) and click Read my file.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Choose:\u003C\u002Fstrong> every page and post is listed with its status (Published, Draft, Pending, Private) and where visitors find it today (your home page, in your menu, linked from a page, or not linked anywhere). What visitors can reach today starts ticked, with every published post. Preview any page before deciding, fold similar pages together with Group by name, and tick or untick posts a whole category at a time.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Article pages:\u003C\u002Fstrong> your press page's links and your biggest categories each get their own page (for example Press, Press Releases, Blog). Keep, rename or turn off any of them.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Check and build:\u003C\u002Fstrong> we build a private preview. Old addresses keep working, your Google titles and descriptions, categories, tags, dates, main pictures and authors come across, and drafts stay drafts.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Fol>\u003Cp>Nothing you leave out is lost. To bring more across later, go to Add New Site, the Past Imports tab, and click Bring more across on your WordPress import. Nothing is charged until you turn the site on.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":28,"question":29,"answerHtml":30},"import-tiktok-instagram","Can I import a TikTok or Instagram account?","\u003Cp>Yes. On \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fchannels\">Channels\u003C\u002Fa>, choose Add a channel, pick TikTok or Instagram, and paste the profile's address or @handle. The instant website builder takes the same links: paste a TikTok or Instagram profile there and it builds a site from the account's posts. The account must be public. Podspun imports every post: videos get a transcript (TikTok captions are used when the video has them; otherwise the audio is transcribed), photo posts index their written caption, and each post gets AI analysis, topics, and a pull quote.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Keyword and AI search cover your posts the same way they cover episodes. Social Feed shows the latest posts, and Social Explorer adds topic browsing and search. Live Portrait finds subjects, people, and moments across every channel included on the site and its published news. New posts sync in automatically each day.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Episodes, videos, and posts share one catalog total. Yearly includes 1,600 and prorates a newly crossed 100-item band through renewal. Monthly includes 800, then charges $1.50 per 100 when imported and each month.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":32,"question":33,"answerHtml":34},"different-from-a-normal-podcast-website","How is Podspun different from a normal podcast website?","\u003Cp>A normal site lists episodes and plays audio. Podspun transcribes every episode and indexes every word, so visitors search what was actually said and ask an AI that answers from your catalog. A website is one optional output of that index: Podspun can also run as just the engine, with your catalog surfacing on podspun.com or through the Data API.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>And unlike a general builder like Squarespace or WordPress, Podspun is made for creators: your whole catalog, transcripts, search, and clips arrive already built in, instead of a blank site you fill in.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":36,"question":37,"answerHtml":38},"do-i-need-to-do-any-setup","Do I need to do any setup?","\u003Cp>No. Connect a source (your YouTube channel via Google sign-in, or an Apple Podcasts or RSS feed URL) and Podspun handles the rest.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":40,"question":41,"answerHtml":42},"do-i-upload-episodes-manually","Do I need to manually upload my episodes?","\u003Cp>No. Once you connect a source, Podspun automatically imports your episodes from YouTube, Apple Podcasts, or your RSS feed.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":44,"question":45,"answerHtml":46},"podcast-not-on-youtube","Can I use Podspun if my podcast isn't on YouTube?","\u003Cp>Yes. Besides YouTube, you can connect any show by pasting its Apple Podcasts URL or a direct RSS feed URL. You do not need to be on YouTube to use Podspun.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":48,"question":49,"answerHtml":50},"more-than-one-podcast","Can I use Podspun for more than one podcast?","\u003Cp>Yes. Your account can link multiple shows, across any mix of YouTube, Apple Podcasts, or RSS. Whether you host one show or five, Podspun keeps them organized and easy to explore.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":52,"question":53,"answerHtml":54,"guideHtml":55},"how-do-i-connect-my-podcast","How do I connect or add my podcast?","\u003Cp>Go to \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fchannels\">Podspun Dataweaver\u003C\u002Fa> in your account and click Add channel. Connect your YouTube channel with Google sign-in, or paste an Apple Podcasts or RSS feed URL. Podspun imports and transcribes your episodes automatically and keeps syncing nightly.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-dataweaver\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">Data & Integrations · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Bring your content together.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>Connect podcast and social channels, follow import progress and choose how their content reaches your website.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"Channels & Dataweaver sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#dataweaver-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#dataweaver-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#dataweaver-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#dataweaver-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"dataweaver-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Gather the public podcast feed and social channel addresses you own or manage. A website can use several channels; connecting a source, importing its content and placing that content on a page are separate choices.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"dataweaver-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Choose the channel type\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fdataweaver-1.jpg\" alt=\"Channels & Dataweaver: Choose the channel type\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Choose the channel type\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Podspun Dataweaver and choose Add channel. Pick the appropriate podcast or social source rather than treating a channel address as a whole website.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>For podcasts, use the Apple Podcasts address or RSS feed supported by the form. For YouTube, connect the channel using the available Google flow or channel option.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Use the channel's own address, not an individual episode link, when you want its catalog.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Connect the correct source\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fdataweaver-2.jpg\" alt=\"Channels & Dataweaver: Connect the correct source\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Connect the correct source\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Complete the source's connection form and review the detected channel before adding it. Use the supported TikTok or Instagram import for those social sources.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Check name, artwork and source URL so you do not import a similarly named account. Follow authorization prompts only for the account you intend to connect.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Channel importing can affect your plan's included content and overages. Read the current preview or billing terms shown for your account before confirming.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Follow import and processing\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fdataweaver-3.jpg\" alt=\"Channels & Dataweaver: Follow import and processing\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Follow import and processing\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Return to the channel list and review its import or processing state. Open the channel to inspect the items that have arrived and their source links.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>New content can be ready while older items continue processing. Transcript search and AI features need processed material, so a connected channel is not proof that every episode is already searchable.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Review excluded items or failures rather than repeatedly adding the same channel. Ongoing syncing is separate from an initial historical import.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 4\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Configure the channel and website use\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fdataweaver-4.jpg\" alt=\"Channels & Dataweaver: Configure the channel and website use\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Configure the channel and website use\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Review channel settings and content filters, then choose the channels your website or page should display. Preview a real item on the public page.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Use the channel's available controls for filters, split feeds and import scope. Avoid changing exclusions without considering how the website's lists will change.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Check artwork, dates, source links and playback for an imported item. A channel in your account still needs to be selected in the relevant website\u002Fpage configuration.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Connect your podcast RSS feed and YouTube channel, inspect import progress and select the intended sources for your site's episode archive. Open an imported episode to check its audio, artwork and transcript once processing completes.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"dataweaver-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>The connected sources belong to the intended channels.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Import and processing states were reviewed.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Filters match the desired catalog.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>The website displays and plays the intended content.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"dataweaver-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>A connected channel is not on my website\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Review the channels selected for that website or page, then preview its content blocks.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>Search cannot find an older episode\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Check whether that item's import and transcript processing have completed and whether it was excluded.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":57,"question":58,"answerHtml":59},"how-long-does-connecting-take","What happens when I connect a show, and how long does it take?","\u003Cp>You paste a YouTube channel, an Apple Podcasts show, or an RSS feed. Podspun pulls every episode, transcribes the audio, and indexes the words. A short feed is ready in minutes. A feed with many episodes runs in the background over hours, and you can watch progress while it fills in.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":61,"question":62,"answerHtml":63},"why-is-podspun-significantly-better-than-squarespace-wix-wordpress-and-others","Why is Podspun significantly better than Squarespace, Wix, WordPress and others?","\u003Cp>Podspun builds your website from your podcast and social feeds, then keeps importing as you publish. It transcribes your audio and video, adds summaries and tags, and lets visitors ask questions across your archive. You also get your own domain, a store, email, and memberships, with our team available to help build your site.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":65,"question":66,"answerHtml":67},"what-can-i-import","What can I import?","\u003Cp>Podcast feeds, YouTube, Instagram, and TikTok. Podspun brings the episodes and posts into your website and keeps importing as you publish. Visual artists and filmmakers have tools for their artwork and film catalogs, too.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":69,"question":70,"answerHtml":71},"will-you-help-me-set-it-up","Will you help me set it up?","\u003Cp>Yes. Our enterprise and hands-on plans include our team building your site for you. We also have automated migration tools to help bring an existing website over.\u003C\u002Fp>",[73,89],{"slug":74,"title":75,"entries":76},"basics","The basics",[77,78,79,80,81,82,83,84,85,86,87,88],{"slug":12,"question":13,"answerHtml":14},{"slug":16,"question":17,"answerHtml":18},{"slug":20,"question":21,"answerHtml":22},{"slug":24,"question":25,"answerHtml":26},{"slug":28,"question":29,"answerHtml":30},{"slug":32,"question":33,"answerHtml":34},{"slug":36,"question":37,"answerHtml":38},{"slug":40,"question":41,"answerHtml":42},{"slug":44,"question":45,"answerHtml":46},{"slug":48,"question":49,"answerHtml":50},{"slug":52,"question":53,"answerHtml":54,"guideHtml":55},{"slug":57,"question":58,"answerHtml":59},{"slug":90,"title":91,"entries":92},"overview","About your website",[93,94,95],{"slug":61,"question":62,"answerHtml":63},{"slug":65,"question":66,"answerHtml":67},{"slug":69,"question":70,"answerHtml":71},{"slug":97,"title":98,"lead":99,"entries":100,"groups":129},"pricing","Pricing and plans","What Podspun costs yearly or monthly, how the 1,600-item yearly allowance and prorated catalog bands work, and what optional add-ons cost.",[101,105,109,113,117,121,125],{"slug":102,"question":103,"answerHtml":104},"what-does-podspun-cost","What does Podspun cost?","\u003Cp>10% off the fixed plan price. The yearly Dataweaver includes 1,600 catalog items. The yearly Dataweaver and website plan also includes up to 1 website. The annual price uses your current catalog band. Each new 100-item band is prorated through the same renewal date. Usage and extra add-ons remain monthly. The yearly Dataweaver is $313.20 \u002F year; adding the yearly website allowance makes the fixed plan $529.20. Monthly remains $29.00\u002Fmonth with 800 items included, plus $20.00\u002Fmonth per website.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Websites beyond the 1 covered yearly, Data API keys, Custom JavaScript, and usage-based add-ons remain monthly. Enterprise is available by contacting the team.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":106,"question":107,"answerHtml":108},"what-do-the-add-ons-cost","What do the add-ons cost?","\u003Cp>Each is optional and rides on your monthly extras bill. On yearly billing 1 website is part of the fixed term; extra websites are $20.00\u002Fmonth each. Data API keys are $39.00\u002Fmonth each, and Custom JavaScript is $19.00\u002Fmonth per site.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Clips: your first 3 each month are free, then $20.00 buys a pack of 25. Thumbnails: suggested titles and episode-frame previews are free, and AI-generated images or exact frame pulls get 5 free a month, then $5.00 for a pack of 10. Email is free for your first 100 subscribed contacts, then $9.00\u002Fmonth up to 500, stepping up as your list grows. AI searches on your sites include 5,000 free a month, then $10.00 per extra 1,000.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":110,"question":111,"answerHtml":112},"are-ai-searches-limited","Are the AI searches on my site limited?","\u003Cp>Your account includes 5,000 AI searches each month across your sites, which covers most shows comfortably. Past that, extra searches are $10.00 per 1,000.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>You choose what happens at the limit in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fbilling\">Billing\u003C\u002Fa>: Keep answering (extras are added to your bill) or Stop at the limit (the ask-a-question box pauses until the month resets). Keyword search is always unlimited and free.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A visitor can ask a follow-up question under any answer, and the answer engine remembers what was already asked. A follow-up is a full question, so it counts the same as the first one. Start over empties the conversation.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":114,"question":115,"answerHtml":116},"how-the-monthly-bill-works","How do yearly billing and monthly extras work together?","\u003Cp>You keep a card on file and choose yearly or monthly for the fixed plan. On yearly billing, the current catalog band and up to 1 website are charged through one renewal date. If the catalog crosses its paid capacity, Podspun adds the next 100-item band, prorated for the exact remaining days. Small prorations wait for the next scheduled bill instead of creating a tiny card charge.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>At renewal, the fixed yearly price recalculates from the current catalog band. Extra websites, API keys, Custom JavaScript, and usage remain monthly. \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fbilling\">Billing\u003C\u002Fa> shows the yearly renewal and monthly extras separately, plus coupons, past charges, and receipts.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":118,"question":119,"answerHtml":120},"episode-limit","Is there a limit to how many episodes I can upload?","\u003Cp>There is no hard catalog limit. Yearly includes 1,600 total items across podcasts, video, Instagram, and TikTok, then moves up in 100-item bands. A band crossed mid-term is prorated only through the existing renewal date. Monthly includes 800 items and charges $1.50 for every additional 100 items. You can also contact us for Enterprise.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":122,"question":123,"answerHtml":124},"large-back-catalog-cost","What does a 1,900-episode show really cost?","\u003Cp>On yearly billing, 1,900 items starts at $361.80 for the Dataweaver and buys capacity through 1,900 items for the term. Crossing the next 100-item band buys that band only for the remaining days; the paid capacity never drops during the term. At renewal, the price uses the catalog band at that time.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>On monthly billing, the overage at this catalog size is $16.50 in addition to the $29.00 base. Websites and other monthly extras are separate as shown in Billing.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":126,"question":127,"answerHtml":128},"what-do-social-posts-cost","What do TikTok and Instagram posts cost?","\u003Cp>Posts, videos, and episodes share one catalog total. Yearly includes 1,600 and grows in 100-item bands, prorated when a new band is crossed mid-term. Monthly includes 800 and charges $1.50 for each additional 100 items when imported and each month afterward.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The add-account preview uses your existing total and shows the exact effect before you approve it.\u003C\u002Fp>",[],{"slug":131,"title":132,"lead":133,"entries":134,"groups":626},"your-website","Your website","The website Podspun builds for you from your episodes: how the builder works, editing and drafts, custom domains, and how your pages rank in Google and get cited by AI answer engines.",[135,139,143,147,151,155,159,163,167,171,175,179,183,187,191,195,199,203,207,211,215,219,223,227,231,235,239,243,247,251,255,259,263,267,271,275,279,283,287,291,295,299,303,307,311,315,319,323,327,331,335,339,344,348,352,356,360,364,368,372,376,380,384,388,392,396,400,404,408,412,416,420,424,428,433,438,442,446,450,454,458,462,466,470,474,478,482,486,490,494,498,502,506,510,514,518,522,526,530,534,538,542,545,549,553,557,561,564,568,572,576,580,584,588,592,596,600,603,606,609,613,617,620,623],{"slug":136,"question":137,"answerHtml":138},"what-is-the-website-builder","What is the website builder?","\u003Cp>It is your own website, made from the episodes you already publish and hosted on your own domain. It is made for creators, so you build here instead of Squarespace or WordPress. Choose from themes and color palettes, set your logo and fonts, and Podspun assembles episode pages, all your episodes, search, and clips for you. As you publish new episodes, the site updates on its own.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":140,"question":141,"answerHtml":142},"do-i-build-the-website-myself","Do I have to build the website myself?","\u003Cp>No. Podspun builds the site for you from your episodes, on your own domain, and keeps it current as you publish. It is a finished website with episode pages, transcripts, clips, and search already in place, not a blank page you fill in. You pick a theme and colors and adjust what you want, and the rest is done for you.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":144,"question":145,"answerHtml":146},"am-i-stuck-with-a-template","Am I stuck with a template, or can I control how it looks?","\u003Cp>Pages are built from blocks, and the theme settings set the palette, fonts, page width, spacing and corners across the site. You also control what stays public (whole-site password or a coming-soon state) and your own domain over Cloudflare SSL. It is your site to shape.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":148,"question":149,"answerHtml":150},"different-from-squarespace-or-wordpress","How is this different from Squarespace or WordPress?","\u003Cp>Squarespace and WordPress are general website builders. You start from a blank site and add every episode, transcript, and clip by hand, and there are no podcast tools in the box. Podspun is made for creators: connect your channels once and it arrives with your whole catalog, transcripts, search, and clips already in it. You keep full design control and your own domain, and the approach is a two-time Webby honoree.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":152,"question":153,"answerHtml":154},"hand-edits-and-sync","Can I hand-edit pages, or does a sync overwrite my work?","\u003Cp>You can edit any page with blocks, draft changes, and roll back revisions. Lock specific items and a sync leaves them alone, so your edits survive. You can also exclude episodes you don't want surfaced.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":156,"question":157,"answerHtml":158},"two-shows-on-one-website","Can one website show two of my shows together?","\u003Cp>Yes. If your site includes more than one show, every content block has a show setting in its editor. Leave it on \u003Cstrong>All shows (mixed)\u003C\u002Fstrong> and the block blends both feeds: episode lists, topics, highlights, quotes, and games draw from every show on the site. Pick a specific show instead and that block sticks to it. You can mix per block, so a shared homepage and single-show sections live on the same site.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Mixed lists label each episode card with its show, the banner shows the combined episode count with a link to each show's own page, and search gets a Choose Shows picker so visitors can search everything or one show at a time.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":160,"question":161,"answerHtml":162},"what-does-a-portrait-page-show","What does a Live Portrait page show?","\u003Cp>Live Portrait reads every channel included on the site together with its published news. It finds recurring subjects, recent changes, people, time periods, moments, and topics found in more than one source.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Each finding links to the episode, social post, or article behind it. Visitors can ask questions across the connected channels. The page updates as new material is imported and analyzed.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>New sites built from TikTok or Instagram include Live Portrait. To add one elsewhere, choose Live Portrait in the Podspun Dataweaver section of the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">website editor\u003C\u002Fa>.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":164,"question":165,"answerHtml":166},"live-portrait-sections","Can I turn individual Live Portrait sections on or off?","\u003Cp>Yes. In your site's CMS, open Settings, then the Live Portrait tab. Each section of the page has its own on\u002Foff switch: the most recent topic, repeated topics, the posting burst, the three doors into the archive, people mentioned, and the closing archive grid. A section switched off disappears from the page the next time it rebuilds.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":168,"question":169,"answerHtml":170},"build-before-going-live","Can I build my site before going live?","\u003Cp>Yes. Add New Website (under \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fimports\">Imports\u003C\u002Fa>) builds a full draft as an unpublished preview you can review before paying: your episodes on the site, a theme matched to your art, real copy written from your show and website, and draft News articles. The newest 10 episodes are transcribed and searchable in the preview. The preview link works during its build window and is kept out of search engines. People you send the preview link to can subscribe and sign in as members through its Join pop-up. Forms, the store, donations and paid memberships open when you go live, and the site cannot serve on a live domain until then.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Go live (in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">Website Builder\u003C\u002Fa>, at the top of the site's CMS, or under Key Domain Setup in Site Settings) opens Pay now at the top of \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fbilling\">Billing\u003C\u002Fa>. It lists what you are paying for and the total. Pick monthly or yearly, add a card if none is saved, and press Pay: that one charge starts your plan and puts the site live. Yearly starts at $529.20 for the Dataweaver and its website allowance, includes 1,600 catalog items, and prices larger catalogs from their current band. Monthly starts at $49.00 with 800 items included. Turning it on transcribes and indexes the rest of your catalog and switches on transcripts and search for every episode. Everything you edited stays exactly as you left it.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":172,"question":173,"answerHtml":174},"share-a-draft-for-review","Can someone review my draft without logging in?","\u003Cp>Yes. In the page editor, open the version menu and choose Share a draft. It creates a review link that works for seven days without a login, so a co-host or client can see exactly what the draft looks like on the real site. They see the draft only; the live page stays as it is until you publish.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The draft preview badge appears on unpublished sites and shared draft links. Once your site is active and Public, its regular Podspun address shows the published site without that badge.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":176,"question":177,"answerHtml":178},"password-or-coming-soon","Can I hide my site behind a password or a coming soon page?","\u003Cp>Yes. In your site's CMS, open Site Settings, then Key Domain Setup, then Visibility. Who can see this site switches between Public and Password protected, and a Coming soon toggle hides all content behind a simple placeholder while you work. You write the heading and message for both screens, and the password can be generated and copied right there.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Your own preview link always bypasses the gate, so you can review the real site while visitors see the placeholder.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":180,"question":181,"answerHtml":182},"undo-a-published-change","Can I undo a change after publishing?","\u003Cp>Yes. Every publish keeps the previous version. In the page editor, open the version menu to see Recent revisions and roll back to any of them, or View all revisions for the full history. A draft you have not published yet can simply be discarded.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":184,"question":185,"answerHtml":186},"edit-site-menus","How do I edit my site's menus?","\u003Cp>In your site's CMS, open Menu Layouts. Header is the navigation at the top of every page, Footer is the link list at the bottom, and Social is your profile links. Links and buttons start collapsed, showing their names. Click a name to open its editing fields. Add, reorder, and nest items with drag and drop. Each link and header button has a Link Type dropdown: Page, External, Asset, Member Popup, or No Link. Choose the type, then select its destination underneath. No Link makes a dropdown heading for the items nested below it.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":188,"question":189,"answerHtml":190},"rich-text-box-and-button","Can I put text in a box with a button?","\u003Cp>Yes. Open the page, open the Rich Text block, and set Show As to Box. The text then sits in a rounded panel in your theme's panel color, the same panel a Call to action block uses, in the same column as the rest of your text. Add a Button in the same block to put one button under the text, with its words and where it links. Text, the default, keeps the words on the page with no panel.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":192,"question":193,"answerHtml":194},"crop-images-and-focal-point","How do I crop an image or control how it is framed?","\u003Cp>Open the image in your site's Assets (or from any image picker) and use the editor. Crop trims the image, free-form or to a fixed shape like square or 16:9, and can save the result as a new file. Focal point lets you drag a marker to the part of the image that matters, and Podspun keeps that point in view wherever the image fills a box, like a hero banner.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>You can also do this without leaving what you are working on. In the Choose an asset window, the ⋯ button on a picture has Edit image, Rename, Move and Delete. On an artwork's record in Art Studio, click a picture under Images to edit it, or drag the pictures to change their order.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":196,"question":197,"answerHtml":198},"photo-behind-a-section","Can I put a photo behind a section of a page?","\u003Cp>Yes. In the page editor, open a block's Config tab and choose a photo under Photo behind this block. A scrim (a wash over the photo) keeps the text on top readable: darken the photo for white text, or lighten it for dark text, and set the strength with the slider. The hero block's backgrounds use the same scrim control.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":200,"question":201,"answerHtml":202},"full-bleed-and-full-screen-blocks","Can a block stretch edge to edge, or fill the whole screen?","\u003Cp>Yes, and any block can do it. In the page editor, open a block's Config tab. Turn on Full Bleed to stretch the block edge to edge across the whole window, past the page margins (the block needs to be full width). Turn on Fill the screen and center to make it at least one full screen tall with its content centered. Both work together, which is how a big opening section is usually built.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":204,"question":205,"answerHtml":206},"link-to-a-section","How do I link to a section further down a page?","\u003Cp>Open the page in the editor, open the block's Settings, and type a Section Link Name, like exclusive-drops. Use letters, numbers and hyphens. Publish the page.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Then, in a block's link field (a button or a card, on any page), choose Internal page, pick that page, and choose the section in the list that appears under it. The link opens the page and scrolls to the block, and on the same page it scrolls without reloading. Only blocks with a Section Link Name on the published page are listed.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":208,"question":209,"answerHtml":210},"announcement-bar","How do I show an announcement across the top of my site?","\u003Cp>In your site's CMS, open Menu Layouts, then Header, then the Announcement Bar tab. Turn the bar on, write a short message (a new season, a live show, a sale), and optionally add a link so people can act on it. The message shows in a band across the very top of every page until you turn it off.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>To count down to a deadline, set Show a countdown to Yes and pick the date and time, in your site's time zone. The countdown follows the message, and the bar stops showing when it reaches zero. Set Show a countdown to No to hide it without losing the date you typed.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":212,"question":213,"answerHtml":214},"website-contact-settings","Where do messages from my website's forms go, and can I show an email?","\u003Cp>Every message sent through the forms on your website is kept in your Form Inbox, and emailed to your account's login email when the form's notification is on. In your site's CMS, open Site Settings, then Contact, to change where the emails go: type an address under Send Messages To, for when someone else handles your messages, like a publicist. That address is sent one email asking it to confirm, and your messages only go there once someone opens the link in it; until then they keep going to your login email. Clearing the address sends them back to your login email straight away.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Under Public Email you can add an email to show to visitors. It appears under the forms on your website. On a film website it is also the press contact on the Press Kit when a film has no press contact of its own, and Host a screening writes to it when your website has no Contact page. Leave it empty to show no email.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":216,"question":217,"answerHtml":218},"promo-block","How do I promote my store or Patreon on a page?","\u003Cp>Add the Promo block, in the Common section of the block picker. It puts pictures on one side (up to four, each with an optional caption like a product name and price) and your pitch on the other: a heading, a line of text, and a button. The button can point at a page on your site or an outside site like your merch store or Patreon.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":220,"question":221,"answerHtml":222},"what-is-the-live-now-block","What is the Live Now block?","\u003Cp>Live Now is a hero for the top of the home page that shows what matters right now. Set to Automatic, it shows a live event first, then an event happening tonight, then an article marked Feature on Home, then the next upcoming event. When two candidates tie, the earlier start wins, then the title, so the choice never flickers between visits. Drafts, canceled events, and articles outside their feature window are never shown.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>To promote something yourself, change Feature to an event, an article, a product, or an auction, then set Show From and Show Until for the window it should occupy and a Priority. A priority of 100 always wins; lower it to let a live event (90) or tonight's event (70) take over during the window. Headline Override and Button Label Override change the words without changing the feature. Fill in the Evergreen Headline, Text, Background, and Link so the hero has something to say on a quiet day. Events come from Content, \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Ffilm\u002Fevents\">Calendar & Events\u003C\u002Fa>, in your website's menu; the hero renders like any other hero and starts at the top of the page. Set Show Event Date Below Hero to No to hide the date strip beneath it.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":224,"question":225,"answerHtml":226},"social-section-defaults","Where do I control the social sections, like the Monthly Quiz?","\u003Cp>In your site's CMS, open Settings, then the Social tab. It holds the defaults for the TikTok and Instagram side of your site; turning Monthly Quiz off hides every Monthly Quiz section across the site at once. The most-viewed post panel under the Social Explorer has its own switch there too. With several channels, Quizzes & Games' Automation Config tab also offers One Combined Quiz: one set shown site-wide, its questions drawn from every channel's current quiz. The Channels tab next to it governs only show channels (YouTube, Apple Podcasts, RSS feeds), and how each social channel plays its videos is set per channel in Dataweaver.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":228,"question":229,"answerHtml":230},"custom-javascript-and-css","Can I add custom JavaScript or CSS to my site?","\u003Cp>Yes, as an add-on. In your site's CMS, open Site Settings, then Custom Code to add your own scripts and styles. It is $19.00\u002Fmonth per site, added to your monthly bill.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":232,"question":233,"answerHtml":234},"css-class-names-for-blocks","How do I write my own CSS for a block?","\u003Cp>Every block on your pages carries class names that do not change, so a rule you write today keeps working. \u003Ccode>.pspun-block\u003C\u002Fcode> matches any block. \u003Ccode>.pspun-block--media\u003C\u002Fcode> matches a picture, \u003Ccode>.pspun-block--prose\u003C\u002Fcode> a piece of writing, and so on: the pattern is \u003Ccode>.pspun-block--\u003C\u002Fcode> followed by the block's name in lower case. A Container is \u003Ccode>.pspun-container\u003C\u002Fcode>, and the blocks inside one carry their own names as well.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Write the rules in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">your website's\u003C\u002Fa> Code section, under Custom CSS. They load after the theme, so they win.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":236,"question":237,"answerHtml":238},"article-title-band","Can my articles open with a dark title band?","\u003Cp>Yes. In your site's CMS open Theme, then Advanced, then Articles, and set Article Header to Title Band. Every article then opens with its title, breadcrumb and byline on a band in your theme's dark color, and the article's featured image overlaps the bottom of the band. Plain, the default, starts the article with its title on the page.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>An article whose text already shows its featured picture gets the band without the picture, so the same photo never appears twice. An article with no featured picture gets the band on its own. An article that starts with its own Hero block gets the band too: the hero's title, short description and picture move into the band, so the article has one header. The Ledger palette turns Title Band on when you pick it.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":240,"question":241,"answerHtml":242},"hero-headline-marker","Can I underline the end of my hero headline?","\u003Cp>Yes. Open the page, open its Hero block, and in the Headline section set Headline Marker to Last two words or Whole headline. A thick line in your theme's highlight color runs under those words, and follows them onto a second line if the headline wraps. Off, the default, leaves the headline plain. It works on every hero layout: full width, Image Beside Text, and a hero with no picture.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":244,"question":245,"answerHtml":246},"hero-photo-credit","How do I add a photo credit to a hero picture?","\u003Cp>Open the page in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">Website Builder\u003C\u002Fa>, select the Hero block, and open the slide. Type the credit in \u003Cstrong>Photo Credit\u003C\u002Fstrong>, for example \"Photograph by Douglas Kirkland.\" It shows in small type at the bottom left corner of the picture, level with the slide arrows, and above the slide's buttons when it has any. Each slide has its own credit.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":248,"question":249,"answerHtml":250},"hero-pictures-black-and-white","Can my banner pictures be black and white, or darker?","\u003Cp>Yes. Open the page in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">Website Builder\u003C\u002Fa> and select its Hero block. Set \u003Cstrong>Picture Color\u003C\u002Fstrong> to \u003Cstrong>Half color\u003C\u002Fstrong> to keep some of each slide's color, or \u003Cstrong>Black and white\u003C\u002Fstrong> to take it all out, and set \u003Cstrong>Darken Pictures\u003C\u002Fstrong> to A little, More or Most to darken each picture evenly, so white text reads over a light photo. Your uploaded pictures stay as they are; only the banner shows them this way.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":252,"question":253,"answerHtml":254},"shade-behind-menu-over-photos","My menu is hard to read over a light photo. Can the photo be darker behind it?","\u003Cp>Yes. In your site's CMS, open Menu Layouts, then Header menu, then Settings, and set \u003Cstrong>Finish\u003C\u002Fstrong> to \u003Cstrong>Plain, with a darker top right corner over photos\u003C\u002Fstrong>. The opening picture of each page then darkens gently toward its top right corner, where the menu sits, and stays clear everywhere else. Once a visitor scrolls, the header becomes the plain solid band. \u003Cstrong>Default\u003C\u002Fstrong> instead puts a dark gradient across the whole top of the photo, and \u003Cstrong>Plain\u003C\u002Fstrong> has no shade at all.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":256,"question":257,"answerHtml":258},"header-layout-menu-down-the-right-side","Can the menu be listed down the right side of the page?","\u003Cp>Yes. In your site's CMS, open Menu Layouts, then Header menu, then Settings. Under \u003Cstrong>Layout\u003C\u002Fstrong>, choose \u003Cstrong>Stacked: logo left, menu listed down the right side\u003C\u002Fstrong> and save. On a computer the logo sits alone in the bar at the top left and the menu items are listed one under another down the right side, the first one level with the site name. Page content keeps clear of that column. Items nested under a menu item are listed under it: the section a visitor is in stays open, and the small arrow beside any other item opens it. An item set to No Link opens and closes its list when clicked and goes nowhere itself; the phone menu does the same. With \u003Cstrong>On scroll\u003C\u002Fstrong> set to \u003Cstrong>Stays fixed at the top\u003C\u002Fstrong>, the list stays in place as the page scrolls. On phones, and whenever the site uses the hamburger menu, the menu opens from the menu button as usual.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":260,"question":261,"answerHtml":262},"smaller-carousel-arrows","Can the carousel arrows be smaller, without a box?","\u003Cp>Yes. In your site's CMS, open Theme, then Advanced, then \u003Cstrong>Buttons & Arrows\u003C\u002Fstrong>, and set \u003Cstrong>Arrows\u003C\u002Fstrong> to \u003Cstrong>Minimal\u003C\u002Fstrong>. The previous and next arrows on every carousel, including the home banner, then show as the arrow alone with no box, in the color of what they sit on (white over a photo), and come to full strength when a visitor points at them. \u003Cstrong>Boxed\u003C\u002Fstrong>, the default, draws them as a small box in your button style. Save the theme to apply it across the site.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":264,"question":265,"answerHtml":266},"picture-viewer-background","Can the full-screen picture viewer have a white background?","\u003Cp>Yes. In your site's CMS, open Theme, then Advanced, then \u003Cstrong>Images\u003C\u002Fstrong>, and set \u003Cstrong>Picture Viewer\u003C\u002Fstrong> to \u003Cstrong>Light\u003C\u002Fstrong>. A picture opened full screen then sits on your page background (white on a white theme) with the caption in your text color. \u003Cstrong>Dark\u003C\u002Fstrong>, the default, shows it on a dark screen.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The picture in the viewer has the same corners as the pictures on your pages, set by \u003Cstrong>Rounded Pictures\u003C\u002Fstrong> on the same tab. An artist site starts with square corners.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":268,"question":269,"answerHtml":270},"footer-column-headings","Can I put headings over the links in my footer?","\u003Cp>Yes. In the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">website editor\u003C\u002Fa>, open Footer and choose Links. Click + Add column heading, type the heading, then drag links under it (drag a row to the right to nest it). Each heading becomes a titled column of the links nested under it. Links that are not under a heading stay in a column of their own.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A footer with no headings keeps its usual layout, set by the Columns setting on the footer's Settings tab.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":272,"question":273,"answerHtml":274},"mailing-list-button-in-the-footer","Can I put a Mailing List button in my footer?","\u003Cp>Yes. In the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">website editor\u003C\u002Fa>, open Footer and choose Links. Under \u003Cstrong>Buttons\u003C\u002Fstrong>, click + Add button, type Mailing List as the Display Label, and set Type to \u003Cstrong>Member Popup\u003C\u002Fstrong>. The button then opens your signup pop-up, where visitors join your list. The pop-up's heading, message and which list people join are in Site Settings, Email Popup.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A footer button can also go to a page, another website, or a file. These buttons show only in the footer. To show your header buttons in the footer as well, set Repeat the header buttons in the footer to Yes on the footer's Settings tab.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":276,"question":277,"answerHtml":278},"use-the-header-menu-in-the-footer","Can my footer show the same menu as my header?","\u003Cp>Yes. In the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">website editor\u003C\u002Fa>, open Footer, choose Settings, and set \u003Cstrong>Use the header menu in the footer\u003C\u002Fstrong> to Yes. The footer then shows the same links as your header menu, in the same order, and a dropdown becomes a titled column. You keep one menu up to date instead of two.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The list under Footer, Links is kept but not shown while this is on. Set it back to No to use that separate list again.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":280,"question":281,"answerHtml":282},"stat-countdown","How do I show a countdown clock on a stat?","\u003Cp>In a Stats block, each stat has a Count Down To field, a date and time. When it is set, a running clock in days, hours, minutes and seconds shows under the stat's label until that moment. Then the clock goes away and the stat stays as you typed it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The clock looks the same as the ones on auction lots and drops. Use it for a dated stat, such as a festival's opening night. Leave the field empty for a stat with no clock.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":284,"question":285,"answerHtml":286},"sliding-rows-and-heading-links","How do I show a section as one sliding row, like a streaming app?","\u003Cp>Four blocks can show their items as one row that slides sideways, with arrows at the ends: Card grid (set Layout to Carousel), News Index (set Layout to Strip), Events (set Layout to Strip) and Video Row (set Layout to Strip). On a phone the row swipes. A row that has more than fits shows part of the next card at the right edge, so visitors can see there is more. The row opens with its first card at the left edge and only the right arrow; once a visitor moves it, it runs in a loop both ways.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Each of those blocks also has Heading Link. Pick a page there and the section's heading becomes a link to it, with an arrow after the heading, so the heading of a row of four products can open the whole shop and the heading of five events can open the full calendar.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A Card grid fills the width of its section, with its heading at the left edge. Its Width setting keeps that as Full width; Text column narrows the grid to the width of the writing on the page, for two or three cards under a paragraph.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>In a Featured Spotlight, a Card grid carousel and the rows of episodes, every card picture has the same shape, so the dates and titles under the cards line up. The row picks the shape: square when every picture is square art such as podcast covers, widescreen otherwise. To choose it yourself, set the Featured Spotlight's Image Shape to Widescreen, Square, Upright or Tall. Every picture then takes that shape, cropped to fit.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":288,"question":289,"answerHtml":290},"featured-episode-large-layout","Can the featured episode at the top of my Episodes page be bigger?","\u003Cp>Yes. Your Episodes page is built from settings, so open Site Settings, then Podcasts\u002FEpisodes, and in the Episodes page switches set Featured Episode Layout to Large. On any other page, open its Featured Spotlight block and set Layout to Large. The newest episode then shows as a wide picture with a play button beside a big title, on a band in your theme's dark color, with the next three episodes in a row underneath. When it is the first block on the page it runs up under the header, the way a hero does. Standard, the default, keeps the card with the picture beside the title and the scrolling row of recent episodes.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":292,"question":293,"answerHtml":294},"monthly-quiz-receipt-style","Can my monthly quiz look like a receipt?","\u003Cp>Yes. Open the page, open its Monthly Quiz block, and set Style to Receipt. The quiz's name, month and intro sit beside a paper receipt. Each answer is a calculator key, a coin fills in for every right answer, and after each question the receipt prints the right answer, the point and the total so far, with the same explanation and Where it came from link as the other styles. The keys and coins use your theme's highlight color. Classic and Arcade stay available, and the questions are the same in every style.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":296,"question":297,"answerHtml":298},"monthly-quiz-box-color","Can I change the color of my monthly quiz box?","\u003Cp>Yes. Open the page, open its Monthly Quiz block, and with Style on Classic set Box Color. Highlight, the default, puts the quiz on your theme's highlight color. Panel puts it on your theme's soft panel color, the one your other boxes use, with your theme's own text colors. The questions and the game are the same either way.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":300,"question":301,"answerHtml":302},"recents-picture-shape","Why does one picture in my Recents look a different size, and how do I even it out?","\u003Cp>When your Recents shows only episodes, each card shows the episode's picture at the shape it was uploaded. Most shows use their square cover for every episode, so one episode with its own wide photo comes out shorter and breaks the row. Open the page, open its Recents block, and set Picture Shape to Square or Wide. Every episode picture then sits in the same frame, cropped around its focal point, and the rows line up. As uploaded, the default, keeps each picture's own shape. When your Recents also shows social posts, every picture always keeps its own shape and this setting has no effect.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":304,"question":305,"answerHtml":306},"publish-news-or-blog-articles","Can I publish news or blog articles?","\u003Cp>Yes. Open a site in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">Website Builder\u003C\u002Fa>, then choose Entries and News \u002F Blog. Each post gets its own page, an author, a publish date (set it in the future to schedule), and optional categories and tags. Each post also chooses who can read it (everyone, members, or paid subscribers). Add the News \u002F Blog block to any page to list your latest posts automatically.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Every article has a Type. News is the standard feed; the + New Type button above the article list adds another (Press, for example), and picking a type there writes posts of that type. A News \u002F Blog block on your site lists one type (News unless you change it in the block's settings), so a new type stays off your pages until you place a block for it.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":308,"question":309,"answerHtml":310},"feature-an-episode-in-an-article","How do I feature an episode inside an article or page?","\u003Cp>Add the Episode Link block, in the Podspun Dataweaver: Podcasts section of the block picker. Start typing an episode title and pick it from the list: the block shows that episode's image, big, with a play badge and a "Watch the Episode" label, linked to the episode's page on your site. You can change the label in the block's settings.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Articles written from an episode (the Write From an Episode button and auto-drafts) include this block automatically, so every generated article features the episode it came from.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":312,"question":313,"answerHtml":314},"feature-an-article-on-the-home-page","How do I feature an article on the home page?","\u003Cp>Open the article in the editor, go to Config, and set Feature on Home to Yes. A Live Now block set to Automatic can then promote it. Leave Feature From and Feature Until empty to feature it for as long as the switch is on, or set them to give the feature a window, after which the hero moves on by itself. A live event or tonight's event still comes first; the article shows when nothing is on the air. To force one article to the top regardless, set the Live Now block's Feature to An article I choose and pick it there.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":316,"question":317,"answerHtml":318},"news-partner-sponsored-label","How do I mark an article as partner coverage or sponsored?","\u003Cp>Open the article in the editor and find Disclosure next to Publication Name and Publication Logo. Choose Partner coverage for coverage that ran under a media partnership, or Sponsored for paid placement. The label shows beside the date on the article's card in every news listing and in the byline at the top of the article. None (the default) shows nothing.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":320,"question":321,"answerHtml":322},"offer-expiry","How do offers and giveaways end on their own?","\u003Cp>In an Offer Grid block, each offer has Starts and Ends fields (a date and time), plus Sponsor or Operator, Eligibility, and an Official Rules link. Once an offer's Ends time has passed it shows Ended in place of its entry button, so nobody can enter a finished giveaway. By default an ended offer also drops off the page. Turn on Show Ended Offers on the block to keep past offers listed with the Ended label.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Keep one Offer Grid block for a promotion and reuse it on Home and on your Offers page, so changing the end time in one place updates every page that shows it. A third-party auction is the same thing: name the operator in Sponsor or Operator and put its close time in Ends. Dated offers show a running countdown to their opening or closing time. Leave the link empty for a sample card that cannot be entered.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>For auction lots, set the block's Card Style to Auction lots. Each card then shows whether the lot is Live now, Closing soon (its last two days), Upcoming or Ended, the time bidding opens or closes in the visitor's own time zone, and a large countdown in days, hours, minutes and seconds. The auction house goes in Sponsor or Operator and the estimate, such as $800 to $1,200, in Price. Give an upcoming lot a Starts time as well as an Ends time.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":324,"question":325,"answerHtml":326},"video-row","How do I show YouTube videos that play on my page?","\u003Cp>Add a Video Row block and add a video for each one you want. Paste the YouTube address into Video Link (a watch link, a share link or a Short all work), and add a Title and Maker if you want words under the picture. A Facebook video or reel address works too.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Each video shows YouTube's own picture until someone clicks it, then opens in a large player in a pop-up over the page. Closing the pop-up stops the video and leaves the page where it was. Nothing loads from YouTube before that click. Choose Picture only when you want a different still than YouTube's. Facebook has no picture to borrow, so give a Facebook video a Picture; it plays in Facebook's own player, and a reel stays upright like a Short.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Layout picks Grid, which shows every video and wraps onto new rows, or Strip, one row that slides sideways with arrows. A Short stays upright and a widescreen video stays wide in both. Heading Link turns the heading into a link to a page with more videos.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":328,"question":329,"answerHtml":330},"directory-block","How do I make a directory of places and links people can filter?","\u003Cp>Add a Directory block and add an entry for each place or thing to follow: a convention, a shop, a haunted attraction, a website, a podcast. Give each one a Name, a Kind, a Picture, In Person or Online, and a Link. City, State or Country, ZIP Code, When and Note are optional.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Each entry shows as a card with its picture. In-person entries are grouped under Places to go and the rest under Online. Visitors can narrow the cards with the \u003Cstrong>Category\u003C\u002Fstrong> dropdown (a whole group or one kind), the \u003Cstrong>State\u003C\u002Fstrong> dropdown, or the search box. Typing in the search box narrows the cards by name and place as they type. A ZIP code, a city and state, or a street address, followed by Enter, puts the nearest places first, each with how many miles away it is, and \u003Cstrong>Distance\u003C\u002Fstrong> keeps only those within that many miles. The dropdowns come from what you enter, so the first entry of a new kind adds it to Category.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":332,"question":333,"answerHtml":334},"line-under-the-logo","How do I put a tagline under my logo in the header?","\u003Cp>Open Site Settings, then Icons & Share Graphics, and type it in Line Under The Logo. It shows under your logo in the header on every page. Leave the field empty to show no line.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":336,"question":337,"answerHtml":338},"follow-button-in-the-header","How do I change or remove the Follow button in my header?","\u003Cp>The Follow link or button in your header opens your Join pop-up, where visitors sign up. For a signed-in member it reads Member and opens their members page. Every new website starts with one.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>It is an ordinary entry in your header, of the Member Popup type, so you change it where you change the rest of the menu. Open your website in Website Builder, then Menu Layouts and Header. On the Links tab, look for Follow in the menu list, or under Buttons further down. Type a new Display Label to rename it, such as Join or Mailing List, drag it to move it, or press the X on its row to remove it. Then save.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>To add one back, add a link or a button there and set its Type to Member Popup.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":340,"question":341,"answerHtml":342,"guideHtml":343},"event-calendars","Can I publish events and let visitors subscribe to a calendar?","\u003Cp>Open your website, then Content, Calendar & Events. Add dates, a time zone, tags, an image and the links visitors need. Date-only events keep their calendar dates everywhere; timed events display in the visitor's time zone. A canceled event stays labeled as canceled.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Add an Events block to a page and set its Layout: event cards, a date list, a month calendar, or a strip (one sliding row of event cards, made for a home page). Layout is the layout the calendar opens in, and a new block starts as event cards. A strip's cards have Event details only, which opens the event on the page its Heading Link points to, with its details showing. In cards and strips, an event without an image shows your site's logo in its place, so every card keeps the same shape. Choose tags to make separate calendars, such as screenings and festival announcements. Set Opening Month to a month such as 2026-10 to open the calendar there, or leave it empty to start at the next event. Visitors pick a layout with the Cards, List and Calendar switch and a tag from the Display dropdown, and move month by month with the buttons named for the months before and after, in the list and cards as well as the month calendar. Every event has an Event details link under its text. It opens the event's picture, date, place, tags, whole note and its own link, with an Add to your calendar panel: Apple Calendar, Google Calendar, Outlook.com and Microsoft 365, each with its mark. Adding an event happens only in that pop-up; rows, cards and strips carry no calendar buttons. The Add Calendar button opens the same panel to subscribe to the matching calendar, with a download and the subscription link. Calendar Button changes what that button says, such as Add the 12AM Calendar. A downloaded .ics file is a one-time copy; subscriptions refresh on the calendar provider's schedule.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A calendar with the layout switch or the Display dropdown has a \u003Cstrong>search box\u003C\u002Fstrong> on the right. Typing narrows the events by name, place, tag or note as you type, and the matches from every month show together as a list. When events have a City or a ZIP Code, the same box takes a ZIP code or an address, with Distance as a small dropdown under it, so visitors see the nearest events first and how many miles away each one is. An event's ZIP Code is used only for that and is not shown on the site.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Turn on \u003Cstrong>Countdown Clocks\u003C\u002Fstrong> on an Events block to show a running countdown on each event that has not started, such as Starts in 9d 4h 12m 05s, in place of the word Upcoming. A date-only event counts to the start of its first day in the event's own time zone.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-events\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">Website Builder · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Give your events a calendar.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>Publish events with tickets and calendar subscriptions, with dates displayed in the right time zone.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"Calendar & Events sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#events-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#events-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#events-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#events-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"events-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Have the event’s date, local time, time zone, location and ticket or visitor link ready. A time zone is essential when visitors may be in other places.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"events-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Create the event record\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fevents-1.jpg\" alt=\"Calendar & Events: Create the event record\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Create the event record\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Content → Calendar & Events and add an event. Enter Title, description, picture and alt text. Add Venue, City and Country where relevant; ZIP Code supports distance search without being shown publicly. Keep Status on Draft while reviewing.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Open Content, then Calendar & Events, and add an event. Write a clear title and description.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Use the event record for information that should stay consistent wherever the event appears on the website.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Set dates, time zone and visitor links\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fevents-2.jpg\" alt=\"Calendar & Events: Set dates, time zone and visitor links\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Set dates, time zone and visitor links\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Choose Time Zone, start and end dates and times, or Date Only for an all-day event. Add the ticket \u002F RSVP destination, stream or replay link where needed. Timed events can display in the visitor’s zone; date-only events keep their date and do not become live countdown events.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Set the date and time zone, then add the image and visitor links. Check the venue and any ticket destination against the event organiser’s information.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Review the difference between the event’s local time and the time a visitor in another zone may see. Do not copy a time without its intended zone.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Choose status and the website presentation\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fevents-status.jpg\" alt=\"Calendar & Events: Choose status and the website presentation\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Choose status and the website presentation\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Save the event and set Published when it is ready to appear. In an Events block, choose the intended list, cards, month or strip presentation and its tags or film filter. Draft events are hidden; Canceled events remain labeled as canceled until they are past.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Opening Month controls the calendar’s initial month. Countdown and Calendar Button are optional presentation choices. A strip’s Heading Link can lead to Event Details; choose the view that makes the next action easy to find.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 4\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Check details, tickets and calendar options\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fevents-3.jpg\" alt=\"Calendar & Events: Check details, tickets and calendar options\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Check details, tickets and calendar options\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open the website as a visitor. Check the event’s date, displayed zone, venue and ticket link. Test its calendar options and narrow layout. Update the original event record when information changes so every block using it stays consistent.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Visitors can add events to Google, Apple, Outlook or Microsoft 365 calendars. A one-event ICS download is different from subscribing to a calendar that updates periodically. Check the date and zone in the exported event before relying on it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Add an Events block to the website and review the event as a visitor. Open its details and ticket link.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Check the calendar options or subscription where offered. Try the event on a phone and confirm that its date, location and action remain easy to find.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Add a live show using the venue’s local time zone and an external ticket link. Open the public event, follow the ticket link and check the calendar entry’s time.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"events-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>Date and time zone match the organiser’s information.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Venue and ticket links are correct.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>The event and calendar options work on mobile.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"events-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>The time looks wrong\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Review the event’s configured time zone and the visitor’s displayed zone.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>The event does not appear where expected\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Check the Events block and which event records it displays.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":345,"question":346,"answerHtml":347},"events-block-which-events-show","How does the Events block choose what to show?","\u003Cp>The Events block lists the event records you manage under Content, \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Ffilm\u002Fevents\">Calendar & Events\u003C\u002Fa>, in your website's menu. Under Which Events, All upcoming events (the default) shows every published event that is still ahead or on the air, soonest first, up to the number you set in How Many. Events I choose shows only the ones you pick, in the order you pick them. Only the events typed below ignores the shared records and shows the entries typed into the block itself.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Each event carries a status: Upcoming, Tonight, Today (for a date-only event), Live now, Replay, Ended, or Canceled. Tonight and Today are worked out on the visitor's own calendar day, and times are shown in the visitor's own time zone with the event's local time in brackets when they differ. The button follows the state: RSVP or tickets before the event, Watch live while it is on, Watch the replay after. An event without a replay link reads as Ended. A date-only event is never shown as live. With a film chosen, the block also lists that film's screenings from Film Studio.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":349,"question":350,"answerHtml":351},"show-social-posts-on-my-website","How do I show my TikTok and Instagram posts on my website?","\u003Cp>Use the Podspun Dataweaver blocks in the website builder. \u003Cstrong>Social Feed\u003C\u002Fstrong> shows the latest posts from one account as a strip or grid. \u003Cstrong>Social Explorer\u003C\u002Fstrong> shows the whole catalog, posts and any episodes, with Ask & Search, clusters, topics, filters, and sorting.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Cstrong>Live Portrait\u003C\u002Fstrong> reads every channel included on the site together with its published news. It shows recurring subjects, recent changes, people, time periods, and topics found in more than one source. Each finding links to the episode, post, or article behind it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Social tiles open the post on the current page, playing from Podspun's own archive, with a link to TikTok or Instagram for liking and commenting. Nothing is embedded from the platforms.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":353,"question":354,"answerHtml":355},"related-social-posts-on-a-page","How do I show my Instagram and TikTok posts about the same place as a page or blog post?","\u003Cp>Add the \u003Cstrong>Related Social Posts\u003C\u002Fstrong> block to the page or post (it is in the Social section of Add a block). In the block's settings there are three ways to fill it. \u003Cstrong>Search Posts\u003C\u002Fstrong> searches your captions; with the box empty it lists your newest posts. \u003Cstrong>Scan This Page\u003C\u002Fstrong> has the AI read the page's title and text, including edits you have not saved yet, and suggest your posts about the same places. \u003Cstrong>Describe What To Find\u003C\u002Fstrong> takes one sentence in your own words, like \"posts from the Path of the Gods hike\", and suggests posts for it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The AI only suggests. Each suggestion shows why it matched, and you choose \u003Cstrong>Add\u003C\u002Fstrong> or \u003Cstrong>Skip\u003C\u002Fstrong> for each one (or Add all). Drag the chosen posts into the order you want. On the page they show as a strip or a grid, and each tile opens the post in place, the same way the Social Feed does. A post you later hide or delete drops out on its own.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":357,"question":358,"answerHtml":359},"filter-posts-by-whats-in-the-picture","Can visitors filter my posts by what is in the picture?","\u003Cp>Yes. Every post's cover is read when it is imported, and the posts page offers an \"In the picture\" filter built from what was found: with people, posed for camera, landscapes, cities, food, animals, indoors, memes and screenshots, and posters and graphics.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A filter only appears once at least three posts match it, so a visitor never presses one and finds nothing. Nothing needs setting up: covers are read automatically as posts arrive.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":361,"question":362,"answerHtml":363},"what-is-the-destinations-block","What is the Categories block?","\u003Cp>Categories sorts your episodes and posts into cards by what your show is about. A travel show gets Destinations (one card per country or city), a true-crime show gets its cases, a cooking show its dishes, an interview show its guests. Each card names the thing, a small line over it says what group it belongs to (a region, a decade, a cuisine), and it shows how many episodes and posts it has and its newest episode's picture. A card with two or more episodes opens its own page; a card with one goes straight to that episode or post.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Podspun reads each episode's title and description, and each post's caption, and sorts it. A passing mention does not count, and neither does a trailer that lists things from other episodes. When your site is made, Podspun names three ways to sort it and sorts every episode into all three; you pick the one to show in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">Site Settings\u003C\u002Fa>, on the Categories tile, and can switch at any time. Use Categories, at the top of that tile, turns the whole feature on or off for the site.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Each card is a stack of up to three of its pictures with the name and count under it, the same look as on the Live Portrait, in the Social Explorer and under Other on a card page. Every new site has the block on its home page and the same cards as a section of its Live Portrait; any site can add it with Add block. It stays hidden on your live site until there are three cards, and while Use Categories is off; the editor says which. Under the first few cards, an Explore all button opens your explorer page, where every card is listed.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":365,"question":366,"answerHtml":367},"destinations-countries-or-cities","Do the Destinations cards show countries or cities?","\u003Cp>One or the other, never a mix. Set it with Cards Show in Site Settings, on the Categories tile (it shows when your category is Destinations). Automatic (the default) shows one card per country, unless almost all of your episodes are in one country; then it shows one card per city or area inside it, such as Rome, Florence and Sicily. If you add episodes from new places later, Automatic picks again. The note under Cards Show says what it picked and why, for example \"Right now: Countries. Your episodes visit 17 countries.\"\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Choose Countries or Cities and areas to decide yourself; the block then stops switching until you choose Automatic again. Your pins, hidden cards and added cards are kept for each choice, so switching back restores them.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A region that spans several countries, such as the Caribbean, is not a card. An episode about it counts toward each country it names; if it names none, it is on no card, and you can add it to a country yourself.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":369,"question":370,"answerHtml":371},"why-did-my-site-get-destinations","Why did my new site get a Categories block, and how do I remove it?","\u003Cp>Every new site gets one. When Podspun builds a site from your show, it sorts the episodes three ways (see Site Settings, Categories) and puts the Categories block on your home page, after the newest episodes and posts. A show about places (travel, food travel, outdoors, history told place by place) gets Destinations as its first category; every other show gets what fits it, such as cases, guests or topics. The block stays hidden on your live site until there are three cards, and the editor says so. A new site starts with Use Categories on (Site Settings, Categories), so it also gets its explorer page in the menu: Social Explorer at \u002Fsocial when the site has TikTok or Instagram, Explore at \u002Fexplore when it does not.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>To hide the cards everywhere, set Use Categories to No. To remove only the home page block, open the home page in the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">page editor\u003C\u002Fa> and delete the block, or turn it off with its On\u002FOff switch. Any show can add it later with Add block, and it fills itself from your episodes.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":373,"question":374,"answerHtml":375},"hide-pin-or-fix-a-destination","How do I hide, pin, add, or fix a card?","\u003Cp>Open \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">your website\u003C\u002Fa>, then Site Settings and the Categories tile. Under the category options is the list of your cards.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Order:\u003C\u002Fstrong> cards follow the block's Sort Order: Most episodes (the biggest card first), Newest episode, or A to Z. To set the order yourself, drag any card by its handle and drop it where you want it. That card, and the cards above it, become your order and always come first; the rest keep following the Sort Order. The pin button adds a card to your order or takes it out again.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Hide\u003C\u002Fstrong> (the crossed-out eye) takes a card off the page. It moves to the hidden list at the bottom and stays hidden, even when new episodes about it arrive. Show again brings it back.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Fix an episode:\u003C\u002Fstrong> click a card's arrow to see its episodes. Move to puts one on another card (or, for Destinations, any country); Remove takes it off this card. You can also search for an episode to add.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Rename\u003C\u002Fstrong> (the pencil) changes the words on a card. \u003Cstrong>Merge into\u003C\u002Fstrong>, inside an opened card, joins its episodes to another card when the reader spelled one thing two ways. Both are for named categories; Destinations uses the world's own names.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>+ Add\u003C\u002Fstrong> adds a card yourself: for Destinations a country (and the city or area when the cards show cities), for any other category a name and its group, then the episodes that belong on it.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003Cp>Your changes are kept on the site, per category, so new episodes and later readings never undo them.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":377,"question":378,"answerHtml":379},"change-what-the-categories-cards-are","How do I change what my Categories cards are, or fix a card?","\u003Cp>Open \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">your website\u003C\u002Fa>, then Site Settings and the Categories tile. It has six parts.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Use Categories:\u003C\u002Fstrong> Yes shows your categories in the Social Explorer, the cards on your home page and Live Portrait, and adds your explorer page to the menu if the site has none. No hides the cards. Sites made before the switch existed start on No.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Your categories:\u003C\u002Fstrong> every category, each a cluster in your Social Explorer, in the order they show there (drag a row to move it; the first is where the explorer opens). Each has Show in Social Explorer, Rename and Delete, and + Add a category adds one. Years is always the last cluster.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Featured on home page and Live Portrait:\u003C\u002Fstrong> the one category whose cards the Categories block and the Live Portrait section show, and whether the Live Portrait shows them at all.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Include news articles:\u003C\u002Fstrong> also sort your News articles into every category.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Filters in the sidebar:\u003C\u002Fstrong> which filters your Social Explorer shows, with Podspun's pick for each.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Cards:\u003C\u002Fstrong> a tab for each category with its cards: pin a card to the top and drag pinned cards into order, hide a card and Show again, open a card to move or remove an episode or add one, and add a card by hand. A named category (cases, guests, dishes) can also merge two cards and rename a card.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003Cp>Click Save to keep your changes. They are kept on the site, so a later reading never undoes them.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":381,"question":382,"answerHtml":383},"add-rename-hide-or-delete-a-category","How do I add, rename, hide or delete a category?","\u003Cp>In Site Settings, Categories, under Your categories. \u003Cstrong>+ Add a category\u003C\u002Fstrong> asks for a Name, What Counts As One Card (for example \"The dishes and restaurants in each post\") and, if you like, Group Cards By (the small line over each card, such as Cuisine). Click Add and sort: Podspun reads every post, episode and article on your site and sorts it into the new category, only that one, so your other categories stay as they are. It takes up to an hour, and the cluster shows in your Social Explorer once it has three cards. A site can have up to six categories.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Cstrong>Rename\u003C\u002Fstrong> changes the name everywhere the category shows. \u003Cstrong>Show in Social Explorer: No\u003C\u002Fstrong> takes it out of the explorer's clusters but keeps its cards, so it can still be the featured one. \u003Cstrong>Delete\u003C\u002Fstrong> first lists what it will change on your site, worked out for that category: its cluster leaving the Social Explorer, which category the explorer, home page and Live Portrait switch to, how many card pages stop opening, and, for a places category, the Where filter. Then it asks you to type DELETE, and removes the category and its cards from your site when you click Save; your posts and episodes stay. A deleted category goes to Recently deleted, under your categories (the last ten), and Restore brings it back as it was, with its cards, when you click Save; nothing is sorted again. A site keeps at least one category. Drag the rows to change the order of the clusters.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":385,"question":386,"answerHtml":387},"social-explorer-sidebar-filters","Which filters does my Social Explorer show, and can I change them?","\u003Cp>Under the clusters, the Social Explorer's sidebar can show five filters: Platform (where each item came from), Where (part of the world, then country), In the Picture (what Podspun sees in each photo), Topics (the topics tagged on each item, with a search box) and Date.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Podspun picks which ones fit your site from what it already read, at no cost: In the Picture when most of your photos show a place, a thing or an activity rather than only people and graphics, Where when a good share of your items are about real places, Platform when you have two or more sources, and Topics and Date always. So a travel or food account gets In the Picture, and a true-crime show, whose photos are mostly people, does not.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>In Site Settings, Categories, Filters in the sidebar lists all five with Podspun's pick and why, and a Yes or No for each that you can change. A filter with nothing to show stays hidden either way. Sites made before this setting keep all five until you change one.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":389,"question":390,"answerHtml":391},"what-is-on-a-destination-page","What is on a card's page?","\u003Cp>A card with two or more episodes or posts gets its own page, at an address like \u002Fexplorations\u002Fmexico or \u002Fexplorations\u002Fted-bundy, whatever the category. Older addresses (\u002Fdestinations\u002Fmexico, \u002Fcategories\u002Fted-bundy) forward there. It shows the card's name, its group line, how many episodes, posts and articles it has, for a country the cities or areas inside it, and then the items newest first in up to three lists: Episodes, Posts (which open in the usual post window) and, when Include news articles is on, News. Each list shows 50, then a Load more button. The breadcrumb reads Home, then your explorer page (Social Explorer or Explore), then the card. At the bottom, four more cards and a link back to the explorer.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A card with a single episode has no page: it goes straight to that episode. These pages exist only while your site has a Categories block.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":393,"question":394,"answerHtml":395},"browse-posts-by-destination-or-year","Can visitors browse my posts by destination or by year?","\u003Cp>Yes. Your Social Explorer page (it was called Social) opens with its name, how many posts there are, and the Ask & Search box across the page: search the words said in the posts, or ask AI. The first section of the sidebar is Clusters: All posts, then your site's categories in the order set in Site Settings, Categories (the page opens on the first, Destinations on a travel site; then others such as Activities), then Years, each with how many posts or stacks it shows. A link to one post, a topic or a photo opens All posts. Changing a filter brings the list back to its top, under the header. All posts is the wall of posts. The other clusters show the same posts as stacks, one for each destination, category or year, with its three newest pictures and how many posts it holds. Under the explorer are the topics in your most recent posts and your most viewed post.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>On a site that also has shows, the explorer holds the episodes too. The first cluster is then All episodes and posts, the counts read like 23 episodes · 2 posts, and the episodes list as rows (picture, date, length and title) above the wall of posts. With Include news articles on (Site Settings, Categories), your articles are listed too, under News. Episodes, posts and articles each show 50, then a Load more button; the list never keeps loading by itself as you scroll.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The sidebar filters (Platform, Where, In the picture, Topics and Date) apply to every cluster, so picking Italy under Where and then Years shows the years of your Italy posts. Clicking a stack narrows the wall to its posts, with a chip above the wall to clear it. A stack that has its own page (a destination such as California) shows a short preview instead, 8 posts, 3 episodes and 2 articles, with a See the California Page button beside the chip and a See all button under the preview; its page holds the rest. The filter sections start folded; click a heading to open it. A section with a pick in it opens by itself. Each filter list shows five rows and a \"more\" button, and Topics has its own search box.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":397,"question":398,"answerHtml":399},"the-all-destinations-page","Is there a page that lists all of my cards?","\u003Cp>Yes, your explorer page. On a site with TikTok or Instagram it is Social Explorer, at \u002Fsocial; on any other site it is Explore, at \u002Fexplore, the same page over your episodes and news. It is in your menu, and the Explore all button under the Categories block and the Live Portrait section opens it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>It opens on your category's cluster: every card is a stack of its three newest pictures with how many episodes, posts or articles it holds, and the same sidebar filters apply. Destinations take turns by part of the world, the biggest place in each first, so the first rows show the range of places. Clicking a stack narrows the list to its items, and a card that has its own page gets a link to it (See the Mexico Page).\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>When an Explore site connects TikTok or Instagram, the page renames itself Social Explorer and moves to \u002Fsocial, and \u002Fexplore forwards there, so no link breaks. The old \u002Fdestinations and \u002Fcategories addresses forward to your explorer page too.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":401,"question":402,"answerHtml":403},"when-does-destinations-update","When do the cards update?","\u003Cp>By themselves. Every hour Podspun reads new episodes and posts (and any episode whose description changed) for every site with a Categories block, for all three of its categories at once, and the new items slot into the cards. Opening Site Settings, Categories starts a read right away. On a preview, only the sample episodes are read; after you turn the site on, the rest of your catalog is read over the following hours.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Switching to another of your three categories reads nothing again: every episode was sorted into all three when it came in. Only shows on a site with a Categories block are ever read, so it adds nothing for anyone else.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":405,"question":406,"answerHtml":407},"how-places-and-photo-tags-are-read","How does Podspun know where a post was taken and what its photos show?","\u003Cp>For Instagram and TikTok posts, three things are read. The location you tagged when you posted (TikTok also gives the address) is the strongest sign of where the post was made. Every photo in the post, including every slide of a carousel, is looked at by a vision model, which describes it, gives it tags such as beach, food, museum or sunset, and names a landmark when one is clearly in the picture (the Eiffel Tower, the Louvre Pyramid). The caption is read last.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Destinations uses all three, so a post whose caption talks about one place but whose tagged location or photos show another is filed under the place in the photos. A beach on its own is never guessed to be any particular country; only your location tag or the caption can say which beach it is.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>On your site, the post popup shows the post's place and what its photos show, and the social wall's In the picture filters let visitors narrow to Beaches, Museums, Sunsets and the rest. Ask & Search also reads the photos, so a question about beach sunsets finds posts whose pictures show them. On a site with a Destinations block, it reads the place each post is about as well: a question about one town leads with the posts made there, and a post that lists the town among several places comes after them. New posts are read every hour.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":409,"question":410,"answerHtml":411},"search-site-content","Can visitors search my pages, news and products?","\u003Cp>The standard Search page finds published pages, news, events and visible products. Results show their type and link to the matching page. Private, unlisted and draft pages stay out, and members-only article text is excluded. Sites with connected shows also keep their episode search. A custom Search page continues to use its configured blocks.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":413,"question":414,"answerHtml":415},"wonder-search","What is Ask & Search?","\u003Cp>Ask & Search is the search on your website, trained on every word in every episode and post you have published. It is one box with a switch over it. Ask a question and you get an answer drawn from your own posts, with a link to each one it used. It also reads your site's News \u002F Blog articles, the outside news stories you list there, and a Substack you connected, and answers from them too. Switch to Find a word and you land on the exact moment a phrase was said, plus the News \u002F Blog articles and Substack posts that contain it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Visitors narrow a search with the line under the box (Searching all channels, Change), which opens Choose channels: each channel, plus your News or Blog (named what your site calls it), which covers your own articles and your Substack posts together.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>It runs on your site's Search page, at the end of your Live Portrait, and anywhere you place a Search block in the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">page editor\u003C\u002Fa>. The example chips under the box are yours to set in your site's CMS under Settings, in the Search tab.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Search reads transcripts, so it covers the episodes and posts that have one. For an Instagram or TikTok post it also reads the caption you typed under it, the location you tagged and what its photos show. On a site that is not turned on yet, that is the newest 10 of each show, and on a site still importing it is whatever has finished. Both Ask a question and Find a word work in either case, and the Search page states how many of the total are covered so far. Turning the site on adds the rest.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>When Ask a question finds nothing to answer from, the page still shows any episode whose title matches the question, marked Title match, so a visitor who asked for an episode by name or number can open it. The question still appears under Questions asked in your \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fanalytics\">Analytics\u003C\u002Fa>.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":417,"question":418,"answerHtml":419},"search-example-chips","Can I choose the example chips on my Search page?","\u003Cp>Yes. In your site's CMS, open Settings, then the Search tab. Two lists live there: up to six example chips for the Find a word side, and up to three example questions for the Ask a question side. The chips change with the switch, and a visitor who clicks one runs that search or asks that question. Standard example questions follow the visitor's selected website language. Leave a list empty and the site fills it with your own most common topics, read from your real posts.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":421,"question":422,"answerHtml":423},"change-the-search-loader","Can I change the loading animation on search?","\u003Cp>Yes. In your site's CMS open Theme, then Advanced, then Loader. That is the little animation that plays while an AI search is working. Pick Microphone (a podcast microphone that suits any show), True Crime (a fingerprint under a scan beam), Retro (an old TV tuning through static), Explorer (a compass finding its bearing), Film (a clapperboard snapping a take), or Artist (loose shapes and a brushstroke). Whichever you choose is drawn in your accent color automatically, so it always matches your theme. Each one brings its own line of text as well, so a film website reads Scanning the footage rather than Searching the episodes.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Your website starts with one already chosen for you. Three themes bring their own: Dark Cinematic the fingerprint, Retro Neon the old TV, and Voyage the compass. Otherwise it follows what your website is, so a film website starts with the clapperboard and an artist's with the Artist loader. Picking one of those themes later changes the loader with it, and you will see the new one marked in the Loader panel. Once you pick a loader yourself it is yours, and changing your theme after that leaves it alone.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":425,"question":426,"answerHtml":427},"distance-search","How do visitors find the places and events nearest to them?","\u003Cp>An Events block that shows the layout switch or the Display dropdown has a \u003Cstrong>ZIP code or address\u003C\u002Fstrong> box and a \u003Cstrong>Distance\u003C\u002Fstrong> dropdown once at least one listing has a place. A Directory block does the same through its one search box, which also finds entries by name. A visitor types a ZIP code, a city and state such as Burbank, CA, or a street address. The list then shows the nearest places first, each with how many miles away it is. Distance keeps only what is within 10, 25, 50, 100, 250 or 500 miles. On a month calendar the dates stay in order and events farther away drop out.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Each listing is measured from its \u003Cstrong>ZIP Code\u003C\u002Fstrong> when it has one, otherwise from its City and State. On a Directory entry the state goes in State or Country; on an event it can follow the city, as in Burbank, CA. A place too small for the US Census list of cities and towns, such as Ulster Park, NY, needs its ZIP Code. The ZIP Code is not shown on the site.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Listings without a place, such as online shops and live streams, follow the others and drop out once a Distance is chosen. The search covers the United States. Street addresses are looked up with the US Census Bureau's address service, and nothing a visitor types is saved.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":429,"question":430,"answerHtml":431,"guideHtml":432},"substack-for-ai-search","Can my site's AI read my Substack?","\u003Cp>Yes. Add it as a channel in the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fchannels\">Dataweaver\u003C\u002Fa>: choose Add channel, pick Substack, and enter your publication's address (a name.substack.com address, the custom domain your Substack is on, or your substack.com\u002F@name profile link). Podspun imports every post you have published there, like the episodes of a show. Subscriber-only posts are read as far as their free preview goes. It is listed with your other channels, with how many posts were imported and when. Its channel page has Check now and Remove.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Ask & Search then answers from your posts as well as your episodes, and the AI Site Editor uses them when it suggests article ideas and when it writes in your voice. Under the episode moments beside an answer, Related posts lists up to three of your posts the answer drew on, each with its picture, title, newsletter and date, opening the post on Substack. When an answer used none, that list does not show. Each website picks which Substack its AI reads in the site's Settings, Search tab.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>To list the posts on a website, turn on Substack Posts in News in that site's News \u002F Blog, Automation Config. Each post appears in News as a card with its title, date and cover picture that opens on Substack in a new tab. In the News \u002F Blog list they sit under their own Substack filter, apart from what you wrote. Turning it off stops adding new posts and leaves the ones already listed. Every post already read is added as soon as this is turned on. On a paid plan, new posts are read once a day and appear in News as soon as that read finishes.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A podcast episode your Substack publishes that is already on your site as an episode is not listed a second time. If your Substack has sections (separate newsletters), each post is filed under its newsletter's name as a News category, and posts from your main feed under your publication's name, so visitors can read one newsletter at a time.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>When you build a new site from a website that is your Substack, even on your own domain, Podspun recognizes it: it connects the Substack, lists your posts in News, and uses your Substack subscribe box for sign-ups.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Not on Substack, or starting a newsletter from scratch? You do not need it. \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fpaidposts\">News \u002F Blog\u003C\u002Fa> is Podspun's own: write a post, choose whether everyone, members or paid members can read it, and configure whether published posts are emailed to your members in News \u002F Blog, Automation Config. The website, the newsletter and the members are then on one platform. See \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fpodspun.com\u002Fhelp\u002Fusing-podspun\u002Fpaid-posts-members\">what News \u002F Blog is and how members work\u003C\u002Fa>.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-substack\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">Data & Integrations · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Bring your newsletter into search.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>Ask & Search and Site Editor Chat can use your imported Substack posts alongside episodes.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"Substack in your archive sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#substack-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#substack-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#substack-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#substack-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"substack-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Have your publication address ready and decide separately whether you want it used by search, listed as News cards, and used for newsletter sign-ups. You need access to the account and each website you are configuring. This walkthrough covers an existing website; new sites built from Substack may already have these choices filled in.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"substack-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Add your publication in Dataweaver\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fsubstack-1.jpg\" alt=\"Substack in your archive: Add your publication in Dataweaver\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Add your publication in Dataweaver\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Podspun Dataweaver → Add channel → Substack. Enter your publication’s name.substack.com address, custom domain or substack.com\u002F@name profile link. Choose Preview, check the publication name and post count, then Add channel.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Connect the publication that contains the posts you want to use. Preview confirms the address before importing. A profile link is resolved to its publication; do not use the URL of one individual post as the publication address.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Podspun reads published posts, including only the free preview of subscriber-only posts. Importing a publication does not import its subscriber list, copy paid-only text or send a newsletter.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Wait for the posts to finish importing\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fsubstack-import-status.jpg\" alt=\"Substack in your archive: Wait for the posts to finish importing\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Wait for the posts to finish importing\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open the new Substack channel. Check Posts, the read status and when it was last checked. Wait for the read to finish before expecting posts in search or News. Use Check now for a fresh read; it is unavailable while a read is already running.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A successful connection and a completed import are different stages. The channel page shows the imported count and any error. If the count has not appeared yet, revisit the status instead of adding a duplicate channel.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>On a paid plan, new posts are checked daily. Check now requests a fresh read; it does not bypass the publication’s paid-content boundary.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Choose which website reads this Substack\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fsubstack-2.jpg\" alt=\"Substack in your archive: Choose which website reads this Substack\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Choose which website reads this Substack\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Website Builder → Open Builder for the intended website. Go to Site Settings → Search → Your Substack. Under Substack This Site Reads, select the connected publication. This choice saves immediately. Each website makes its own selection; None stops using a Substack.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Adding a channel to the account does not automatically select it for every existing website. Configure each website that should use it. This source supplies Ask & Search and the AI Site Editor’s article ideas and writing voice.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Ask & Search can show up to three Related posts that its answer actually drew on, with links to the originals. The AI Site Editor can use the posts to draft articles in your voice; it does not automatically turn the article into a list of Substack citations.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 4\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Optionally list the posts in News \u002F Blog\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fsubstack-news.jpg\" alt=\"Substack in your archive: Optionally list the posts in News \u002F Blog\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Optionally list the posts in News \u002F Blog\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>In that website, open Content → News \u002F Blog → Automation Config. Turn Substack Posts in News \u002F Blog On, then Save Settings. Imported posts become title, date and cover-image cards that open the original Substack post in a new tab. Leave it Off if you only want the archive used by AI.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The listing is a separate setting from the source chosen under Search. Turning it On adds posts already read, then adds newly read posts when subsequent imports finish. Turning it Off stops new cards; cards already listed remain until removed.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A podcast episode already present on the website is not listed again as a duplicate Substack episode. Publication sections become News categories so readers can browse one newsletter at a time. Showing a card does not send it to members.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 5\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Optionally send newsletter sign-ups to Substack\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fsubstack-signups.jpg\" alt=\"Substack in your archive: Optionally send newsletter sign-ups to Substack\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Optionally send newsletter sign-ups to Substack\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Site Settings → Email Popup → Config. Under Signups Go To, choose Substack and fill Substack Address with the publication’s address. Save the settings. The website’s subscribe box then uses Substack’s form. Choose Podspun if you want new sign-ups stored in your Podspun list instead.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Search, News cards and newsletter sign-ups are independent choices. Connecting a publication does not move existing Podspun contacts or subscribers. A blank Substack Address falls back to the Podspun sign-up form, so confirm the address is present.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Open Automatically controls whether the sign-up popup appears by itself. If enabled, configure its delay and return behavior; it is not required for a visitor to open a sign-up button. New websites built from a recognized Substack start with the source, News cards and Substack sign-up choice configured; existing websites need these choices checked explicitly.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 6\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Check the listing, sign-up form and search sources\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fsubstack-list.jpg\" alt=\"Substack in your archive: Check the listing, sign-up form and search sources\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Check the listing, sign-up form and search sources\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open News \u002F Blog → List and select the Substack filter. Check a post’s title, date and original link, then open the website’s News presentation. Open its subscribe box and confirm the correct publication. Ask a specific question about an imported post and compare the answer with the original.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Use a concrete question from a post you can open, such as “What steps did my digital-decluttering post recommend?” The point is to verify the correct archive is connected. Related posts appears only when the answer actually used a post; its absence on an unrelated question is expected.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>News cards and website blocks are separate: a post in the CMS list needs a News block configured to appear on a page. Check that block’s type, category and other filters if an imported card is absent from the public presentation. Paid Substack access still happens on Substack.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 7\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Maintain the connection and troubleshoot missing posts\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fsubstack-manage.jpg\" alt=\"Substack in your archive: Maintain the connection and troubleshoot missing posts\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Maintain the connection and troubleshoot missing posts\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Return to the Dataweaver channel to check the latest read, errors and Where It Appears. Use those website links to review each site’s configuration. For a missing new post, request Check now and wait for completion before rechecking News. Do not reconnect the same publication just to refresh it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>If AI uses the wrong publication, check Substack This Site Reads. If News does not gain new cards, check Substack Posts in News \u002F Blog and the import status. If sign-ups reach the wrong place, check Signups Go To and Substack Address; changing search cannot fix sign-up routing.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Removing the channel disconnects that imported source from the account. It does not delete the original publication or its subscriber list, and existing website News cards are a separate listing. Review websites under Where It Appears before deciding to remove a connection.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Connect your publication once, choose it under one website’s Search settings, then turn News cards on for that website. Keep Signups Go To on Podspun if you want the website’s newsletter list to stay in Podspun. For a second website, make its source and listing choices separately.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"substack-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>The imported publication and post count are correct, with a completed read.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Each intended website selects that publication under Search.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>News listing is explicitly On or Off, and its settings have been saved.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Newsletter sign-up routing and the publication address are intentional.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>A public News card opens the original post, and the subscribe box shows the correct destination.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"substack-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>The publication connected but search ignores it\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Wait for the import to finish, then select the publication in the intended website’s Site Settings → Search.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>Posts are imported but absent from the website\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Turn on Substack Posts in News \u002F Blog, Save, then check the News block’s display filters.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>Turning the listing off did not remove old cards\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Off stops adding new cards. Previously listed cards remain; decide separately which existing cards to remove.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>Sign-ups still go to Podspun\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Choose Substack under Signups Go To, enter a nonblank Substack Address and Save.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>A paid post seems incomplete\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Only its free preview is imported. Subscribers read its full paid content on Substack.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":434,"question":435,"answerHtml":436,"guideHtml":437},"automatic-website-translation","Can my website automatically publish in more than one language?","\u003Cp>Yes. In Site Settings, open the Language tab, choose your Website Language, set Localize Site to Yes, then select additional languages under Also publish in. Your main address opens in your primary language. Podspun prepares and saves the translations, then adds each ready language to the visitor's picker with its own address.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>With Open in the visitor's language on, someone arriving at your site sees the version in the language their browser is set to, when your site is published in it. Choosing a language in the picker switches it and is remembered on their device, and a link to a specific language version always opens in that language. Search engines are never redirected, so every version stays in search results at its own address.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Published website text, navigation, buttons, forms, episode descriptions and search descriptions can be translated. Audio, transcripts, direct quotations and original social captions keep their original language. Visitors read saved translations, so switching languages does not start another translation job.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Automatic website translation is included at no additional charge for now.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-languages\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">Website Builder · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Let visitors choose their language.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>Your site in every language your audience needs, translated and kept current at no extra charge.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"Website languages sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#languages-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#languages-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#languages-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#languages-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"languages-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Confirm the site’s original language and choose the additional languages your audience needs. Review translated names, specialised terms and important instructions before relying on them.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"languages-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Set the website’s main language\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Flanguages-1.jpg\" alt=\"Website languages: Set the website’s main language\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Set the website’s main language\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Site Settings → Language. Website Language is the main language for the website, not just the language-picker label. Confirm it matches the original content before adding translations.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Open the website’s Site Settings, then Language. Confirm the original language before enabling additional ones.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Language configuration belongs to this website, so check that you are editing the correct site.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Choose the additional languages\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Flanguages-2.jpg\" alt=\"Website languages: Choose the additional languages\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Choose the additional languages\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Set Localize Site to Yes and choose the languages under Also Publish In. Leave the main language as the original. Save the settings; additional translations must finish preparing before visitors can select them.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Set Localize Site to Yes, choose the additional languages and save. Allow the translations to finish before judging the visitor experience.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>These are saved translations with a language picker and a separate address for each language. Keep the original content accurate so the translated versions have a reliable source.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Choose how visitors arrive\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Flanguages-visitor.jpg\" alt=\"Website languages: Choose how visitors arrive\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Choose how visitors arrive\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open in the visitor’s language optionally chooses a prepared language from the visitor’s browser preference. Decide whether to enable it, then Save. A visitor’s explicit language choice is remembered, and a direct language URL takes precedence.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Each language has its own address; the main language stays at the root. Automatic language opening does not redirect search engines. Keep the default language intentional instead of relying on the browser preference to correct a wrongly configured original.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 4\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Review and correct translations\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Flanguages-3.jpg\" alt=\"Website languages: Review and correct translations\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Review and correct translations\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Website Languages and inspect the Preparing, ready or failed status. Open a translation row to compare Source and Translation. Edit Translated Text and Save translation when needed; source changes can mark a manual translation for review. Test the public picker after preparation finishes.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Check navigation, buttons, forms and descriptions as well as article text. Original audio, transcripts, direct quotations and social captions remain in their source language. If preparation failed, use the available retry and check the status before expecting a language in the public picker.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Open the public site and use its language picker. Check headings, navigation and a representative page in each language.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Review names, calls to action, forms and any specialist vocabulary. Open a translated address directly as well as switching from the original page.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Add Italian to an English site, then open the Italian address directly. Check the header, an article and a contact form, including the wording of their buttons.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"languages-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>The original language is correct.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>The language picker and translated addresses work.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Important visitor instructions have been reviewed.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"languages-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>A translation is not ready\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Check its translation status before testing the public version.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>A name or specialist phrase reads poorly\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Review the wording and use the available editing controls before sharing that version.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":439,"question":440,"answerHtml":441},"maintaining-website-translations","What happens to translations when I edit or publish new content?","\u003Cp>Podspun checks published text and new imports every five minutes and translates the sections that changed. Longer updates may need more than one check to finish. Existing saved translations remain available while an update is prepared.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Open View translation progress and edit translations on the Language tab of Site Settings to see progress, update now, or correct individual translations. Your corrections stay in place. If their original text changes later, the translation is marked for review.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":443,"question":444,"answerHtml":445},"website-language-cleanup","How do I fix page text that is in the wrong language?","\u003Cp>Choose your Website Language on the Language tab of Site Settings, then open Content, Site Assistant, Translation Cleanup. It scans editable page text and shows suggested translations into your website language. Accept the changes you want, then open each page draft to review and publish it. Accepting a cleanup suggestion does not change the live page.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Use the additional language settings when you want visitors to choose another language for the site.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":447,"question":448,"answerHtml":449},"site-time-zone","What time zone are the dates on my website in?","\u003Cp>Whichever one you choose. Open \u003Cstrong>Settings\u003C\u002Fstrong> in your website editor and pick your \u003Cstrong>Time Zone\u003C\u002Fstrong> under the tagline; it starts on Pacific. Every date on your site is written in that zone: article dates, episode dates, the dates on cards and highlights, and the dates in this editor's lists.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>It matters most for scheduling. Set an article to publish at 5pm and it goes live at 5pm in your zone, and the date readers see is the date it was your evening, not the next morning somewhere else.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":451,"question":452,"answerHtml":453},"rank-in-google-and-ai-answers","Can I rank in Google and get cited by AI answer engines?","\u003Cp>That is the goal. Podspun builds your episode pages with clean structure and the structured data that search engines and AI answer engines read, so your show can rank in Google and get quoted by tools like ChatGPT and AI Overviews. Because every word is transcribed and indexed, there is real, searchable text on every page for them to pull from.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":455,"question":456,"answerHtml":457},"duplicate-content","If content lives on podspun.com and my own site, will Google call it duplicate?","\u003Cp>You pick which surfaces you use: podspun.com, your own domain, the Data API, or any mix. Your custom site runs on your domain with its own canonical setup, so it stands on its own. If you only want your own site indexed, you don't have to surface the same pages on podspun.com.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":459,"question":460,"answerHtml":461},"llms-txt-and-agents-json","Does my site tell AI assistants what is on it?","\u003Cp>Yes, automatically. Every Podspun site publishes two standard files that AI assistants and answer engines read: llms.txt, a plain guide to your shows, pages, and latest episodes, and agents.json, a machine-readable summary that points them to your full catalog and on-site search. There is nothing to set up; both stay current as you publish.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>To see them, open your site's CMS, then Site Settings and the SEO tile. Under Publish a guide for AI tools are links that open llms.txt and agents.json on your live site, and under Let AI tools read this website are links to robots.txt and sitemap.xml. The links appear once the site is live and public. Setting Publish a guide for AI tools to No takes both guide files down.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":463,"question":464,"answerHtml":465},"google-analytics-and-cookies","Can I use Google Analytics on my site?","\u003Cp>Yes. In your site's CMS, open Site Settings, then Integrations, and paste your Google Analytics measurement ID (it looks like G-XXXXXXX). Turn on the cookie consent banner in the same place and Analytics only loads after a visitor clicks Accept, so the setup stays compliant out of the box.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The banner has two buttons, Accept and Decline, and it remembers the choice for a year so it does not nag on every visit. Decline means Analytics never loads. A Cookie Preferences link is added to the footer so a visitor can change their mind later, which reopens the banner. Your podcast video embeds already use YouTube's no-cookie player, and Podspun's own visitor insights are cookieless, so Analytics is the only thing the banner needs to gate.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":467,"question":468,"answerHtml":469},"linking-to-your-own-pages","If I rename a page, do the links to it break?","\u003Cp>No. When you link a word to one of your own pages, pick the page from the list rather than typing an address. The link remembers the page itself, so renaming that page later moves every link with it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>To make one, select the words and choose Link. To change or remove one you already made, right-click it: the menu shows where it currently goes, and offers changing it, removing the link while keeping the words, or opening it in a new tab. Links to other people's sites open in a new tab on their own, so you never have to think about it.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":471,"question":472,"answerHtml":473},"redirect-old-addresses","Can I forward old web addresses to new pages?","\u003Cp>Yes. In your site's CMS, open Site Settings, then Key Domain Setup, then Redirects. Add the old address (the part after your domain, like \u002Fabout-the-show) and pick where it should send people. Anyone who visits the old address lands on the page you chose instead of a \"page not found\" screen. Useful when a page moves, or when this site replaces an older website whose links are still out there.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Each redirect has a Type of move. Permanent (the default) tells search engines the page moved for good and hands its ranking to the new one, which is what you want almost every time. Temporary is for a short detour: it sends visitors along but keeps the old address in search results, so use it only when the old page is coming back.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>To move a whole section at once, end the old address with a star, like \u002Fold-blog\u002F*, which catches that address and everything under it. End the destination with a star too (like \u002Fblog\u002F*) to keep the rest of each address, so \u002Fold-blog\u002F2020\u002Fmy-post lands on \u002Fblog\u002F2020\u002Fmy-post.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>When visitors have reached addresses on your site that do not exist, the page lists them under Addresses That Showed \"Page Not Found\", with how many visits each had in the last 30 days. These are often links to an older website. Press Add redirect beside one to start a redirect for it, pick where it sends people, and save.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The same page has With or Without www: Remove www, Add www, or Leave as entered. Both versions of your address work, and this picks which one visitors end up on.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":475,"question":476,"answerHtml":477},"migration-added-channels-i-did-not-paste","Why did my migration plan add channels I did not paste?","\u003Cp>When Podspun reads your existing website for a migration, it also reads the links on it. A YouTube channel, an Apple Podcasts show, a TikTok profile, or an Instagram profile the site links to is opened the same way a pasted channel is and added to the plan already ticked, as a chip at the top of the plan page. Each one says \"found on your site\", and the site is built with it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>To take one off the site, open the site in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">Website Builder\u003C\u002Fa>, then Site Settings, and turn it off under Podcasts\u002FEpisodes (or Social, for TikTok and Instagram).\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":479,"question":480,"answerHtml":481},"we-improved-your-import","What does \"We improved your import\" mean?","\u003Cp>A plan you analyzed but did not approve can be looked at by the Podspun team. When they fix something in it (a page that came across wrong, a theme, a missing channel), they leave a note on the plan and email you. The note appears at the top of the plan on \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fimports\u002Fready\">Imports Ready\u003C\u002Fa> and as a To-do on your \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Dashboard\u003C\u002Fa>.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Open the plan, click Preview draft of website to see the draft site as it stands now, then Approve and start migration when it looks right. Nothing is charged until you turn the site on.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":483,"question":484,"answerHtml":485},"website-workspace-and-results","How is my website workspace organized?","\u003Cp>Your website CMS groups pages, posts, events, Assets, and Contact Forms under Pages & Content, with Reusable Blocks last. AI Site Editor is its own sidebar section below Overview and above Pages & Content. Menu Layouts is directly below Pages & Content and above Site Settings. Key Domain Setup is at the top of Site Settings and includes hosting, domain, visibility, redirects, and Podspun Exposure. Images is under Look, alongside Theme and Icons & Share Graphics. Contact settings are grouped under Contact. Private features and Trash this website are at the bottom of Site Settings. The thin strip stays visible at the top while you scroll. Its website name links to Overview. Open website is a text link, which opens the live website when available or its preview otherwise. Overview shows your website's status, launch steps, and recent responses. Its cards have consistent spacing, and Recently edited uses the same full-width card and heading as Contact Forms. Form Submissions, under Email Campaigns in Account tools, shows contact form submissions across your websites. You can filter by website, search the answers, and open a submission. Viewing this page does not mark submissions as read. Account Activity shows responses across your websites, with unread counts and links to each response. Pages and settings stay scoped to the website you opened.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Back to Welcome returns to your account. Use Website Builder to choose another website. Account Activity compares your websites and shows traffic, conversions, and audience growth. Analytics & Insights brings together the detailed Analytics, Narrative, and the free AI Chatbot.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":487,"question":488,"answerHtml":489},"can-i-turn-my-instagram-into-a-website","Can I turn my Instagram into a website?","\u003Cp>Yes. Connect your Instagram account and Podspun builds a website on your own domain from it: a page for every post, search across your captions and spoken words, AI answers from your posts and reels, and a full website builder around them. New posts and reels join the site on their own.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":491,"question":492,"answerHtml":493},"what-does-podspun-import-from-instagram","What does Podspun import from Instagram?","\u003Cp>Every public post on the account, with its caption and media. The audio of your videos is transcribed and the captions are indexed, so the words are searchable, and the recurring subjects and people are grouped so visitors can browse by topic.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":495,"question":496,"answerHtml":497},"is-this-a-link-in-bio-page","Is this a link in bio page?","\u003Cp>No. A link-in-bio page is one page of buttons. Podspun builds a full website on your own domain: a page for every post and reel, search, AI answers, and everything a website builder does, and you can put that website's address in your bio.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":499,"question":500,"answerHtml":501},"does-the-site-update-when-i-post","Does the site update when I post?","\u003Cp>Yes. Once the account is connected, each new post is imported, indexed, and given its own page automatically. You post the way you already do and the site stays current.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":503,"question":504,"answerHtml":505},"can-i-combine-instagram-with-my-podcast-or-another-social-account","Can I combine Instagram with my podcast or another social account?","\u003Cp>Yes. Your account can connect a podcast (YouTube, Apple Podcasts, or RSS), Instagram, and TikTok together. They share one catalog and one website, with episodes and posts side by side and one search across all of it.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":507,"question":508,"answerHtml":509},"how-much-does-it-cost","How much does it cost?","\u003Cp>Yearly billing is $529.20 for the Dataweaver and 1 website, with 1,600 catalog items included. Each additional 100-item yearly band costs $16.20 for a full year and is prorated through renewal when added mid-term. Monthly billing is $49 with 800 items included. Setup and preview are free, with no card required. You pay only when you go live.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":511,"question":512,"answerHtml":513},"how-does-automatic-website-translation-work","How does automatic website translation work?","\u003Cp>Podspun translates published website text into the additional languages you select and saves the results. Visitors use the language picker to read the saved version. New or changed published text is translated again, while unchanged text keeps its existing translation.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":515,"question":516,"answerHtml":517},"can-italian-be-the-default-with-english-as-another-language","Can Italian be the default with English as another language?","\u003Cp>Yes. Set Italian as your main website language and select English as an additional language. The site opens in Italian, with Italian standard labels. Visitors can choose English from the language picker.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":519,"question":520,"answerHtml":521},"do-visitors-trigger-a-new-ai-translation-every-time","Do visitors trigger a new AI translation every time?","\u003Cp>No. Visitors read saved translations. Translation work happens when you enable a language or publish new or changed text.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":523,"question":524,"answerHtml":525},"does-automatic-translation-change-my-original-recordings","Does automatic translation change my original recordings?","\u003Cp>No. Website translation covers website text. Your audio, transcripts, and original social captions remain in their source language.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":527,"question":528,"answerHtml":529},"what-does-language-cleanup-do","What does Language Cleanup do?","\u003Cp>Language Cleanup checks for website text that does not match the main language and suggests corrections. You review the suggestions before accepting changes.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":531,"question":532,"answerHtml":533},"how-much-does-automatic-website-translation-cost","How much does automatic website translation cost?","\u003Cp>Automatic website translation is included at no additional charge for now. Check the plans page for current website pricing.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":535,"question":536,"answerHtml":537},"can-i-publish-my-podcast-website-in-multiple-languages","Can I publish my podcast website in multiple languages?","\u003Cp>Yes. Choose the site's main language and the additional languages you want to offer. Podspun translates the website text, saves the translations, and updates them when published text changes. Visitors choose from the languages you enable. Original audio, transcripts, and social captions keep their source language.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":539,"question":540,"answerHtml":541},"what-is-a-podcast-website-builder","What is a podcast website builder?","\u003Cp>It is a tool that turns your podcast into a website. Podspun does it from the episodes you already publish: connect your channels and it builds a site with a page for every episode and post, transcripts, clips, and search, on your own domain.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":543,"question":149,"answerHtml":544},"how-is-this-different-from-squarespace-or-wordpress","\u003Cp>Squarespace and WordPress are general website builders. You start from a blank site and add every episode, transcript, and clip by hand, and there are no podcast tools in the box. Podspun is made for podcasters and creators: connect your channels once and it arrives with your whole catalog, transcripts, search, and clips already in it. You keep full design control and your own domain, and the approach is a two-time Webby honoree.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":546,"question":547,"answerHtml":548},"do-i-have-to-design-the-site-myself","Do I have to design the site myself?","\u003Cp>No. Podspun builds the site from your catalog and gives you finished themes to start from. You edit right on the page, click text and type, or hand the change to the Visual AI Editor. There is no blank page.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":550,"question":551,"answerHtml":552},"can-ai-edit-my-podcast-website-for-me","Can AI edit my podcast website for me?","\u003Cp>Yes. The built-in Visual AI Editor changes your page when you ask in plain words: shorten an intro, add a questions and answers section, give a section a dark background. It works on a draft, every change is checked against your site's design, and nothing goes live until you press publish.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":554,"question":555,"answerHtml":556},"can-i-use-my-own-domain","Can I use my own domain?","\u003Cp>Yes. Your site runs on your own custom domain, and the domain connection is included in the website price. You can also run more than one site, each on its own domain, from the same catalog.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":558,"question":559,"answerHtml":560},"does-the-site-update-when-i-publish-a-new-episode","Does the site update when I publish a new episode?","\u003Cp>Yes. Once your channels are connected, each new episode and post is imported, indexed, and given its own page automatically. You publish the way you already do and the site stays current.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":562,"question":563,"answerHtml":509},"how-much-does-a-podspun-website-cost","How much does a Podspun website cost?",{"slug":565,"question":566,"answerHtml":567},"can-i-try-it-before-i-pay-to-publish","Can I try it before I pay to publish?","\u003Cp>Yes. Setup and preview are free, with no card required. You pay only when you go live.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":569,"question":570,"answerHtml":571},"can-i-use-my-own-domain-with-podspun","Can I use my own domain with Podspun?","\u003Cp>Yes. Connect any custom domain to your Podspun site, and the connection is included in the website price. You can bring a domain you already own or point a new one.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":573,"question":574,"answerHtml":575},"is-hosting-included-or-do-i-pay-separately","Is hosting included, or do I pay separately?","\u003Cp>Hosting is included. The website price covers hosting, the security certificate, and the custom domain, so there is no separate hosting bill.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":577,"question":578,"answerHtml":579},"can-i-run-more-than-one-website","Can I run more than one website?","\u003Cp>Yes. You can run several sites from one account, each on its own domain, all drawing from the same catalog. Each extra site is its own monthly line.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":581,"question":582,"answerHtml":583},"do-i-have-to-set-up-ssl-myself","Do I have to set up SSL myself?","\u003Cp>No. Podspun provisions and renews the SSL certificate for you, so your site is secure without any setup.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":585,"question":586,"answerHtml":587},"what-does-it-cost-to-put-my-podcast-on-my-own-domain","What does it cost to put my podcast on my own domain?","\u003Cp>Yearly billing is $529.20 for the Dataweaver and 1 website, with 1,600 catalog items included. Monthly billing is $49 with 800 items included. Hosting and the custom domain are included with the website.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":589,"question":590,"answerHtml":591},"can-i-move-a-domain-i-already-use","Can I move a domain I already use?","\u003Cp>Yes. Point an existing domain at your Podspun site by adding one DNS record. Your episodes and pages stay intact.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":593,"question":594,"answerHtml":595},"what-is-a-social-media-website-builder","What is a social media website builder?","\u003Cp>A tool that turns your social accounts into a website. Podspun does it from what you already publish: connect Instagram, TikTok, and your podcast and it builds a site with a page for every post and episode, search, AI answers, and a full website builder around them, on your own domain.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":597,"question":598,"answerHtml":599},"which-platforms-can-i-connect","Which platforms can I connect?","\u003Cp>Instagram and TikTok accounts, plus a podcast on YouTube, Apple Podcasts, or RSS. Connect one or all of them; they share one catalog and one website.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":601,"question":496,"answerHtml":602},"is-this-a-link-in-bio-page-2","\u003Cp>No. A link-in-bio page is one page of buttons. Podspun builds a full website on your own domain: a page for every post, search, AI answers, and everything a website builder does, and you can put that website's address in your bio.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":604,"question":500,"answerHtml":605},"does-the-site-update-when-i-post-2","\u003Cp>Yes. Once an account is connected, each new post, video, or episode is imported, indexed, and given its own page automatically.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":607,"question":508,"answerHtml":608},"how-much-does-it-cost-2","\u003Cp>Yearly billing is $529.20 for the Dataweaver and 1 website, with 1,600 catalog items included across every connected account. Each additional 100-item yearly band costs $16.20 for a full year and is prorated through renewal when added mid-term. Monthly billing is $49 with 800 items included. Setup and preview are free, with no card required. You pay only when you go live.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":610,"question":611,"answerHtml":612},"can-i-turn-my-tiktok-into-a-website","Can I turn my TikTok into a website?","\u003Cp>Yes. Connect your TikTok account and Podspun builds a website on your own domain from it: a page for every video, search across your captions and spoken words, AI answers from your videos, and a full website builder around them. New videos join the site on their own.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":614,"question":615,"answerHtml":616},"what-does-podspun-import-from-tiktok","What does Podspun import from TikTok?","\u003Cp>Every public video on the account, with its caption and media. The audio of your videos is transcribed and the captions are indexed, so the words are searchable, and the recurring subjects and people are grouped so visitors can browse by topic.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":618,"question":496,"answerHtml":619},"is-this-a-link-in-bio-page-3","\u003Cp>No. A link-in-bio page is one page of buttons. Podspun builds a full website on your own domain: a page for every video, search, AI answers, and everything a website builder does, and you can put that website's address in your bio.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":621,"question":500,"answerHtml":622},"does-the-site-update-when-i-post-3","\u003Cp>Yes. Once the account is connected, each new video is imported, indexed, and given its own page automatically. You post the way you already do and the site stays current.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":624,"question":625,"answerHtml":505},"can-i-combine-tiktok-with-my-podcast-or-another-social-account","Can I combine TikTok with my podcast or another social account?",[627,639,647,681,699,715,725,733,743,749,754,764,774,787,797,806],{"slug":628,"title":629,"entries":630},"builder","How the builder works",[631,632,633,634,635,636,637,638],{"slug":136,"question":137,"answerHtml":138},{"slug":140,"question":141,"answerHtml":142},{"slug":144,"question":145,"answerHtml":146},{"slug":148,"question":149,"answerHtml":150},{"slug":152,"question":153,"answerHtml":154},{"slug":156,"question":157,"answerHtml":158},{"slug":160,"question":161,"answerHtml":162},{"slug":164,"question":165,"answerHtml":166},{"slug":640,"title":641,"entries":642},"publishing","Drafts, previews and going live",[643,644,645,646],{"slug":168,"question":169,"answerHtml":170},{"slug":172,"question":173,"answerHtml":174},{"slug":176,"question":177,"answerHtml":178},{"slug":180,"question":181,"answerHtml":182},{"slug":648,"title":649,"entries":650},"editing","Editing pages and blocks",[651,652,653,654,655,656,657,658,659,660,661,662,663,664,665,666,667,668,669,670,671,672,673,674,675,676,677,678,679,680],{"slug":184,"question":185,"answerHtml":186},{"slug":188,"question":189,"answerHtml":190},{"slug":192,"question":193,"answerHtml":194},{"slug":196,"question":197,"answerHtml":198},{"slug":200,"question":201,"answerHtml":202},{"slug":204,"question":205,"answerHtml":206},{"slug":208,"question":209,"answerHtml":210},{"slug":212,"question":213,"answerHtml":214},{"slug":216,"question":217,"answerHtml":218},{"slug":220,"question":221,"answerHtml":222},{"slug":224,"question":225,"answerHtml":226},{"slug":228,"question":229,"answerHtml":230},{"slug":232,"question":233,"answerHtml":234},{"slug":236,"question":237,"answerHtml":238},{"slug":240,"question":241,"answerHtml":242},{"slug":244,"question":245,"answerHtml":246},{"slug":248,"question":249,"answerHtml":250},{"slug":252,"question":253,"answerHtml":254},{"slug":256,"question":257,"answerHtml":258},{"slug":260,"question":261,"answerHtml":262},{"slug":264,"question":265,"answerHtml":266},{"slug":268,"question":269,"answerHtml":270},{"slug":272,"question":273,"answerHtml":274},{"slug":276,"question":277,"answerHtml":278},{"slug":280,"question":281,"answerHtml":282},{"slug":284,"question":285,"answerHtml":286},{"slug":288,"question":289,"answerHtml":290},{"slug":292,"question":293,"answerHtml":294},{"slug":296,"question":297,"answerHtml":298},{"slug":300,"question":301,"answerHtml":302},{"slug":682,"title":683,"entries":684},"articles-events-social","Articles, events and social posts",[685,686,687,688,689,690,691,692,693,694,695,696,697,698],{"slug":304,"question":305,"answerHtml":306},{"slug":308,"question":309,"answerHtml":310},{"slug":312,"question":313,"answerHtml":314},{"slug":316,"question":317,"answerHtml":318},{"slug":320,"question":321,"answerHtml":322},{"slug":324,"question":325,"answerHtml":326},{"slug":328,"question":329,"answerHtml":330},{"slug":332,"question":333,"answerHtml":334},{"slug":336,"question":337,"answerHtml":338},{"slug":340,"question":341,"answerHtml":342,"guideHtml":343},{"slug":345,"question":346,"answerHtml":347},{"slug":349,"question":350,"answerHtml":351},{"slug":353,"question":354,"answerHtml":355},{"slug":357,"question":358,"answerHtml":359},{"slug":700,"title":701,"entries":702},"destinations","Categories",[703,704,705,706,707,708,709,710,711,712,713,714],{"slug":361,"question":362,"answerHtml":363},{"slug":365,"question":366,"answerHtml":367},{"slug":369,"question":370,"answerHtml":371},{"slug":373,"question":374,"answerHtml":375},{"slug":377,"question":378,"answerHtml":379},{"slug":381,"question":382,"answerHtml":383},{"slug":385,"question":386,"answerHtml":387},{"slug":389,"question":390,"answerHtml":391},{"slug":393,"question":394,"answerHtml":395},{"slug":397,"question":398,"answerHtml":399},{"slug":401,"question":402,"answerHtml":403},{"slug":405,"question":406,"answerHtml":407},{"slug":716,"title":717,"entries":718},"search","Search on your site",[719,720,721,722,723,724],{"slug":409,"question":410,"answerHtml":411},{"slug":413,"question":414,"answerHtml":415},{"slug":417,"question":418,"answerHtml":419},{"slug":421,"question":422,"answerHtml":423},{"slug":425,"question":426,"answerHtml":427},{"slug":429,"question":430,"answerHtml":431,"guideHtml":432},{"slug":726,"title":727,"entries":728},"languages","Languages and time zone",[729,730,731,732],{"slug":434,"question":435,"answerHtml":436,"guideHtml":437},{"slug":439,"question":440,"answerHtml":441},{"slug":443,"question":444,"answerHtml":445},{"slug":447,"question":448,"answerHtml":449},{"slug":734,"title":735,"entries":736},"google-and-links","Google, AI answers and links",[737,738,739,740,741,742],{"slug":451,"question":452,"answerHtml":453},{"slug":455,"question":456,"answerHtml":457},{"slug":459,"question":460,"answerHtml":461},{"slug":463,"question":464,"answerHtml":465},{"slug":467,"question":468,"answerHtml":469},{"slug":471,"question":472,"answerHtml":473},{"slug":744,"title":745,"entries":746},"imports","Imports and migration",[747,748],{"slug":475,"question":476,"answerHtml":477},{"slug":479,"question":480,"answerHtml":481},{"slug":750,"title":751,"entries":752},"more","More questions",[753],{"slug":483,"question":484,"answerHtml":485},{"slug":755,"title":756,"entries":757},"instagram-website-builder","Instagram website questions",[758,759,760,761,762,763],{"slug":487,"question":488,"answerHtml":489},{"slug":491,"question":492,"answerHtml":493},{"slug":495,"question":496,"answerHtml":497},{"slug":499,"question":500,"answerHtml":501},{"slug":503,"question":504,"answerHtml":505},{"slug":507,"question":508,"answerHtml":509},{"slug":765,"title":766,"entries":767},"multilingual-website-builder","Automatic website translation questions",[768,769,770,771,772,773],{"slug":511,"question":512,"answerHtml":513},{"slug":515,"question":516,"answerHtml":517},{"slug":519,"question":520,"answerHtml":521},{"slug":523,"question":524,"answerHtml":525},{"slug":527,"question":528,"answerHtml":529},{"slug":531,"question":532,"answerHtml":533},{"slug":775,"title":776,"entries":777},"podcast-website-builder","Podcast website builder questions",[778,779,780,781,782,783,784,785,786],{"slug":535,"question":536,"answerHtml":537},{"slug":539,"question":540,"answerHtml":541},{"slug":543,"question":149,"answerHtml":544},{"slug":546,"question":547,"answerHtml":548},{"slug":550,"question":551,"answerHtml":552},{"slug":554,"question":555,"answerHtml":556},{"slug":558,"question":559,"answerHtml":560},{"slug":562,"question":563,"answerHtml":509},{"slug":565,"question":566,"answerHtml":567},{"slug":788,"title":789,"entries":790},"podcast-website-custom-domain","Custom domain questions",[791,792,793,794,795,796],{"slug":569,"question":570,"answerHtml":571},{"slug":573,"question":574,"answerHtml":575},{"slug":577,"question":578,"answerHtml":579},{"slug":581,"question":582,"answerHtml":583},{"slug":585,"question":586,"answerHtml":587},{"slug":589,"question":590,"answerHtml":591},{"slug":798,"title":799,"entries":800},"social-media-website-builder","Social media website questions",[801,802,803,804,805],{"slug":593,"question":594,"answerHtml":595},{"slug":597,"question":598,"answerHtml":599},{"slug":601,"question":496,"answerHtml":602},{"slug":604,"question":500,"answerHtml":605},{"slug":607,"question":508,"answerHtml":608},{"slug":807,"title":808,"entries":809},"tiktok-website-builder","TikTok website questions",[810,811,812,813,814],{"slug":610,"question":611,"answerHtml":612},{"slug":614,"question":615,"answerHtml":616},{"slug":618,"question":496,"answerHtml":619},{"slug":621,"question":500,"answerHtml":622},{"slug":624,"question":625,"answerHtml":505},{"slug":816,"title":817,"lead":818,"entries":819,"groups":999},"artists","Artists and artwork","How Visual Artist websites, the artwork archive, public Works pages, professional records, private viewing rooms, certificates, imports, and exports work.",[820,824,829,833,837,841,845,849,853,857,861,865,869,873,877,881,885,889,893,897,901,906,911,915,919,923,927,931,935,939,943,947,951,955,959,963,967,971,975,979,983,987,991,995],{"slug":821,"question":822,"answerHtml":823},"can-artists-use-podspun","Can artists use Podspun?","\u003Cp>Yes. Choose Visual Artist when you add a website, or check it later in that website's Site Settings, General, under What this website is. Once one of your websites is a Visual Artist website your account has the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fart\">Art Studio\u003C\u002Fa>: an artwork archive connected to your Podspun website, plus collections, viewing rooms, contacts, sales, invoices, income, locations, exhibitions, a schedule, and reports. It keeps every creator feature, including social imports, newsletters, contacts, payments, the store, analytics, and the website builder.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":825,"question":826,"answerHtml":827,"guideHtml":828},"how-does-the-artwork-archive-work","How does the artwork archive work?","\u003Cp>Open the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fart\u002Fpieces\">Art Studio’s Pieces section\u003C\u002Fa> and add each artwork once. The record holds the catalog details, images, availability, price, location, condition, valuation, provenance, exhibition and publication history, acquisition, sale, consignment, loan, rights, and private notes. Drafts stay private. Published records build the website's Works page, series pages, Available Works page, and individual artwork pages automatically.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-artworks\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">Art & Film · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Give every work its own record.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>Keep artwork images and catalog details together, organize collections and choose what appears publicly.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"Artwork archive sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#artworks-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#artworks-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#artworks-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#artworks-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"artworks-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Use Art Studio for the artwork catalog and Website Builder for its public presentation. Prepare accurate images and catalog details. Keep private provenance, valuation, location and notes separate from information intended for visitors.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"artworks-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Open the artwork catalog\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fartworks-1.jpg\" alt=\"Artwork archive: Open the artwork catalog\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Open the artwork catalog\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Art Studio → Pieces. Find the existing work or start a new piece; avoid duplicating a record that is already in your archive.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>One record holds the work's images and catalog information. Collections and public blocks can use that same record.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Use recognizable titles and identifiers so you can distinguish works, editions and similar pieces.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Complete images and catalog details\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fartworks-2.jpg\" alt=\"Artwork archive: Complete images and catalog details\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Complete images and catalog details\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Review the work's title, dates, medium, dimensions and images. Add the appropriate catalog information and check the main image.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Keep dimensions and units consistent. Use images of the actual work, and add additional views only where they help identify or present it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Review location, condition, provenance, valuation and private notes as catalog information; do not assume every saved field is public.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Organize availability and collections\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fartworks-3.jpg\" alt=\"Artwork archive: Organize availability and collections\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Organize availability and collections\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Review the work's status and availability, and place it in the intended collection or series. Record sales through the relevant catalog controls when needed.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A collection organizes works; a sale is a separate record. Keep sold, available and private works accurately classified.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>If using a private viewing room, select works deliberately and review whether prices should be visible in that room.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 4\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Choose the public presentation\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fartworks-4.jpg\" alt=\"Artwork archive: Choose the public presentation\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Choose the public presentation\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Publish the works intended for visitors and preview the archive, collection and individual-work pages in Website Builder.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A private catalog entry is not automatically a public artwork page. Check the saved publication setting and the website's selected content.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Review image crops and enquiry\u002Fpurchase destinations at narrow widths. Keep private catalog fields out of public captions.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Catalog a painting with accurate images, medium and dimensions. Add it to a series, mark its availability and publish its public page while keeping location and private notes in the archive.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"artworks-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>Images and identifying details describe the actual work.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Availability and collection membership are current.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Private catalog information stays private.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Public archive and work pages were reviewed.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"artworks-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>A work is missing from the public site\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Check publication status and the works\u002Fcollections selected for the website's blocks.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>I have two records for one work\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Compare identifiers and details before merging or removing anything; do not discard sales or provenance information.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":830,"question":831,"answerHtml":832},"art-collections-and-series","How do collections and series work?","\u003Cp>A collection groups works: a series, a year, or an art fair, and one work can be in several. Manage them in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fart\u002Fcollections\">Collections\u003C\u002Fa> and check works into them from the Pieces editor. A collection shown on the site becomes its works’ public series label and series page, and its description appears on that page. A collection kept off the site is a private grouping.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A collection can be part of a larger one, such as a series of paintings inside Paintings. Open the collection and choose the larger one under \u003Cstrong>Part Of\u003C\u002Fstrong>, or use the list under \u003Cstrong>Order On Your Website\u003C\u002Fstrong> on the Collections page: drag a collection to the right to put it inside the one above it, and to the left to take it back out. To do several at once, tick them, press Set selected and choose Put inside a collection. Your website then lists the larger collection only. Its page shows all of its works together, and the collections inside it appear under the decades as a filter. No artwork changes collection when you do this, so taking a collection back out puts everything as it was.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>To split your artwork across two pages, each with its own list, add a second page with an Artwork Archive block in the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">Website Builder\u003C\u002Fa>. On each block set \u003Cstrong>Automatic View\u003C\u002Fstrong> to \u003Cstrong>Chosen Collections\u003C\u002Fstrong> and tick the collections that page lists. A work's own page then shows the list of the page it belongs to.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>To change many works at once, open \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fart\u002Fpieces\">Pieces\u003C\u002Fa>. The Collections column lists every collection each work is in. The All collections filter shows the works in one collection or in several at once, and Shown and hidden narrows the list to works that are on your website or off it. Tick the works, press Set selected, and choose Add to a collection, Move to one collection (they leave every other collection), or Take out of a collection.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>To change the order your website shows works in, press \u003Cstrong>Arrange\u003C\u002Fstrong> on Pieces. Your works appear as small pictures: pick a collection and drag a picture to a new place. The order saves as soon as you drop it. Click a picture to choose it, then use Edit Image to crop it or set its focal point. Hold Cmd (Mac) or Ctrl (Windows) and click to choose several, or Shift and click to choose a run, then drag one of them to move them all. The eye on a picture shows or hides that work on your website.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The same editor opens from the Website Builder. Open your Artwork page in the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">Website Builder\u003C\u002Fa> and press \u003Cstrong>Edit Gallery\u003C\u002Fstrong> above the works. You can also click a collection in the preview and drag a work right on the page.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":834,"question":835,"answerHtml":836},"art-locations-and-exhibitions","How do I track where work is and which shows it was in?","\u003Cp>Add places in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fart\u002Flocations\">Locations\u003C\u002Fa> (your studio, galleries, fairs, storage) and link each work to its current location from the Pieces editor; every move is written into the work’s history. Add shows in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fart\u002Fexhibitions\">Exhibitions\u003C\u002Fa> with their dates and which works were in them. Submission deadlines, invoice due dates, consignment and loan return dates, and your own reminders all land on the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fart\u002Fschedule\">Schedule\u003C\u002Fa>.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":838,"question":839,"answerHtml":840},"are-location-and-notes-public","Are artwork locations and private notes shown on my website?","\u003Cp>No. Current Location and Private Notes are inventory fields for you and your team. Public pages only use the artwork's title, year, medium, dimensions, description, series, images, availability, and the price setting you chose.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":842,"question":843,"answerHtml":844},"artwork-page-style-modern-or-classic","Can my artwork pages look smaller and more minimal, like a foundation's archive?","\u003Cp>Yes. Open \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fart\u002Fsettings\">Art Studio, Site Settings\u003C\u002Fa> and set \u003Cstrong>Artwork Page Style\u003C\u002Fstrong> to \u003Cstrong>Classic\u003C\u002Fstrong>. Your Artwork page then lists your collections down the left (A to Z, or in your own order from \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fart\u002Fcollections\">Collections\u003C\u002Fa>), and once a visitor picks one, All and the decades under them. The works show as small pictures in three columns, each captioned with its title in italics and its year. Each work's page keeps the same list on the left, with the title, Zoom and previous and next arrows along the top, the picture whole, and its title, year, medium and size under it. To open the Artwork page on one picture before a collection is chosen, set \u003Cstrong>Opening Picture\u003C\u002Fstrong> and \u003Cstrong>Opening Picture Caption\u003C\u002Fstrong> on the page's Artwork Archive block in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">Website Builder\u003C\u002Fa>. \u003Cstrong>Modern\u003C\u002Fstrong>, the default, shows larger pictures with the details beside each work.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":846,"question":847,"answerHtml":848},"square-artwork-thumbnails","Can every artwork thumbnail be the same size?","\u003Cp>Yes. Open \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fart\u002Fsettings\">Art Studio, Site Settings\u003C\u002Fa> and set \u003Cstrong>Artwork Thumbnails\u003C\u002Fstrong> to \u003Cstrong>Square\u003C\u002Fstrong>. Every work on your Artwork page then fills the same square box, so tall, wide and small works line up in one even grid. A picture that is not square is cropped to fit. The crop keeps the center of the picture, or its focal point when it has one. To set it, open the work in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fart\">Art Studio, Pieces\u003C\u002Fa>, and click the picture under Images. \u003Cstrong>Whole picture\u003C\u002Fstrong>, the default, shows all of each work in its own shape.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Cstrong>Fitted\u003C\u002Fstrong> also shows all of each work, with no cropping, and puts every work in one box shape so the grid stays even. The shape is worked out from the works being shown: a list of mostly upright works gets an upright box, a list of mostly wide works a wide one, so the pictures fill their boxes as far as they can. A different collection or decade can take a different shape.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The setting covers the Artwork page in both the Classic and Modern styles. A work's own page always shows the whole picture.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>To make the pictures larger, set \u003Cstrong>Thumbnail Size\u003C\u002Fstrong> on the same screen to Medium or Large. That covers the Classic style, which shows three works across. In the Modern style, the Columns setting on the page's Artwork Archive block sets the size: fewer columns, larger pictures.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":850,"question":851,"answerHtml":852},"order-of-collections-on-your-website","Can I choose the order my collections are listed in?","\u003Cp>Yes. Open \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fart\u002Fcollections\">Art Studio, Collections\u003C\u002Fa>. Under the list, \u003Cstrong>Order On Your Website\u003C\u002Fstrong> sets how your collections are listed on your website's Artwork page and on each work's page. \u003Cstrong>A to Z\u003C\u002Fstrong> lists them by name. \u003Cstrong>Your own order\u003C\u002Fstrong> shows them as a list you drag into place, so a series can come first. Press Save order to apply it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Only collections shown on your website are in the list. A private collection is not on the website, so it has no place in the order.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":854,"question":855,"answerHtml":856},"list-works-by-year","Can I list my works by year, newest first?","\u003Cp>Yes. Open the page that shows your work in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">Website Builder\u003C\u002Fa> and select its Artwork Archive block. \u003Cstrong>Order\u003C\u002Fstrong> sets how the works are listed: Your Own Order, Newest Added, Title A to Z, Title Z to A, \u003Cstrong>Year, Newest First\u003C\u002Fstrong> or \u003Cstrong>Year, Oldest First\u003C\u002Fstrong>. Order shows when the block's Artwork Source is Automatic. A Manual block keeps the order its works were chosen in.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The two year orders read each work's Year, so a work dated 1974, 1970's or 1987-1990 is placed by the first year written. A work with no year is listed last. Works of the same year keep the order you gave them in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fart\">Art Studio, Pieces\u003C\u002Fa>, Arrange. A work's previous and next arrows follow the same order as the list.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Works are dragged into place on the page only when Order is Your Own Order. Under any other order the page does not follow a dragged place, so Website Builder shows which order the page is in.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":858,"question":859,"answerHtml":860},"add-a-page-to-the-artwork-list","Can the list of collections on my Artwork page also link to another page?","\u003Cp>Yes, in the Classic style. Open the page in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">Website Builder\u003C\u002Fa>, select its Artwork Archive block, and add an entry under \u003Cstrong>Other Pages In The List\u003C\u002Fstrong>: a label, and a link to a page of your website or to another website. The setting shows when the block's Artwork Source is Automatic, and it applies when Automatic View is All Artwork or Chosen Collections. Those links are listed first, before your collections, on the Artwork page and on each work's page. A link to another website opens in a new tab.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Use it for a page that belongs with the collections but is not a collection, such as a page of scrapbooks or a film.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":862,"question":863,"answerHtml":864},"filter-artwork-by-collection-or-decade","Can visitors filter my artwork by collection or decade?","\u003Cp>Yes. Open the page that shows your work (Works on most artist sites) in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">Website Builder\u003C\u002Fa> and select its Artwork Archive block. Set \u003Cstrong>Show Filter\u003C\u002Fstrong> to Yes, then choose \u003Cstrong>Filter By\u003C\u002Fstrong>: Collections and Decades, Collections Only, or Decades Only. Visitors then see two dropdowns above the works, Collection and Decade, in a bar that stays at the top of the window as they scroll, and the page shows only the works that match their choice. A work opened from a filtered view has Previous and Next links that stay inside that collection and decade, and a Back to button that returns to it. The collections are the ones in the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fart\u002Fcollections\">Art Studio’s Collections section\u003C\u002Fa> that are shown on the website. The decades come from each work's Year, so a work dated 1974 or 1970's is listed under 1970s. New artist sites start with the filter on. \u003Cstrong>Works Shown At First\u003C\u002Fstrong> on the same block sets how many works appear before a Show more button (20, 40, 60 or 100). Each press of Show more adds that many again, and a new filter choice starts again from the first set. \u003Cstrong>All works, on one continuous page\u003C\u002Fstrong> has no button: the page adds the next 40 works by itself as the visitor scrolls down. Beside the dropdowns, the page shows how many works match, and an X next to that number clears both choices.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":866,"question":867,"answerHtml":868},"list-work-by-more-than-one-artist","Can a gallery list work by more than one artist?","\u003Cp>Yes. Each artwork has an \u003Cstrong>Artist\u003C\u002Fstrong> field. Open a work in the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fart\u002Fpieces\">Art Studio’s Pieces section\u003C\u002Fa> and type the artist’s name; names already used on the website are offered as you type, so an artist is spelled the same way on every work. Leave the field blank when every work on the website is by the same artist.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>When a work names an artist, the name shows with it on your website: on the work’s own page, under its title in grids and lists, in viewing rooms, and on the certificate and inventory PDFs. The Pieces list gains an Artist filter, and its search finds works by artist.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A CSV import reads an Artist column, and the CSV export includes it. If every row in a file names the same artist, the import asks whether to show that name with each work, because an artist’s own export usually repeats their name on every row.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>To give each artist a page of their own on the website, make a \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fart\u002Fcollections\">collection\u003C\u002Fa> for each artist and add their works to it.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":870,"question":871,"answerHtml":872},"import-from-artwork-archive","Can Podspun import my Artwork Archive account?","\u003Cp>Yes, two ways. The most complete is Artwork Archive's own CSV export, which carries private fields a public page never shows: in Artwork Archive, open Pieces, choose Bulk Actions, then Export to CSV. The file appears under Reports\u002FDocs, in Reports, as “Piece Export (CSV)”; download it there, then upload it in the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fart\u002Fimport\">Art Studio’s Import section\u003C\u002Fa>, where its column names are recognized. The second way: paste the address of a public Artwork Archive profile and Podspun reads its pieces, details, and images for you to review before anything saves. A password-protected profile cannot be read that way.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":874,"question":875,"answerHtml":876},"import-an-existing-artwork-archive","Can I import an existing artwork archive?","\u003Cp>Yes. Open the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fart\u002Fimport\">Art Studio’s Import section\u003C\u002Fa>. Upload a CSV, a ZIP containing a CSV and its images, or an image-only ZIP; a CSV exported from Artwork Archive is recognized too. Podspun proposes records first so you can review and edit them before saving. It matches existing works by inventory number, or by title and year when there is no inventory number. New records stay draft unless you explicitly publish them.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>That covers the artworks themselves. Your collectors, sales, income, locations and exhibitions are separate exports in Artwork Archive and come across through Import your records, on the same screen.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":878,"question":879,"answerHtml":880},"import-collectors-sales-and-locations-from-artwork-archive","Can I bring my collectors, sales and locations over from Artwork Archive?","\u003Cp>Yes. Artwork Archive keeps a separate export for each part of your studio, so your pieces are only one of six files. Open the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fart\u002Fimport\">Art Studio’s Import section\u003C\u002Fa> and choose Import your records, then hand over the export files together or the ZIP they came in.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>It brings across your collectors with their company, phone and postal address, your sales with the date, price, commission and fees and who bought the work, your income and expenses, the galleries, museums and storage your work sits in, and your exhibitions. Each sale stays attached to the piece it was for and the person who bought it. Nothing is saved until you approve the summary.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Import your pieces first, on the CSV or ZIP option above it. Anything that names a piece you have not imported yet is reported rather than saved wrong, and attaches itself when you run the import again.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":882,"question":883,"answerHtml":884},"get-the-export-files-out-of-artwork-archive","How do I get my export files out of Artwork Archive?","\u003Cp>Every section of Artwork Archive has its own Export to CSV: Contacts, Sales, Income, Locations and Exhibitions each carry a button on their own page, and your pieces come from Pieces, then Bulk Actions, then Export to CSV.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Artwork Archive does not hand you the file straight away. It builds each one and puts it under Reports\u002FDocs, in Reports, named for the section it came from. Download them there, then upload them to Podspun together.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>You do need to be signed in to your own Artwork Archive account to export, which is the point: the export carries the private records that your public profile page never shows.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":886,"question":887,"answerHtml":888},"sell-artwork-online","Can I sell artwork directly from my archive?","\u003Cp>Yes. Open a work in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fart\u002Fpieces\">Pieces\u003C\u002Fa>, turn on Sell online, add its price and quantity, and choose whether it appears on the Works page, in the Store, or both. Podspun creates and keeps the store listing in sync with the artwork record. The artwork page can show Buy now or Add to cart, using your existing Stripe connection and shopping cart.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fart\u002Fstore\">Store Listings\u003C\u002Fa> shows every artwork currently offered online. When a work sells, Podspun updates its availability and quantity, records the buyer as an Art Studio contact, and adds the sale to Sales and Income.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Under standard terms, Art Studio artwork listings carry 0% platform commission. Stripe processing is separate. Merchandise and digital products keep the standard store fee; an agreed custom commerce rate takes precedence. Mixed carts apply the artwork rate only to verified artwork listings.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":890,"question":891,"answerHtml":892},"record-art-sales","How do I record a sale of an artwork?","\u003Cp>Open \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fart\u002Fsales\">Sales\u003C\u002Fa> and choose Record a sale, or use the Record Sale link on the work in Pieces. Choose the work, the buyer, the price, and any fees or commission. Recording it marks the work sold, fills its sale summary, writes the change into its history, and the revenue appears in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fart\u002Fincome\">Income\u003C\u002Fa>. Donations and gifts record the same way.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":894,"question":895,"answerHtml":896},"art-invoices","Can I invoice a client for artwork?","\u003Cp>Yes. Open \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fart\u002Finvoices\">Invoices\u003C\u002Fa> and build the invoice from archive works or free lines such as framing and shipping. Each invoice gets the next number in your sequence, a tax percentage if you charge one, a due date, and a PDF.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Connect your Stripe account in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fcommerce\u002Fpayments\">Payments\u003C\u002Fa>, then choose Create payment link on an unpaid invoice. Share the link with your client. They can pay without signing in. Confirmed payment marks the invoice Paid, records the artwork sales and other invoice income, and updates the available artwork stock. The invoice currency and amounts stay fixed while its payment link is active.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Choose Stop payment link before editing an unpaid invoice or using Mark paid for money received elsewhere. A paid Stripe invoice keeps its payment record and cannot be edited or voided. Voiding an unpaid invoice stops its payment link and keeps its number in your records.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":898,"question":899,"answerHtml":900},"art-contacts-and-mailing-list","How do Art Studio contacts relate to my mailing list?","\u003Cp>Art Studio \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fart\u002Fcontacts\">Contacts\u003C\u002Fa> and \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Femail\">Email Campaigns\u003C\u002Fa> use the same person record. Art Studio adds collector or gallery details, purchase history, private notes, and tags. Turn Send email off in the artist contact when someone should remain in your records but not receive campaigns.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":902,"question":903,"answerHtml":904,"guideHtml":905},"private-viewing-rooms","How do private viewing rooms work?","\u003Cp>In the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fart\u002Frooms\">Art Studio’s Viewing Rooms section\u003C\u002Fa>, choose any published or draft artworks. Your Artwork lists the archive: type in the search box to find a work by title, year, medium, type, or collection, or choose Show Filters to narrow the list by Availability, Artwork Type, Medium, Collection, Edition, Location, Sale Location, Client, Viewing Room, Exhibition, or Website. A filter appears once your records have something for it to sort by. Choose a work to move it to In This Room, or use Add all to move every work the search and filters left. A room holds up to 100 artworks. Add an introduction and a note for each work, decide whether to show price and availability, and optionally set an expiration date. Activating the room creates a signed private link. Replacing the link invalidates the old one immediately. Viewing rooms are kept out of search engines.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-rooms\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">Art & Film · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Make a private selection of artwork.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>Choose works, add notes and share a private room with optional prices and an expiration date.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"Private viewing rooms sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#rooms-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#rooms-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#rooms-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#rooms-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"rooms-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Choose the artworks you want to present and review their images and catalog details. Decide whether prices should be shown and whether access should expire.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"rooms-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Select a focused group of artworks\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Frooms-1.jpg\" alt=\"Private viewing rooms: Select a focused group of artworks\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Select a focused group of artworks\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Art Studio → Viewing Rooms and create a room. Search and filter the artwork picker, then choose the works for this presentation. Add All applies to the filtered selection. A room can contain up to 100 works, including draft or published catalog records.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Open Viewing Rooms in Art Studio and select the works for the room. Keep the selection relevant to the person or purpose you have in mind.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Review each artwork’s image and identifying details before adding it to the presentation.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Write the introduction and work notes\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Frooms-2.jpg\" alt=\"Private viewing rooms: Write the introduction and work notes\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Write the introduction and work notes\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Add an introduction explaining the selection and notes for individual works. Review every image and catalog detail. Keep the text specific to this presentation instead of repeating the artwork titles or assuming the recipient knows the context.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Write the introduction and notes, then choose the display options. Decide whether to show prices and set an expiration date if you need one.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Read the room as a visitor would: the introduction should explain the selection, and notes should clarify the works rather than repeat their titles.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Choose prices, availability and expiration\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Frooms-options.jpg\" alt=\"Private viewing rooms: Choose prices, availability and expiration\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Choose prices, availability and expiration\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Set Show Price and the availability presentation intentionally. Choose an expiration date if the link should stop working later. Check these choices before activating; information in a private room is still visible to anyone who receives its working private link.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Only show pricing that is current and meant for this presentation. An expiration date is a limit on access, not a sale deadline unless you separately explain it that way. Private rooms are not indexed by search engines.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 4\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Activate, review and share the private link\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Frooms-3.jpg\" alt=\"Private viewing rooms: Activate, review and share the private link\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Activate, review and share the private link\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Choose Sharing Status → Active, create share link. Use Add viewing room for a new room, or Save viewing room when editing one, to create its signed private URL. Use Open to inspect it and Copy link to share the reviewed address. Replace Link immediately stops the old link; Archive removes access. A Draft room is not a working private presentation.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Review the entire room before sharing, including every selected work and any displayed prices. If an old link should no longer work, Replace Link changes the actual access address; editing the room title alone does not revoke a shared link.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Activate the room and open its private presentation before sharing the link. Check the works, notes, prices and expiration choice.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Share the reviewed private link with the intended recipient. Revisit the room if you change its selection or access settings.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Make a room with a small selection for a collector, add a short note about why the works belong together and choose whether prices appear. Open the private link yourself before sharing it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"rooms-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>The selection and artwork records are correct.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Prices appear only when intended.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>The private presentation and expiration setting have been reviewed.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"rooms-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>A work’s image or details are wrong\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Correct the artwork record, then review the room again.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>The recipient cannot open the room\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Check whether the room is active and whether its expiration date has passed.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":907,"question":908,"answerHtml":909,"guideHtml":910},"artwork-certificates-and-pdfs","Can Podspun make certificates and presentation PDFs?","\u003Cp>Yes. Open an artwork record and choose Certificate PDF to download a certificate with the work's image, catalog details, certificate number, issue date, and signature line. A viewing room downloads as a presentation PDF, an invoice as an invoice PDF, and the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fart\u002Freports\">Reports section\u003C\u002Fa> builds inventory, available works, and consignment PDFs.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-certificates\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">Art & Film · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Download a certificate for a work.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>Generate a certificate PDF from an artwork record, with its image and catalog details.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"Artwork certificates sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#certificates-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#certificates-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#certificates-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#certificates-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"certificates-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Open the artwork’s current catalog record and verify its image and identifying information. The certificate is generated from that record, so the record needs to be accurate first.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"certificates-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Open the exact artwork record\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fcertificates-1.jpg\" alt=\"Artwork certificates: Open the exact artwork record\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Open the exact artwork record\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Art Studio and select the artwork for this certificate. Check the image and title together, especially for similar works or editions. The PDF uses the saved catalog record, not a separate form with independent artwork details.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Open the artwork in Art Studio. Confirm you selected the exact work for which you need a certificate.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Check the title and image together, especially when a series contains similar works.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Verify the catalog information\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fcertificates-2.jpg\" alt=\"Artwork certificates: Verify the catalog information\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Verify the catalog information\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Check title, medium, year, dimensions and any edition information. Correct and save the source record before generating the certificate. Confirm identifying details for this particular work instead of using values from another work in the series.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Review the catalog details used by the certificate, including any identifying or edition information you have entered.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Correct the artwork record before generating the document. Do not rely on a PDF to fix information that is wrong in the source.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Download and inspect Certificate PDF\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fcertificates-3.jpg\" alt=\"Artwork certificates: Download and inspect Certificate PDF\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Download and inspect Certificate PDF\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Choose Certificate PDF. Open the download and check its image, identifying information, certificate number, date and signature line before printing or sharing. If the record changes, generate a new PDF; an existing downloaded document cannot update itself.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Choose Certificate PDF and open the download. Compare the document with the artwork record.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Check the image, title and catalog details and review the page before printing or sharing it. If a detail needs correction, update the record and generate the PDF again.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Before issuing a certificate for a work in a series, confirm its image and edition details in Art Studio. Download the PDF and compare those details with the work you are documenting.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"certificates-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>The document is for the exact artwork selected.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Image and catalog details match the record.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>The downloaded PDF has been reviewed before use.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"certificates-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>A detail is missing or incorrect\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Update the artwork record and generate the certificate again.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>The image belongs to another work\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Check the selected artwork and its saved image before downloading a new certificate.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":912,"question":913,"answerHtml":914},"export-artwork-archive","Can I export my artwork archive?","\u003Cp>Open \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fart\u002Freports\">Art Studio, Reports\u003C\u002Fa>. \u003Cstrong>Archive Spreadsheet\u003C\u002Fstrong> includes all works, including archived records, in a spreadsheet-ready file. \u003Cstrong>Studio Backup\u003C\u002Fstrong> adds structured artwork and studio records plus the stored artwork image files.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Choose \u003Cstrong>Prepare Backup\u003C\u002Fstrong>, then download every numbered ZIP part. Each part carries a manifest identifying the complete set, along with the record files. All parts are required for the image archive. A change to the records between downloads requires a new preparation. Missing or unowned image references prevent preparation, and a failed file download stops that part.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A backup contains the image files still retained in your asset library. It cannot recover an upload original that was resized or replaced earlier. Website pages and unrelated account contacts are outside this studio backup. Inventory, Available Works and Consignment reports include every draft and active work in their selected scope; use \u003Cstrong>PDF Without Images\u003C\u002Fstrong> for large image-heavy reports.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":916,"question":917,"answerHtml":918},"what-does-artspun-cost","What does Artspun cost?","\u003Cp>Artspun includes art inventory and an artist website. \u003Cstrong>Starter\u003C\u002Fstrong> is $49.00 a month with one website and up to 800 non-archived artworks. Existing accounts keep their selected plan.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Cstrong>Professional\u003C\u002Fstrong> is $79.00 a month with one website, up to 2,000 non-archived artworks and 1,000 subscribed email contacts. \u003Cstrong>Managed\u003C\u002Fstrong> is $149.00 a month with the same software allowance plus 30 minutes of consulting or light changes each month. Unused assistance does not roll over. Migration, data cleanup and larger projects are quoted separately.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The Artspun add-on is $30.00 a month on Professional, or $100.00 on Managed. These replace each other and remain monthly on a yearly base plan. Above the included email allowance, the standard email tier uses the total subscribed contact count.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Cstrong>Enterprise\u003C\u002Fstrong> starts at $399.00 a month, with unlimited artworks and services scoped to your collection. \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fpodspun.com\u002Fenterprise\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Ask for a collection quote\u003C\u002Fa>. Art Studio artwork listings carry 0% platform commission under standard terms; Stripe processing is separate. Merchandise uses the standard store fee, and an agreed custom commerce rate takes precedence.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":920,"question":921,"answerHtml":922},"switch-artspun-plan","How do I change my Artspun plan?","\u003Cp>Open \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fbilling?tab=plan\">Billing, Plan Details\u003C\u002Fa>, find \u003Cstrong>Artspun Artwork Allowance\u003C\u002Fstrong> and choose your \u003Cstrong>Artspun Plan\u003C\u002Fstrong>. A confirmation shows the recurring add-on and the charge due today before anything changes.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>An upgrade within a paid cycle charges only the additional monthly allowance prorated for the remaining days. Returning to an allowance already paid for in that cycle does not charge it again. Before your first paid cycle, the selected add-on is included in the first bill. New visual artist accounts start with Professional; existing accounts retain their selected tier.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>To downgrade, your non-archived inventory must fit the destination allowance. Current-cycle payments are not refunded. The lower recurring amount starts on your next bill.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":924,"question":925,"answerHtml":926},"what-counts-as-an-artwork","What counts toward my artwork allowance?","\u003Cp>Every artwork in your \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fart\u002Fpieces\">Art Studio\u003C\u002Fa> that is not archived counts, across all the websites on your account. Drafts count, and so do works you have hidden from your website, because the allowance is for your inventory and not only for what visitors see.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Archived artworks do not count. Their records are kept, and you can restore one from the Archived filter when you have room. Collections, contacts, sales, invoices, locations, and exhibitions have no limit.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fart\">Art Studio dashboard\u003C\u002Fa> shows how much of the allowance you have used.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":928,"question":929,"answerHtml":930},"artwork-allowance-reached","What happens when I reach my artwork allowance?","\u003Cp>Your existing records remain available to edit and your website keeps working. Adding a work, restoring an archived work or importing new records stops when the account reaches its allowance. The message links to \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fbilling?tab=plan\">Billing, Plan Details\u003C\u002Fa>.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Archive works to make room, or move from Starter to Professional for up to 2,000 works. Managed has the same capacity and adds monthly assistance. Larger collections can use a quoted Enterprise plan with unlimited artworks.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":932,"question":933,"answerHtml":934},"can-podspun-write-seo-articles-from-my-posts","Can Podspun write SEO articles from my posts?","\u003Cp>Yes. Open Site Editor Chat in your website editor and ask for article ideas. It reads your Instagram and TikTok posts, the topics they cover, the articles already on your site, and what visitors searched for. Pick an idea and it writes a full article from those posts, with your photos placed where they fit, a search title, and a description. It saves as a draft until you publish it.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":936,"question":937,"answerHtml":938},"can-i-move-my-archive-over-from-artwork-archive","Can I move my archive over from Artwork Archive?","\u003Cp>Yes. Upload your Artwork Archive piece export, then review the mapped artwork fields and image matches before saving. A plain CSV or a ZIP of images works too. Use Import your records for a separate reviewed upload of Artwork Archive collectors, sales, income, locations and exhibitions. Migration assistance or data cleanup beyond included monthly help is quoted separately.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":940,"question":941,"answerHtml":942},"do-i-have-to-show-prices-on-my-website","Do I have to show prices on my website?","\u003Cp>No. Each piece sets its own price display: an amount, price on request, or nothing at all. You can also mark a work as not for sale, reserved, or sold, and the page follows.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":944,"question":945,"answerHtml":946},"can-i-keep-some-work-off-the-public-site","Can I keep some work off the public site?","\u003Cp>Yes. A piece can be a draft or archived, which keeps the record in your inventory and off the website. A Viewing Room shares selected works through a private link, with an optional expiry date. Anyone with that link can open the room until it expires.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":948,"question":949,"answerHtml":950},"is-this-a-website-builder-or-an-inventory-system","Is this a website builder or an inventory system?","\u003Cp>Both use one set of artwork records. Manage the inventory in the Art Studio, choose what is public, and publish the website from those records. Viewing Rooms let you share selected works with collectors and curators.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":952,"question":953,"answerHtml":954},"what-happens-when-i-add-new-work","What happens when I add new work?","\u003Cp>Add the piece in the Art Studio, check its details and choose whether to publish it. Each published piece gets its own website page from the inventory record.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":956,"question":957,"answerHtml":958},"can-i-take-my-records-with-me","Can I take my records with me?","\u003Cp>Yes. Export all artwork records as CSV, including drafts and archived works. A studio backup includes structured inventory and studio records, related contacts and stored artwork image files in ZIP parts. Download every listed part for the complete backup. Earlier uploads that were resized or replaced cannot be recovered, so keep your original files too.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":960,"question":961,"answerHtml":962},"how-much-does-art-inventory-software-cost","How much does art inventory software cost?","\u003Cp>Artspun has four plans. Starter is $49 a month for up to 800 non-archived artworks. Professional is $79 a month for up to 2,000, with email for up to 1,000 subscribed contacts. Managed is $149 a month for the same software and capacity, plus 30 minutes of help each month. These monthly prices include one website. With annual billing, the fixed base is billed yearly and Artspun add-ons stay monthly. Enterprise starts at $399 a month with unlimited artworks and a service scope agreed in your quote.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":964,"question":965,"answerHtml":966},"how-many-artworks-can-i-catalog","How many artworks can I catalog?","\u003Cp>Starter covers up to 800 artworks. Professional covers up to 2,000, and Managed covers up to 2,000. Enterprise has unlimited artworks. Every artwork that is not archived counts, including drafts and works you keep off your website. Archived artworks do not count, and their records are kept.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":968,"question":969,"answerHtml":970},"does-the-price-include-a-website","Does the price include a website?","\u003Cp>Yes. Starter, Professional and Managed each include one website on your own domain, with hosting and a secure (https) connection. Each extra website is $20 a month.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":972,"question":973,"answerHtml":974},"what-help-is-included-each-month","What help is included each month?","\u003Cp>Managed includes the same software and artwork allowance as Professional, plus 30 minutes of help each month for consultation or small changes. Unused minutes do not roll over. Major migration, data cleanup and larger projects are quoted separately.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":976,"question":977,"answerHtml":978},"does-artspun-charge-a-commission-on-original-artwork-sales","Does Artspun charge a commission on original artwork sales?","\u003Cp>Original works linked to Art Studio artwork listings carry a 0% platform commission under standard terms. Payment processor fees still apply. Merchandise and other store products use their standard fees. A custom commerce agreement takes precedence over the standard commission policy.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":980,"question":981,"answerHtml":982},"how-much-email-is-included","How much email is included?","\u003Cp>Professional and Managed include email for up to 1,000 subscribed contacts. Above that allowance, the published email tiers apply to the full subscribed contact count. Starter uses the published email tiers.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":984,"question":985,"answerHtml":986},"is-there-art-inventory-software-for-galleries","Is there art inventory software for galleries?","\u003Cp>Yes. Artspun is art inventory software for galleries representing many artists. Each work has an Artist field, and the artist's name shows with the work on your website, in Viewing Rooms, and on certificate and inventory PDFs. Sales, invoices and contacts are kept on the same records, and a collection for each artist gives that artist a page on the website.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":988,"question":989,"answerHtml":990},"can-an-artist-s-estate-or-foundation-use-artspun","Can an artist's estate or foundation use Artspun?","\u003Cp>Yes. Artspun works as art collection management software for an artist's estate or foundation. Catalogue the inventory, choose which works appear on the public website, and keep the rest private in the same records. Enterprise includes unlimited artworks, with management services scoped to the collection in your quote.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":992,"question":993,"answerHtml":994},"how-do-i-catalog-my-artwork","How do I catalog my artwork?","\u003Cp>To catalog your artwork, open the Art Studio and add each work once, or import your archive from a CSV, a ZIP of images or an Artwork Archive export. Each record holds the title, year, medium, dimensions, edition, images, provenance, location and price. You choose what is public, and each published work gets its own page on your website.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":996,"question":997,"answerHtml":998},"is-artspun-an-alternative-to-artwork-archive","Is Artspun an alternative to Artwork Archive?","\u003Cp>Yes. Artspun accepts an Artwork Archive piece export for review, including artwork fields and image matches. Import your records handles a separate reviewed upload of collectors, sales, income, locations and exhibitions. Its Art Studio records also supply your website on your own domain. Choose which works to publish and which to share in collector Viewing Rooms.\u003C\u002Fp>",[1000,1015,1023,1031,1038,1046],{"slug":74,"title":1001,"entries":1002},"Art Studio basics",[1003,1004,1005,1006,1007,1008,1009,1010,1011,1012,1013,1014],{"slug":821,"question":822,"answerHtml":823},{"slug":825,"question":826,"answerHtml":827,"guideHtml":828},{"slug":830,"question":831,"answerHtml":832},{"slug":834,"question":835,"answerHtml":836},{"slug":838,"question":839,"answerHtml":840},{"slug":842,"question":843,"answerHtml":844},{"slug":846,"question":847,"answerHtml":848},{"slug":850,"question":851,"answerHtml":852},{"slug":854,"question":855,"answerHtml":856},{"slug":858,"question":859,"answerHtml":860},{"slug":862,"question":863,"answerHtml":864},{"slug":866,"question":867,"answerHtml":868},{"slug":1016,"title":1017,"entries":1018},"importing","Importing from Artwork Archive",[1019,1020,1021,1022],{"slug":870,"question":871,"answerHtml":872},{"slug":874,"question":875,"answerHtml":876},{"slug":878,"question":879,"answerHtml":880},{"slug":882,"question":883,"answerHtml":884},{"slug":1024,"title":1025,"entries":1026},"selling","Sales, invoices and contacts",[1027,1028,1029,1030],{"slug":886,"question":887,"answerHtml":888},{"slug":890,"question":891,"answerHtml":892},{"slug":894,"question":895,"answerHtml":896},{"slug":898,"question":899,"answerHtml":900},{"slug":1032,"title":1033,"entries":1034},"sharing","Sharing and exporting",[1035,1036,1037],{"slug":902,"question":903,"answerHtml":904,"guideHtml":905},{"slug":907,"question":908,"answerHtml":909,"guideHtml":910},{"slug":912,"question":913,"answerHtml":914},{"slug":1039,"title":1040,"entries":1041},"plans","Artspun plans and artwork allowance",[1042,1043,1044,1045],{"slug":916,"question":917,"answerHtml":918},{"slug":920,"question":921,"answerHtml":922},{"slug":924,"question":925,"answerHtml":926},{"slug":928,"question":929,"answerHtml":930},{"slug":816,"title":1047,"entries":1048},"Art inventory and artist website questions",[1049,1050,1051,1052,1053,1054,1055,1056,1057,1058,1059,1060,1061,1062,1063,1064,1065],{"slug":932,"question":933,"answerHtml":934},{"slug":936,"question":937,"answerHtml":938},{"slug":940,"question":941,"answerHtml":942},{"slug":944,"question":945,"answerHtml":946},{"slug":948,"question":949,"answerHtml":950},{"slug":952,"question":953,"answerHtml":954},{"slug":956,"question":957,"answerHtml":958},{"slug":960,"question":961,"answerHtml":962},{"slug":964,"question":965,"answerHtml":966},{"slug":968,"question":969,"answerHtml":970},{"slug":972,"question":973,"answerHtml":974},{"slug":976,"question":977,"answerHtml":978},{"slug":980,"question":981,"answerHtml":982},{"slug":984,"question":985,"answerHtml":986},{"slug":988,"question":989,"answerHtml":990},{"slug":992,"question":993,"answerHtml":994},{"slug":996,"question":997,"answerHtml":998},{"slug":1067,"title":1068,"lead":1069,"entries":1070,"groups":1132},"filmmakers","Filmmakers and films","How films, public film pages, credits, screenings, festivals, press kits, watch links, and social post associations work.",[1071,1075,1080,1084,1088,1093,1097,1101,1106,1108,1112,1116,1120,1124,1128],{"slug":1072,"question":1073,"answerHtml":1074},"turn-on-filmmaker-tools","How do I turn on the filmmaker tools?","\u003Cp>Make the website a Filmmaker website: choose Filmmaker when you add it, or open the website, then Site Settings, General, and check Filmmaker under What this website is. A Filmmaker website has \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Ffilm\">Films\u003C\u002Fa> under Content in its menu, and the Filmmaker Blocks section in the website builder. The other kinds can stay checked too. Unchecking Filmmaker later stops new filmmaker blocks from being added on that website. It does not delete films or remove blocks already published on it.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1076,"question":1077,"answerHtml":1078,"guideHtml":1079},"what-is-film-studio","What is stored for each film?","\u003Cp>Films are in your website's own menu: open the website, then Content, \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Ffilm\">Films\u003C\u002Fa>. Open a film and each part of it has its own tab, with one Save for the whole film.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Each film has one record for its title, logline, synopses, year, runtime, format, genres, languages, countries, production stage, release date, poster, backdrop, trailer, and official website. The same record holds cast and crew, festival selections and awards, press coverage, downloadable assets, press kits, watch links, and private notes. Publishing a film creates its public page and adds it to the site's Films page.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The Logline is one sentence about the story and is shown on Filmography cards. The Highlight is the short line under the title in the Film Hero, usually the film's biggest award. Set Main Film to Yes on the film your website is about: the Film Hero shows it, and it is left out of Previous Films. Only one film can be the main film, so choosing one clears it on the others. World Premiere is shown in Film Details, and Stills are the photos for the Film Details gallery, in the order you set with the arrows.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Each award under Festivals & Awards can carry its Laurel, the festival's laurel artwork. The first laurels in the list are the ones your landing page shows, so move the strongest to the top with the arrows.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Screenings are not typed on the film. A screening is an event in Content, \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Ffilm\u002Fevents\">Calendar & Events\u003C\u002Fa> with the film chosen under Related Film, so a date is entered once and shows in your calendar and on the film. The film's Screenings tab lists them and has an Add a screening button. The event's tag says what kind it is: Festival, Special event, or Cinema screening. Your site lists festivals and cinema dates separately, so the tag decides where a screening appears; an event with neither the Festival nor the Special event tag counts as a cinema screening. The event's image is the cinema's or the festival's logo.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Press is two lists. Critic Quotes holds short quotes from reviews, each with the critic, the outlet, the outlet's logo and Link to the Review; the first quotes in the list are the ones your landing page shows. A quote with a link opens that review on your website, wherever the quote appears. Press Articles holds headlines with a link, a date and a photo; switch Highlight on for an article with a photo to show it as a card, and the rest are listed under More Coverage. The first 4 highlights are the ones your landing page shows. An outlet with no logo is shown by its name. A quote or article with no link is flagged in red under its link, so you can find the ones to fill in.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Where to Watch lists each place the film can be seen: pick the Platform from the list (or Other and type its name), choose How (Stream, Rent or buy, Free), add a short Note such as a price, the Link and, if it only plays in some countries, the Region. Each one becomes a tile with a Watch button. A film with no places to watch shows no Where to Watch section.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Press Kit holds the files journalists download: give each one a Name, choose What It Is (poster, film stills, photos of the filmmakers, press notes, title treatment, trailer) and upload the File, a picture, a video or a PDF. Use the arrows to set the order. When a film has files, your website gets a Press Kit page; with none, there is no press kit. Under Contacts for This Film you can add a press contact and a screening bookings contact for when someone else handles that film, like a distributor. Left empty, your website's own contact is used.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-films\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">Art & Film · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Build a home for each film.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>Keep the poster, credits, images, press and watch links in one film record that supplies your website.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"Film records & pages sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#films-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#films-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#films-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#films-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"films-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>A film record supplies several website blocks from one source. Gather the poster, synopsis, credits, stills, press and watch links. Screenings are related calendar events rather than text pasted into a film description.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"films-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Open the film record\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Ffilms-1.jpg\" alt=\"Film records & pages: Open the film record\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Open the film record\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>In the website editor, open Content → Films and select the film or add a new record. Review the basic title, synopsis and main-film setting.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Main Film identifies the primary film used by the film hero and excludes it from Previous Films. Keep that choice intentional.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Use one record for the film rather than creating separate copies for its homepage, press kit and watch section.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Add poster, stills and credits\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Ffilms-2.jpg\" alt=\"Film records & pages: Add poster, stills and credits\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Add poster, stills and credits\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Work through the record's image and credit fields. Choose the correct poster and stills, and review cast, crew and other saved details.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A portrait poster and landscape still serve different spaces. Prepare suitable images and inspect their fitting in the website blocks.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Check credit spelling and order. The film's save applies to the record, so review the tabs before finishing.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Complete press and watch links\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Ffilms-3.jpg\" alt=\"Film records & pages: Complete press and watch links\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Complete press and watch links\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Add the film's press information and watch destinations. Review optional article\u002Fquote links, logos and highlighted items before using them publicly.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>For press kits, include the files and contact you actually want journalists to use. A descriptive paragraph alone is not a downloadable press kit.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Open each watch link to confirm its platform and destination. Do not label a trailer link as the full film.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 4\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Preview the film page and related events\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Ffilms-4.jpg\" alt=\"Film records & pages: Preview the film page and related events\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Preview the film page and related events\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Save the film and preview its website blocks. Add screenings as Calendar & Events records with Related Film set to this film.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The same screening can appear on the film page and the calendar from one event record. Check date, timezone, ticket link and status.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Review poster, stills, credits, press downloads and watch links on desktop and mobile before publishing the page.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Save a film's poster, synopsis, credits and watch links in one record. Add a premiere screening as a related event, then preview its film page and calendar listing before publishing.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"films-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>Main-film choice and film details are correct.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Poster, stills and credits were reviewed.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Press and watch links reach the intended material.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Screenings use related event records and correct dates.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"films-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>A screening is missing from the film page\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Review the event's Related Film value, publication status and date; it should refer to the same film record.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>A watch link opens the wrong video\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Correct the saved destination and label in the film record, then preview the public block again.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":1081,"question":1082,"answerHtml":1083},"film-website-or-production-company","Is my website about one film or a production company?","\u003Cp>Open your website, then Content, \u003Ca href=\"\u002Faccount\u002Ffilm\">Films\u003C\u002Fa>, and choose under This Website Is About, below the list of films. With One film, the website is about that film: there is no Films page, and the main film has no separate page, because the whole website is about it. Your other films appear as Previous Films on your About page, and each opens its own small page. The Film Hero's About button opens your About page. With A production company, your website has a Films page and a page for every film, and each Film Hero slide's About button opens that film's page. If you never choose, a website with one published film counts as One film and a website with more counts as a production company.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1085,"question":1086,"answerHtml":1087},"importing-a-film-website","What happens to my films when I import my film's website?","\u003Cp>When you import a filmmaker's website, Podspun reads its pages and fills in each film it finds (under Content, \u003Ca href=\"\u002Faccount\u002Ffilm\">Films\u003C\u002Fa>, in your website's menu): the synopsis, credits, festivals and awards with their laurels, screenings (festival, cinema or special event, with each venue's logo, filed in Calendar & Events with the film chosen), critic quotes and press articles with the outlets' logos and photos, where to watch, stills and press kit files. Pictures and PDFs are copied to your website's files. It only uses what your pages say, so check each film and fill in anything it missed. This happens on your preview too, and if your preview still has no films when you turn your site on, they are filled in then.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Your pages are then laid out for you. A website about one film gets a landing page with the Film Hero, Film Details and short previews (laurels, the next screenings, one critic quote at a time, press highlights, where to watch), a Screenings page, a Press page and, when there are files, a Press Kit page, with your old site's own screenings or press page reused. The film's credits and your other films go on About. A production company's landing shows a slide and a card for every film, and each film has its own page.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1089,"question":1090,"answerHtml":1091,"guideHtml":1092},"filmmaker-website-blocks","Which website blocks are for filmmakers?","\u003Cp>Film Hero, Filmography, Film Details, Film Credits, Festival Selections and Awards, Press Coverage, Film Press Kit, and Where to Watch are in Filmmaker Blocks. They are filled from your website's films (Content, Films) and appear in the picker on a Filmmaker website. People, Events, Reviews and Press Quotes, Downloads, Platform Links, Gallery, Media, Cards, and social blocks stay in the shared sections because they are useful to every kind of website. A shared block can still choose a film as its source.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Film Hero shows the film's backdrop with its Year and Format, the title and the film's Highlight line (the Logline when there is no Highlight). Its About button opens your About page on a website about one film (and is hidden when there is no About page), or the film's own page on a production company's website. Its Watch trailer button opens the trailer on YouTube. A button with nowhere to go is not shown. In the block's settings, Show picks Main film only or All films, as a slider, with the main film first. Under Your Own Slides you can add extra slides after the film slides, each with its own picture or video, text and buttons.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Film Details shows the Long Synopsis (or the Short Synopsis), then one row of facts: Directed by (the credits whose role includes Director), World Premiere, Year and Format, plus Genre when it says something the Format does not. Under them are the film's Stills; a click opens a still full size. In the block's settings, Stills picks Move by themselves (they drift and stop under the mouse) or Slider with arrows. Both loop.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Film Credits lists the film's people, one per row, with their portrait, role and bio. With no heading of your own it reads Cast & crew when anyone has a Character, and Filmmakers when no one does, as in most documentaries.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Festival Selections and Awards has two displays. Laurel row shows the first six laurels from the film's Festivals & Awards tab, in your order, and is made for a dark band on the landing page; set a Button Link to add a See the full festival run button to the page with the full list. Full list shows a card for each festival screening (an event of the film tagged Festival): its image (the festival's laurel), its dates, the festival, its Note and city, and a Learn more link; an award whose festival has no screening gets a card too. In the laurel row, laurels are repainted in one colour so they read on a light or a dark background. If no award has a laurel, the block shows the full list.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>An Events block with a film chosen lists that film's screenings (its events in Calendar & Events), one row each: the dates, where, the guests, the venue's logo and a Tickets & info button. The whole row opens the ticket link. Festival screenings are left out because Festival Selections and Awards shows them. The Screenings setting picks Coming up and past, which splits the list by date on its own as dates pass and hides an empty half, or Next 3 coming up for your landing page, which shows nothing when no screening is coming up; add a See All Link to show a See all screenings button. Switch on Host a Screening Button to show \"Want to bring the film to your city? Host a screening\": on the landing version it shows only when nothing is coming up, and on the full list it sits at the end. It writes to the film's screening bookings contact, or opens your Contact page when the film has none.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Filmography shows every published film as a card with its backdrop, Year and Format, title and Logline, and a View film link to the film's own page. The main film comes first. Switch on Leave Out the Main Film for a Previous Films list on a site about one film.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A Reviews and Press Quotes block with a film chosen shows that film's Critic Quotes, never its articles. Display picks Quote wall, every quote as a card only as tall as its quote (made for your Press page), or One at a time, one large quote with dots to jump between quotes, made for a dark band on your landing page. It moves on by itself, stops while the mouse is over it, and holds a quote for ten seconds after a dot is clicked. Add a Button Link to show a Read what critics are saying button. A quote whose Link to the Review is filled in opens that review in a new tab, in both displays; one without a link is not clickable. Each outlet's logo is shown in one colour and at one size; an outlet with no logo is shown by its name.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Press Coverage shows the film's Press Articles. Display picks Press page, which shows Press highlights (articles with Highlight on and a photo, as cards) and then More coverage (every other article, listed with its outlet, date and headline); Featured in, the outlets' logos in one row for the top of your Press page (outlets of your articles first, then your critics', each once, up to eight); or Landing, the first four highlights, with a See all press button when a Button Link is set. A display with nothing to show does not appear.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Where to Watch shows one tile per place in the film's Where to Watch list, two per row: the platform, how (Stream, Rent or buy, Free), the Note and Region, and a Watch button. A place outside its Available From and Available Until dates is left out, and when nothing is left the block does not appear. Platform Links, the shared block, still shows its row of buttons.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A Press Kit block with a film chosen shows that film's Press Kit files. Display picks Press room, for your Press Kit page: the poster large on the left, every other file as a line with a preview, its name, what it is, its file type and size (for files uploaded to your website), and a download button, then the film's press contact when there is one. Or Invitation box, for the bottom of your Press page: the first pictures fanned out and an Open press kit button to the page you choose under Press Kit Page. With no files, the block does not appear.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-film-kit\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">Art & Film · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Put your film press kit in one place.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>A film record supplies its poster, downloadable files and press contact to your website.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"Film press kits sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#film-kit-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#film-kit-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#film-kit-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#film-kit-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"film-kit-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Choose a film record and collect the poster, downloadable press files and press contact you want visitors to use. Review the files before making them publicly downloadable.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"film-kit-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Open the film’s source record\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Ffilm-kit-1.jpg\" alt=\"Film press kits: Open the film’s source record\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Open the film’s source record\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Content → Films and select the correct title. Confirm its poster and basic details. The film record supplies the Press Kit presentation; avoid entering conflicting information in a separate page.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Open Content, then Films, and select the film. Confirm its title, poster and basic film details.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The film record supplies the website presentation, so correct the source record rather than entering conflicting details on several pages.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Add and label the downloadable files\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Ffilm-kit-2.jpg\" alt=\"Film press kits: Add and label the downloadable files\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Add and label the downloadable files\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open the Press Kit tab. Add the files journalists should download and give each a useful name and type. Open the actual files to check versions and quality before saving. These are public downloads when the block presents them.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Open the film’s Press Kit tab and add the downloadable files, using clear labels that tell a journalist what each download contains. Set the press contact in the Details tab.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Open each file yourself and check its contents, image quality and contact details. Remove outdated versions before presenting the kit.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Set the press contact and destination\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Ffilm-kit-contact.jpg\" alt=\"Film press kits: Set the press contact and destination\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Set the press contact and destination\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Details → Contacts for This Film and set Press Contact Name and Press Contact Email. Left blank, these use the website’s own contact. If you use an invitation box that opens a dedicated kit page, choose the intended Press Kit Page. Confirm the contact and page belong to this film before saving its record.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Use a contact who is responsible for this film’s press enquiries. An invitation to open a press kit and the downloadable pressroom are two presentation modes; their page link and files need to agree.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 4\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Add the block and test every download\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Ffilm-kit-3.jpg\" alt=\"Film press kits: Add the block and test every download\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Add the block and test every download\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Add a Film Press Kit block and choose the film. Use Display Pressroom for files or Invitation Box for a link into the kit. Review poster, title, contact and each download at desktop and narrow widths before publishing. A kit with no files can be hidden.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Add a Press Kit block to the website and choose the relevant film. Review the public presentation and try every download.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Check that the poster, film title and contact all belong to the same film. Review the block on mobile so the download links remain easy to use.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Collect a film’s poster, synopsis and press notes in its Press Kit tab. Present them through one Press Kit block, then download each file from the public page as a journalist would.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"film-kit-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>All files belong to the selected film.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Downloads open and contain the current material.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>The press contact is correct.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"film-kit-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>The wrong film’s material appears\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Check the film selected by the Press Kit block.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>A download is outdated\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Update the file in the film’s Press Kit tab and test the public download again.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":1094,"question":1095,"answerHtml":1096},"why-cant-i-edit-a-film-block-on-the-page","Why can't I change a film block's words on the page?","\u003Cp>Because they come from the film, not from the page. The same film feeds several blocks across several pages, so a change typed on one page would have to quietly change all the others. You change it once on the film, under Content, \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Ffilm\">Films\u003C\u002Fa>, and every page follows.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Open a film block in the website builder and its settings say which part of the film fills it, with a button straight to that tab of the film the block is showing: Details for Film Hero and Film Details, People & Credits for Film Credits, Festivals & Awards, Screenings, Critic Quotes, Press Articles, Where to Watch, or Press Kit. The block's own settings, which film it shows, its heading and how it is displayed, stay on the page.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The Film box at the top of a film block is normally left alone. It reads The main film, with that film's name, which means the block shows whichever film you have set as the main film, so your website follows if you ever change which that is. Choose a film in the box to pin the block to that one film instead. On a block every kind of website shares (Events, Reviews and Press Quotes, People, Downloads) the box reads No film, and the block then uses the items you type into the block itself.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1098,"question":1099,"answerHtml":1100},"connect-instagram-tiktok-posts-to-films","Can I connect Instagram and TikTok posts to a film?","\u003Cp>Yes. Import the Instagram or TikTok account through \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fchannels\">Podspun Dataweaver\u003C\u002Fa>, then open a film under Content, \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Ffilm\u002Fsocial\">Films\u003C\u002Fa>, in your website's menu and choose its Social Posts tab. One post can be connected to several films. Podspun can suggest matches from film titles, but every suggestion waits for you to confirm or reject it. Connections can be labeled as an announcement, trailer, behind the scenes, festival, press, screening, cast and crew, or other.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1102,"question":1103,"answerHtml":1104,"guideHtml":1105},"add-events-to-my-website","How do I add events to my website?","\u003Cp>Open your website, then Content, \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Ffilm\u002Fevents\">Calendar & Events\u003C\u002Fa>, and click Add event. One record holds the title, venue, city, country, the event's own time zone, its date (or its start and end times), an RSVP or tickets link, a stream link for while it is live, a replay link for after, a note, an image, and an optional related film, product, or auction. Set Status to Published for it to show; a Draft never appears on the website. Choosing a film under Related Film makes the event one of that film's screenings.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Every Events block and Live Now block on your pages reads these records, so changing a date here changes it everywhere at once. Choose Yes under Date Only for a festival window or an announcement day: a date-only event is never shown as live. Give an event a start time when something goes on the air or on stage at a set moment. Canceling an event keeps it listed with a Canceled label until its date has passed; Unpublish or Delete removes it.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-screenings\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">Art & Film · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Enter a screening once.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>A screening event can appear on the film page and in the website calendar from the same record.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"Film screenings sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#screenings-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#screenings-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#screenings-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#screenings-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"screenings-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Choose the film and have the screening’s venue, local date and time, time zone and ticket link ready. Use one event record so the film page and calendar agree.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"screenings-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Create the screening as an event\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fscreenings-1.jpg\" alt=\"Film screenings: Create the screening as an event\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Create the screening as an event\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Calendar & Events and add the screening. Enter the local start date, time, Time Zone and venue, then the tickets link. Keep Draft until you have confirmed the organizer’s details; do not enter a second event just for the film page.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Open Calendar & Events and add the screening as an event. Give it a clear title and enter its date and time zone.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Review the venue information against the screening organiser’s details.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Associate it with the correct film\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fscreenings-2.jpg\" alt=\"Film screenings: Associate it with the correct film\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Associate it with the correct film\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Choose the title under Related Film and save. Check Tags: Festival-tagged events are treated as festival \u002F awards entries rather than ordinary screenings. Use the screening classification that matches the presentation you want, then publish the reviewed event.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Choose the film under Related Film and add the venue and tickets link. This relationship lets the event appear with the film’s screenings.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Check that you selected the correct film, particularly if several titles have similar names.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Configure and check the screenings list\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fscreenings-3.jpg\" alt=\"Film screenings: Configure and check the screenings list\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Configure and check the screenings list\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Configure the film’s Events block to show Screenings, such as coming up and past or the next three. Set See All Link and Host A Screening Button if useful. Open a screening’s details, ticket destination and narrow presentation to verify the result.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Host A Screening can use the film’s booking contact or the site’s Contact page. Check that destination before showing the invitation. Film association, tags, event status and block filters all affect which events appear; a missing screening is not fixed by making a duplicate record.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Review the film’s screenings list and the website calendar. Open the screening’s details and follow the ticket link.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>If a screening changes, update the original event record and review both presentations again. Avoid entering a second copy for the calendar.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Enter a festival screening once, associate it with the film and add the festival’s ticket URL. Confirm the same date and venue appear on the film page and in the calendar.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"screenings-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>The event links to the correct film.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Film and calendar presentations agree.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>The tickets link opens the intended screening.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"screenings-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>The screening is missing from the film page\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Check Related Film on the event and the screenings presentation on that film’s page.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>The calendar has a duplicate\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Keep the event associated with the film and review whether a second record was entered unnecessarily.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":932,"question":933,"answerHtml":1107},"\u003Cp>Yes. Open Site Editor Chat in your website editor and ask for article ideas. It reads your Instagram and TikTok posts, the articles already on your site, and what visitors searched for. Pick an idea and it writes a full article from those posts, with your photos placed where they fit, a search title, and a description. It saves as a draft until you publish it.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1109,"question":1110,"answerHtml":1111},"can-i-use-the-filmmaker-tools-with-creator-or-artist-tools","Can I use the filmmaker tools with creator or artist tools?","\u003Cp>Yes. The type is set on each website, and a website can be more than one type. One account can also hold separate websites of different types.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1113,"question":1114,"answerHtml":1115},"which-blocks-appear-only-for-filmmakers","Which blocks appear only for filmmakers?","\u003Cp>Film Hero, Filmography, Film Details, Film Credits, Festival Selections and Awards, Film Press Kit, and Where to Watch. They appear on a website whose type includes Filmmaker.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1117,"question":1118,"answerHtml":1119},"are-screenings-a-filmmaker-only-block","Are screenings a filmmaker-only block?","\u003Cp>Screenings use the shared Events block. A screening is an event in the site's calendar with a film chosen, and every kind of website can use the same block for its own events.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1121,"question":1122,"answerHtml":1123},"can-one-instagram-post-be-connected-to-more-than-one-film","Can one Instagram post be connected to more than one film?","\u003Cp>Yes. Film and social post connections are many-to-many. Suggested matches wait for confirmation.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1125,"question":1126,"answerHtml":1127},"what-happens-if-i-turn-filmmaker-off","What happens if I turn Filmmaker off?","\u003Cp>Filmmaker stays on while the website has films or a page uses a film block. Once those are removed, turning it off stops filmmaker blocks from being offered on that website.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1129,"question":1130,"answerHtml":1131},"do-film-pages-include-structured-data","Do film pages include structured data?","\u003Cp>Yes. Published film pages include Movie structured data, plus VideoObject data when a trailer is present. Published film URLs are added to the sitemap.\u003C\u002Fp>",[1133,1143],{"slug":74,"title":75,"entries":1134},[1135,1136,1137,1138,1139,1140,1141,1142],{"slug":1072,"question":1073,"answerHtml":1074},{"slug":1076,"question":1077,"answerHtml":1078,"guideHtml":1079},{"slug":1081,"question":1082,"answerHtml":1083},{"slug":1085,"question":1086,"answerHtml":1087},{"slug":1089,"question":1090,"answerHtml":1091,"guideHtml":1092},{"slug":1094,"question":1095,"answerHtml":1096},{"slug":1098,"question":1099,"answerHtml":1100},{"slug":1102,"question":1103,"answerHtml":1104,"guideHtml":1105},{"slug":1067,"title":1144,"entries":1145},"Filmmaker website questions",[1146,1147,1148,1149,1150,1151,1152],{"slug":932,"question":933,"answerHtml":1107},{"slug":1109,"question":1110,"answerHtml":1111},{"slug":1113,"question":1114,"answerHtml":1115},{"slug":1117,"question":1118,"answerHtml":1119},{"slug":1121,"question":1122,"answerHtml":1123},{"slug":1125,"question":1126,"answerHtml":1127},{"slug":1129,"question":1130,"answerHtml":1131},{"slug":1154,"title":1155,"lead":1156,"entries":1157,"groups":1358},"clips-search-and-ai","Clips, search and AI","The clip generator, the Podspun Dataweaver, word-level search, episode insights, the built-in AI assistant your audience can ask, and the Data API.",[1158,1162,1166,1170,1175,1179,1184,1188,1193,1198,1202,1207,1211,1215,1219,1223,1227,1231,1235,1239,1243,1247,1251,1256,1260,1264,1268,1272,1276,1280,1284,1288,1292,1296,1300,1304,1308,1312,1316,1320,1324,1328,1332,1336,1340,1344,1348,1352,1354],{"slug":1159,"question":1160,"answerHtml":1161},"what-is-the-clip-generator","What is the clip generator?","\u003Cp>Any moment in any episode becomes a captioned, branded clip in about two clicks, with no video editor and no second subscription. Video shows get video clips, audio-only shows get audiograms, and you can also export plain audio. Open an episode, pick the moment, and Podspun makes the clip with your branding ready to share.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1163,"question":1164,"answerHtml":1165},"how-suggested-clips-are-picked","How are suggested clips picked?","\u003Cp>Podspun reads each episode for its strongest moments: pulled quotes, highlights, key moments, and hooks such as a reveal, a cliffhanger, a tease, an open question, or a conflict. Each card in Suggested clips in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fclips\">Clips and Thumbs Maker\u003C\u002Fa> names the kind of moment: Quote, Highlight, Key moment, or a hook (Reveal, Cliffhanger, Tease, Open question, Conflict).\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The AI reads the transcript around every moment Podspun found, chooses where the clip should start and end (opening on the hook, closing on the payoff), and rates that clip 1 to 5 for how well it works on its own: 5 grabs attention in the first seconds, pays off (surprising, funny, emotional or useful) and makes sense without the rest of the episode; 1 is filler or needs context. Hover the bars to see the reason.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The Rating dropdown beside the show picker chooses which clips show. All ratings mixes them: the ratings take turns (a 5, a 4, a 3 and so on), newest episodes first, and the same episode never shows twice within four cards. 5 only, 4 and up, and 3 and up show just those clips; pick 5 only to see your best. Make all makes the clips the list is showing, each as its own clip. The rating you pick is remembered on this browser.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp> A new episode is rated in the background, usually within a few minutes; until then its moments show their kind alone.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Make all, beside Refresh suggestions, makes every suggestion on screen (up to 12) in one click. Each clip uses your saved Preferences and its own show's logo, and an episode with no video becomes an audiogram. They appear in My Outputs.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1167,"question":1168,"answerHtml":1169},"find-every-moment-a-word-is-said","How do I find every moment a word or name is said?","\u003Cp>In \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fclips\">Clips and Thumbs Maker\u003C\u002Fa>, type the word or name in the box under Find every moment, at the top of the Clips tab, and click Find moments. The Find moments window lists every time it is said, across all your episodes, grouped by episode, with the most mentions first. Exact words matches whole words only, so Nick does not match Nickelodeon. Same idea finds moments about the same thing, even when other words are used.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Tick the moments you want (up to 10), from as many episodes as you like, and click Bring these into the clip editor. The clip editor opens with them as the moments of one clip, in the order you ticked them, and you trim each one there. Episodes YouTube won't play outside YouTube are left out.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1171,"question":1172,"answerHtml":1173,"guideHtml":1174},"clip-with-several-moments","Can one clip have several moments, even from different episodes?","\u003Cp>Yes. On the Clips tab, tick several cards (Use in a clip) and press Make one clip from them in the bar at the bottom, or tick moments in the Find moments window. In the clip editor, Moments in this clip sits at the top of the Trim tab. Click Add a moment and pick From this episode, From another episode, or Search all episodes (the Find moments window). A clip holds up to 10 moments and up to 3 minutes in all.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The clip plays the moments one after another. Click a moment to select it: the player, transcript and timeline then work on that moment. The arrows move a moment earlier or later, and the × removes it. Between moments chooses a straight Cut or a short Fade. If any moment has no video, the clip is made as an audiogram.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-montage\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">Clips & Media · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Put several moments in one clip.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>Combine moments from different episodes, then trim and order them in the same editor.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"Clips with several moments sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#montage-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#montage-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#montage-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#montage-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"montage-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Select moments that belong together and decide the order in which they should make sense. Combining several moments can change their apparent meaning, so review the original context.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"montage-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Choose the moments to combine\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fmontage-1.jpg\" alt=\"Clips with several moments: Choose the moments to combine\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Choose the moments to combine\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Select several moments with Use in a clip, then open Make clip. You can combine up to ten moments and three minutes total. Choose moments that support one clear story rather than a collection of unrelated quotes.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Select the moments you want and choose Make one clip from them. These can come from different episodes.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Keep the selection focused on one purpose. A short sequence of related points is easier to follow than unrelated highlights.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Order and trim each moment\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fmontage-2.jpg\" alt=\"Clips with several moments: Order and trim each moment\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Order and trim each moment\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Use the moment arrows to change the order and select each moment to trim it. Add moment can use this episode, another episode or Search all. Remove an unwanted moment with its X. Listen to the joins after changing either order or duration.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Trim each moment in the editor and arrange their order. Listen to the end of one moment followed by the beginning of the next.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Remove repeated introductions or conclusions where they make the sequence drag, while preserving the meaning of each speaker’s point.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Choose the transition and output style\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fmontage-3.jpg\" alt=\"Clips with several moments: Choose the transition and output style\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Choose the transition and output style\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Choose Cut for a direct join or Fade for a softer transition. Set the format, captions and logo for the whole output. If any selected moment is audio-only, the combined output uses an audiogram.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Choose Cut or Fade between moments and review the complete sequence. Check captions and audio at every join.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Make the clip, then watch the rendered file in My Outputs. Review the joins again before downloading or sharing it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 4\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Render and check the finished sequence\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fmontage-finish.jpg\" alt=\"Clips with several moments: Render and check the finished sequence\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Render and check the finished sequence\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Play the entire preview, including every transition. Save as Draft to return later or Make Clip to render. Wait for completion in My Outputs and play the actual output before downloading it. Check that each excerpt still represents its speaker’s meaning.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A transition can make a join smoother, but it cannot make disconnected statements coherent. If the sequence implies an answer or agreement the speakers never gave, reorder or remove a moment. Keep the finished duration and chosen shape appropriate for its destination.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Combine three short explanations of the same topic from different episodes. Put the definition first, the example second and the practical advice last, then check the sequence for repetition.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"montage-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>The order tells one coherent story.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Edits preserve each source’s meaning.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Sound and captions remain clear at the joins.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"montage-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>A join feels abrupt\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Adjust the trim and compare Cut with Fade.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>The combined clip feels repetitive\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Remove a repeated point or shorten the relevant moment.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":1176,"question":1177,"answerHtml":1178},"clip-finishing-touches","What are the finishing touches on a clip?","\u003Cp>They are the optional extras in the clip editor, on the tab each belongs to. Everything goes into the clip file you download:\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Title on the video\u003C\u002Fstrong> (Captions tab): a line in a white box at the top, for the first 3 seconds or the whole clip. Click a suggestion to use it, or type your own.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Progress bar\u003C\u002Fstrong> (Captions tab): a thin bar along the bottom that fills as the clip plays.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Sound\u003C\u002Fstrong> (Finish tab): Even out volume brings the clip to a steady loudness. Cut long pauses removes silences longer than a moment.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Also make\u003C\u002Fstrong> (Format tab): the same clip in more shapes. Each shape is another clip in My Outputs.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003Cp>The \u003Cstrong>Caption to copy\u003C\u002Fstrong>, on the Finish tab, is not in the file. It is text for when you post the clip yourself, and it shows in My Outputs with a Copy button. Podspun never posts for you.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1180,"question":1181,"answerHtml":1182,"guideHtml":1183},"clip-formats-and-styles","What formats and shapes can clips have?","\u003Cp>Three outputs: a video clip cut from the YouTube video (YouTube shows), an audiogram (your audio with an animated waveform), or plain audio as an mp3. Four shapes: vertical 9:16 for Reels, Stories, TikTok, and Shorts; portrait 4:5 for Instagram and Facebook feeds; square 1:1 for feed posts; landscape 16:9 for YouTube and X.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Captions burn the spoken words into the clip. Pick one of six looks (Clean, Outline, Box, Spoken, Headline, Word Box), how many words show at once (1 to 6, or a whole line), and the size and position. More options sets the font, letter case, text color, a color or box for the word being said, an outline, a box behind the line, and a shadow. The colors offered are white, black and the colors of the website the show is on; the rainbow dot opens a color picker for any other. The preview shows exactly what the clip will. You can also place your show's logo anywhere on a nine-position grid, and choose whether video fills the frame or shows whole over a blurred fill. Set your favorites once under Preferences in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fclips\">Clips and Thumbs Maker\u003C\u002Fa> and every new clip starts there.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Upload a brand logo per show under Preferences, and it goes on every clip from that show. If you have split a feed into virtual channels, each virtual channel gets its own logo, so a clip carries the logo of the show it came from.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-audiograms\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">Clips & Media · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Give an audio moment a visual.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>Make an audiogram with an animated waveform, captions and your show branding.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"Audiograms sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#audiograms-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#audiograms-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#audiograms-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#audiograms-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"audiograms-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Choose a clear audio moment and a visual identity for it. An audiogram adds an animated waveform and optional captions to audio; it does not need a source video.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"audiograms-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Choose and trim the audio\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Faudiograms-1.jpg\" alt=\"Audiograms: Choose and trim the audio\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Choose and trim the audio\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open the moment in Clips & Thumbs Maker. In Trim, play the selected audio and adjust its beginning, ending and length. Keep complete words and enough context for a listener who has not heard the episode.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Open the audio moment in the clip editor. Listen around your selection and trim it to a complete thought.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Choose a moment that listeners can understand without seeing the rest of the episode.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Choose Audiogram and its shape\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Faudiograms-2.jpg\" alt=\"Audiograms: Choose Audiogram and its shape\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Choose Audiogram and its shape\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>In Format, choose Audiogram rather than Video or MP3. Choose 9:16, 4:5, 1:1 or 16:9 for the destination. The audiogram gives audio a visual presentation; it does not create footage of the speaker.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Choose an audiogram format and the shape for its destination. Review the waveform, artwork, captions and show branding in the preview.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Keep the text readable and the waveform clear of important artwork. Check names and specialist words in the captions.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Style, render and check the output\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Faudiograms-3.jpg\" alt=\"Audiograms: Style, render and check the output\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Style, render and check the output\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Configure captions and the logo, then play the preview in Finish. Save as Draft keeps the composition; Make Clip renders it. Wait for the finished job in My Outputs, listen to the complete file and check captions before downloading.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Play the preview from beginning to end, then make the clip. Open the completed output and listen again.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Check that the waveform animates with the audio, the captions are legible and the sound is clear before downloading.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Use a short answer from an audio interview, the show’s artwork and captions. Choose a square or vertical presentation according to where you want to share it, then check the completed file on a phone.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"audiograms-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>The selected audio is understandable on its own.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Artwork and captions remain inside the frame.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>The finished audio and animation play correctly.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"audiograms-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>The captions are difficult to read\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Adjust the caption appearance and review it against the chosen artwork.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>The selection cuts off the point\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Extend the trim to include the speaker’s conclusion.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":1185,"question":1186,"answerHtml":1187},"why-is-an-episode-missing-from-clip-suggestions","Why is an episode missing from clip suggestions?","\u003Cp>Some YouTube videos carry limits set by their uploader: they can be blocked from playing outside YouTube, limited to certain countries, or removed from YouTube entirely. A clip can't be previewed or rendered from a video YouTube refuses to serve, so \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fclips\">Clips and Thumbs Maker\u003C\u002Fa> leaves those episodes out of Suggested clips instead of offering a clip that would fail.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Photo-only Instagram and TikTok posts are also left out, since they have no video or audio to cut. The episodes themselves stay on your sites either way.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1189,"question":1190,"answerHtml":1191,"guideHtml":1192},"title-and-thumbnail-suggestor","What is the title and thumbnail suggestor?","\u003Cp>The Thumbs tab in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fclips\">Clips and Thumbs Maker\u003C\u002Fa>. It suggests titles and thumbnails in your channel's own style, tuned to what already gets views. Pick a real episode to get alternative titles and thumbnail concepts, or describe a new episode idea to get titles in your house style before you record.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Each concept comes with an AI background image; you can regenerate it from a prompt or upload your own, add your logo and text, then download the finished 1280 by 720 thumbnail or save it to My Outputs. Titles and episode-frame previews are free; AI images and exact frame pulls get 5 free a month, then come in packs.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-thumbs\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">Clips & Media · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Try a new title and thumbnail.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>Get title and thumbnail ideas for an episode, then add your image, logo and text.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"Thumbnails in your style sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#thumbs-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#thumbs-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#thumbs-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#thumbs-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"thumbs-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Have an episode or an episode idea ready, plus any image and logo you want to use. Keep the title readable at the small size where viewers will first see the thumbnail.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"thumbs-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Open thumbnails for the intended episode\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fthumbs-1.jpg\" alt=\"Thumbnails in your style: Open thumbnails for the intended episode\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Open thumbnails for the intended episode\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Clips & Thumbs Maker → Thumbs. Choose the episode or enter the new idea you want to illustrate. Confirm the subject before generating concepts so the image and headline belong to the same story.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Open Clips & Thumbs Maker and choose the Thumbs tab. Select an episode or describe the episode idea you want to present.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Check that the concept is about the actual episode rather than a more dramatic promise it does not deliver.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Choose a concept, then make the image\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fthumbs-2.jpg\" alt=\"Thumbnails in your style: Choose a concept, then make the image\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Choose a concept, then make the image\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Use Suggest to request title and image ideas. Choose a concept you can support with the episode, then generate or upload its image. Treat the suggested title as a proposal: edit names, factual claims or exaggerated promises before using it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Review the title and thumbnail concepts. Choose one that communicates the episode’s main subject and fits your show’s style.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Compare the concepts at a small size. A short, clear title and one strong image often remain easier to read than several competing elements.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Design and export the thumbnail\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fthumbs-3.jpg\" alt=\"Thumbnails in your style: Design and export the thumbnail\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Design and export the thumbnail\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Set the text, logo and colors. Check the entire frame, then check it small enough to resemble a real thumbnail. Download exports the thumbnail at 1280 × 720; Save stores it in My Outputs. Saving does not automatically replace the episode’s thumbnail elsewhere.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Edit the selected concept’s image, text and logo. Keep faces and important image details inside the frame and away from overlaid text.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Review the finished thumbnail before downloading it. Check the spelling and the relationship between the thumbnail’s words and the episode title.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>For an interview, use a clear portrait and a short phrase describing the conversation’s main question. Keep the guest’s face visible and check the phrase when the thumbnail is reduced to a small card.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"thumbs-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>The concept accurately represents the episode.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Text stays readable at a small size.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>The image, logo and title are properly framed.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"thumbs-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>The image is overwhelmed by text\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Shorten the phrase and move it away from the important subject.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>The concept feels unlike your show\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Edit its image, logo, wording and colors before downloading.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":1194,"question":1195,"answerHtml":1196,"guideHtml":1197},"what-is-idea-studio","What is Idea Studio?","\u003Cp>An AI brainstorm for clips, inside \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fclips\">Clips and Thumbs Maker\u003C\u002Fa>. It reads your episodes and suggests moments per show. Under Ask for clip ideas, on the Clips tab, say what you are looking for and press Get ideas; Try an example fills the box for you. Tick a card (Use in a clip) and press Make clip in the bar at the bottom to open it in the clip editor, where you review the exact transcript before making the clip. Refresh suggestions analyzes the eight newest video or audio entries in the selected show. The update time appears above the suggestions.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-clip-ideas\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">AI tools · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Ask for your next clip idea.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>Describe the moments you want and Idea Studio suggests clips from your episodes.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"Idea Studio sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#clip-ideas-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#clip-ideas-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#clip-ideas-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#clip-ideas-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"clip-ideas-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Choose what kind of moment you want: an explanation, a strong opinion, a useful tip or a story. The connected episodes are the source of the suggestions.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"clip-ideas-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Open the channel’s clip ideas\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fclip-ideas-1.jpg\" alt=\"Idea Studio: Open the channel’s clip ideas\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Open the channel’s clip ideas\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Clips & Thumbs Maker and the Clips ideas view for the channel you want. Check the channel name so you do not combine an idea from one show with an output from another.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Open the Clips tab in Clips & Thumbs Maker and find Ask for clip ideas. Describe the kind of moment and topic you are looking for.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A specific request helps you assess the results: say who the clip is for and what it should help them understand.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Request a useful kind of moment\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fclip-ideas-2.jpg\" alt=\"Idea Studio: Request a useful kind of moment\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Request a useful kind of moment\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Under Ask For Clip Ideas, describe the subject, tone or kind of moment you want and choose Get ideas. Try example fills a request you can edit. Refresh Suggestions analyzes the channel’s eight newest entries and shows when suggestions were updated.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Choose Get ideas. Read the suggestions and inspect the episode and timing behind each one.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Treat an idea as a candidate. Listen to the moment before committing to it and check whether it needs more context.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Select an idea, then open the composer\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fclip-ideas-3.jpg\" alt=\"Idea Studio: Select an idea, then open the composer\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Select an idea, then open the composer\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Listen to an idea and read the surrounding transcript. Tick Use in a clip, then choose the Make clip action below the selections. In the composer, trim the range, choose format and captions, preview it and render only when the moment makes sense on its own.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Select Use in a clip on the idea you want. In the editor, refine the trim and review captions, shape and branding.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Make the clip only after the chosen moment works on its own. Review the completed render in My Outputs before sharing.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Ask for ‘A practical explanation for a listener new to this topic.’ Compare the suggested moments, listen to one and extend its trim if the explanation needs its opening sentence.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"clip-ideas-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>The moment matches the request.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>You have listened to the source in context.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>The edited clip has a complete beginning and ending.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"clip-ideas-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>The ideas are not useful\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Narrow the topic or describe the type of moment more clearly.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>A promising idea needs context\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Adjust its trim in the clip editor before making it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":1199,"question":1200,"answerHtml":1201},"what-is-the-podspun-dataweaver","What is the Podspun Dataweaver?","\u003Cp>The Dataweaver is the engine behind Podspun. It imports your episodes, transcribes them, indexes every spoken word, and runs search, clips, and AI over your whole catalog. It works automatically: as you publish, the Dataweaver pulls in each new episode and keeps your site, search, and clips current with no manual step.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1203,"question":1204,"answerHtml":1205,"guideHtml":1206},"what-can-my-audience-do","What can my audience do on my Podspun site?","\u003Cp>They can search for any word or phrase and instantly jump to the exact moments where you said it. There is also an AI assistant built in, so they can ask questions and get answers straight from your content. Plus, they can browse auto-generated highlights, download or share quote cards, filter episodes by tags or length, and explore summaries and analytics.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-search\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">Data & Integrations · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Find the exact moment.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>Find the exact second something was said, or ask a question across the whole catalog.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"Ask & Search sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#search-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#search-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#search-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#search-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"search-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Use a website with connected, indexed episodes or posts. Choose a word you know appears in an episode so your first test has a result you can verify.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"search-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Choose Find a word or Ask\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fsearch-1.jpg\" alt=\"Ask & Search: Choose Find a word or Ask\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Choose Find a word or Ask\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Ask & Search on your website. Find a word locates a word or phrase in transcripts; Ask answers a question using the available archive. Choose the mode that matches what you want to find.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Open Ask & Search on the public website. Decide whether you want an exact word match or an answer across the archive.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Find a word is useful when you remember a phrase; a question is useful when you want the archive to explain a subject.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Enter a phrase or a concrete question\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fsearch-2.jpg\" alt=\"Ask & Search: Enter a phrase or a concrete question\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Enter a phrase or a concrete question\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>For a transcript match, type a distinctive word or phrase you remember. For an answer, ask a specific question about material you have published. Submit and read the returned matches or answer before choosing a source.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Choose Find a word and enter a word or phrase, or ask a clear question in the question field. Read the matching transcript or answer before selecting a source.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>For a question, check which episodes or related posts support the answer. The useful next action is to inspect the source, not just the generated response.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Open the evidence at its timestamp\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fsearch-3.jpg\" alt=\"Ask & Search: Open the evidence at its timestamp\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Open the evidence at its timestamp\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Select a returned timestamp to start the episode at that moment. Listen to the surrounding context. An answer may show several supporting moments; review them before repeating a claim. If the answer used connected Substack posts, Related posts links to those originals.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Open a linked episode moment from the results. The timestamp takes you to the place the result refers to.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Listen around the match to understand its context. If the answer links a related post, open it and compare it with the answer as well.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Search for a word you remember hearing, open its transcript match and play from the linked timestamp. Then ask a question about the same subject and compare the supporting moments.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"search-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>The result is from the intended archive.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>The timestamp opens the relevant moment.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>The source supports the answer in context.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"search-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>A known word has no result\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Check that the episode has been imported and indexed, then try a shorter phrase or another word from that moment.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>An answer feels too broad\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Ask a narrower question and inspect its linked sources.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":1208,"question":1209,"answerHtml":1210},"filter-and-explore","Can my audience filter or explore content?","\u003Cp>Yes. Visitors can browse episodes by title, date, length, or tags, and explore auto-generated summaries, insights, highlights, and badges.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1212,"question":1213,"answerHtml":1214},"spotlighting-best-moments","How does Podspun spotlight the best of my episodes?","\u003Cp>Podspun surfaces key moments, creates quote cards you can share or download, and adds badges and tags to each episode. Every highlight, quote card, and key moment links straight to its timestamp, so fans can easily find and share your best moments.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1216,"question":1217,"answerHtml":1218},"episode-insights","What kind of insights does Podspun generate for my episodes?","\u003Cp>Each episode gets auto-generated summaries, key moments with timestamps, smart tags, and analytics like words-per-minute, grade level, and listening ease. You also get a simple channel-level overview so you and your audience can understand your content at a glance.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1220,"question":1221,"answerHtml":1222},"how-accurate-is-the-ai","How does the AI answer, and how accurate is it?","\u003Cp>It answers from your transcribed catalog, not the open web, so replies come from what was said in your episodes. Accuracy tracks transcript quality and how clearly a topic was discussed. It points back to the episodes it drew from, so a listener can check the source.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1224,"question":1225,"answerHtml":1226},"what-does-insights-show","What does Analytics show me?","\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fanalytics\">Analytics\u003C\u002Fa> shows what people do on your sites: page views, unique visitors, AI questions, keyword searches, and link clicks, for the days you choose in the date dropdown beside the Report button: Today, Yesterday, the last 7, 30 or 90 days, All time, or days picked in its calendar. The calendar reaches back to your first day of data, with busier days shaded darker: click a day to see that day, or click a second day to see every day in between. A day runs midnight to midnight UTC, and for one or two days the Activity over time chart shows each hour in your own time zone. Traffic includes the visitor funnel, conversion rate, gross checkout revenue, form submissions, email signups, member joins, purchases, memberships, and donations. What converts connects those confirmed actions and revenue back to the traffic source, referring site, landing page, and UTM source, medium, campaign, term, and content that brought the visitor in. It also shows session quality, landing and exit pages, common journeys, and top content. Campaign Tracking lists the UTM tag values on the links people arrived by, one list per tag (UTM Source, UTM Medium, UTM Campaign, UTM Term, UTM Content), with the tag's name beside each heading. Questions asked (AI search) and the keyword search lists show how many times each was asked, and when more than one ask came from the same visitor, how many different people asked it in brackets, so one person repeating a question does not look like many. Current ranges are compared with the previous matching period; today has no comparison, because the day is not over.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Individual activity and journey detail are kept for 90 days. Daily totals, conversions, revenue, and campaign attribution are kept for historical reporting.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1228,"question":1229,"answerHtml":1230},"insights-outbound-and-campaigns","What does the Outbound and campaigns section in Analytics show?","\u003Cp>In the Traffic tab of \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fanalytics\">Analytics\u003C\u002Fa>, Outbound and campaigns lists the clicks that left your site: plain outbound links, affiliate cards, and cards that point at an outside auction house. Each row shows where the click went, the placement, campaign, and item recorded on the link, the source that brought that visitor to your site, and the number of clicks. Filter the table by destination, placement, campaign, or item, and sort any column.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The three click counts are separate from each other and from checkout revenue. Native auction bids, awards, and settlements are counted on their own, with the settled amount shown under settlements. These are clicks. A sale at the retailer, a festival registration, or a vote is not confirmed by a click; those figures only come from a report the partner supplies. Row detail covers the last 90 days; the counts cover the selected range.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1232,"question":1233,"answerHtml":1234},"episode-plays-in-analytics","Can I see how many people played an episode?","\u003Cp>Yes. In \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fanalytics\">Analytics\u003C\u002Fa>, Top episodes shows each episode's page views, and in brackets how many of those visits started it playing. A play is counted once per visit to the episode page, when the episode starts, including when it starts by itself as the page opens.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Plays are counted for audio episodes, for TikTok and Instagram posts set to \"Podspun player\", and for YouTube videos set to \"Auto play videos\". A YouTube video set to \"Click start to play\" or \"Link out to YouTube\" plays inside YouTube's own player or on YouTube, which does not tell your site, so those plays only show in YouTube's own numbers. Plays were first counted on October 6, 2026; earlier days show views only.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1236,"question":1237,"answerHtml":1238},"what-is-the-narrative-tab","Where do I find Narrative insights?","\u003Cp>It reads how each episode is built. Every episode gets a tension curve (how gripping the story is minute by minute), compared against your show's average shape, with a plain-language read of what the episode does well and where attention may dip. Curiosity spikes mark the moments most likely to hook a listener, and Coach this episode asks the AI for specific suggestions. Find it in the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fanalytics?tab=narrative\">Analytics & Insights\u003C\u002Fa> under Narrative.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1240,"question":1241,"answerHtml":1242},"searches-with-no-results","Can I see what visitors searched for and didn't find?","\u003Cp>Yes. In \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fanalytics\">Analytics\u003C\u002Fa>, the Traffic tab lists searches with no results: the words people looked for on your site that nothing matched. It is a direct list of content your audience wants, which makes it a good source of episode and page ideas.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1244,"question":1245,"answerHtml":1246},"weekly-email-digest","Can I get my site stats by email?","\u003Cp>Yes. Turn on the Weekly Email Digest in the Email Digest tab of \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fanalytics\">Analytics\u003C\u002Fa> and every Monday morning you get one email with your last 7 days: views, top pages, top searches on your site, and form messages. It is off until you turn it on, we skip weeks with no activity, and you can turn it off in the same place.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1248,"question":1249,"answerHtml":1250},"is-there-an-api","Is there an API for my catalog?","\u003Cp>Yes. The Data API gives you the same indexed catalog as token-gated JSON, so you can build with your episodes and transcripts anywhere: another site, an app, or an internal tool. It is account-scoped and uses your own key. Contact us at \u003Ca href=\"mailto:hello@podspun.com\">hello@podspun.com\u003C\u002Fa> to get set up.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1252,"question":1253,"answerHtml":1254,"guideHtml":1255},"ask-insights-about-your-account","Can I ask AI questions about my account?","\u003Cp>Yes. The AI Chatbot is available on free accounts, including before you import content or publish a website. Analytics and clip or thumbnail generation become available once your site is turned on. Open the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fanalytics?tab=ask\">AI Chatbot\u003C\u002Fa> tab in Analytics & Insights and type a question the way you would ask a person: how your websites did last month, what visitors search for that you have not covered, which episodes get the most views, how your email campaigns are doing, or how many members joined. It looks up your account’s own numbers (visitors, searches and questions on your sites, your shows and posts and their topics, your social numbers, email campaigns, contacts, and members) and answers from them. It never guesses a figure it did not look up.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Ask for content ideas and each one comes with the evidence behind it, such as a search visitors typed or a topic you have not covered since a date. The AI Chatbot only reads: it does not change settings, send email, or edit a website. Chats are saved in the list on the left, per person. Double-click a chat’s title to rename it, and use the × to delete it. The charts and tables are on \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fanalytics\">Analytics\u003C\u002Fa>.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-ai-chatbot\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">AI tools · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Ask your account a good question.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>Find answers and content ideas using your own traffic, searches, episodes and campaign data.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"AI Chatbot sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#ai-chatbot-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#ai-chatbot-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#ai-chatbot-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#ai-chatbot-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"ai-chatbot-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>AI Chatbot reads your account's information; it does not edit your website or send campaigns. Access depends on the features enabled for your account. Choose a question with a clear period, website or channel so the answer has a useful scope.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"ai-chatbot-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Open the account chat\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fai-chatbot-1.jpg\" alt=\"AI Chatbot: Open the account chat\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Open the account chat\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Under Creator Tools, open AI Chatbot. Start a question about your own website traffic, audience searches, shows, campaigns or members.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Use AI Chatbot for account analysis. Use Site Editor Chat to draft articles and the Visual AI Editor to change a page; these are separate tasks.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>If the tool is unavailable, check the feature availability shown for your account rather than expecting a guide to enable it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Ask a scoped question\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fai-chatbot-2.jpg\" alt=\"AI Chatbot: Ask a scoped question\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Ask a scoped question\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Name the period and the result you want. For example: ‘What did visitors search for on my website in the last 30 days that I have not covered?’\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>For a comparison, name both periods. For an episode question, name the show or episode rather than leaving the catalog ambiguous.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Ask one question first. A follow-up can narrow the audience, source or period without starting a vague new task.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Review evidence and follow up\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fai-chatbot-3.jpg\" alt=\"AI Chatbot: Review evidence and follow up\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Review evidence and follow up\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Read the answer and the data behind it. Ask which searches or topics support a content idea, or open Analytics to compare the period and figures.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A missing measurement is not a zero. Check whether the relevant website, channel or campaign has data for the selected period.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Chats are saved per person. Double-click a chat title to rename it so you can return to the same research; deleting a chat is a separate action.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Ask which visitor searches were unanswered last month, then ask for three article ideas backed by those searches. Review the evidence and take one topic to Site Editor Chat when you are ready to draft it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"ai-chatbot-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>The question names the correct period and content scope.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>The answer has supporting account data.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Missing data is understood before making comparisons.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>The useful research is saved under a recognizable chat name.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"ai-chatbot-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>An answer is too broad\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Specify one website, channel, question or period and ask for the evidence behind the result.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>I want it to edit a page\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Open Site Editor Chat or Visual AI Editor for editing; the account AI Chatbot is a reading and analysis tool.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":1257,"question":1258,"answerHtml":1259},"episodes-could-not-be-transcribed","What does \"could not be transcribed\" mean in Podspun Dataweaver?","\u003Cp>In \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fchannels\">Podspun Dataweaver\u003C\u002Fa>, the Status column of a show says, for example, "10 episodes could not be transcribed" when Podspun tried to download and transcribe those episodes and gave up. It appears before every other status, including Awaiting payment. Search, topics and quizzes cannot use those episodes because they have no transcript. Most often the show's podcast host refused the download. Write to us through \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Ffeedback\">Contact \u002F Feedback\u003C\u002Fa> with the show's name and we will look at it.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1261,"question":1262,"answerHtml":1263},"what-is-a-live-portrait","What is a Live Portrait?","\u003Cp>A page on your Podspun website that reads every episode, post, and article you have published and shows what is inside them: the topics that come up most, the newest topic, quotes and moments from inside the episodes, and the periods your archive falls into. Each finding links to its source, and the page is rebuilt each day.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1265,"question":1266,"answerHtml":1267},"which-plans-include-live-portrait","Which plans include Live Portrait?","\u003Cp>Podspun Full ($49 a month, or $529.20 a year) and Enterprise. Podspun Light imports and indexes your channels but has no website, so it has no page for a Live Portrait to live on.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1269,"question":1270,"answerHtml":1271},"is-the-page-written-by-ai","Is the page written by AI?","\u003Cp>The lines on the page are built from counts and links, not prose written about you: which topics appear, how often, in which episodes or posts, and when. The topics, quotes, and moments themselves are the insights Podspun discovers in your transcripts and captions.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1273,"question":1274,"answerHtml":1275},"does-it-work-for-tiktok-and-instagram","Does it work for TikTok and Instagram?","\u003Cp>Yes. Live Portrait reads posts the same way it reads episodes: video posts through their transcript, photo posts through their caption. New sites built from a TikTok or Instagram account include a Live Portrait from the start.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1277,"question":1278,"answerHtml":1279},"how-do-i-add-live-portrait-to-my-site","How do I add Live Portrait to my site?","\u003Cp>New sites built from TikTok or Instagram include it. On any other site, open the website editor and choose Live Portrait in the Podspun Dataweaver section. Settings has a Live Portrait tab where you can write your own introduction and switch individual sections on or off.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1281,"question":1282,"answerHtml":1283},"how-often-does-it-update","How often does it update?","\u003Cp>Each day. New episodes and posts sync in automatically, and the page rebuilds from the whole archive, so the opening piece, the newest topic, and the counts change on their own.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1285,"question":1286,"answerHtml":1287},"does-it-read-podcasts-or-only-social-posts","Does it read podcasts, or only social posts?","\u003Cp>Both. On a podcast site it reads episodes and their transcripts. On a site with several channels it reads podcast episodes, YouTube videos, TikTok and Instagram posts, and published news together.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1289,"question":1290,"answerHtml":1291},"what-do-podspun-s-podcast-analytics-track","What do Podspun's podcast analytics track?","\u003Cp>Visits, episode plays, clicks, and the questions people type into your site's AI search, all in one dashboard inside your account.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1293,"question":1294,"answerHtml":1295},"do-i-need-to-install-a-tracking-tag","Do I need to install a tracking tag?","\u003Cp>No. Every Podspun site reports on its own, so there is nothing to paste in and nothing to configure.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1297,"question":1298,"answerHtml":1299},"what-can-i-learn-from-the-ai-search-questions","What can I learn from the AI search questions?","\u003Cp>They are the words your audience uses to ask for things. Reading them tells you what episodes, topics, or answers people actually came looking for.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1301,"question":1302,"answerHtml":1303},"is-this-the-same-as-my-podcast-host-s-download-numbers","Is this the same as my podcast host's download numbers?","\u003Cp>No. Those count audio downloads. Podspun's insights are about your website: who reads, searches, and plays on the site you own, plus what your email and clips drive.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1305,"question":1306,"answerHtml":1307},"how-much-do-insights-cost","How much do insights cost?","\u003Cp>They are included with the Dataweaver. Yearly billing is $313.20 with 1,600 catalog items included. Monthly billing is $29 with 800 items included. There is no separate analytics fee.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1309,"question":1310,"answerHtml":1311},"can-i-see-if-a-newsletter-or-clip-worked","Can I see if a newsletter or clip worked?","\u003Cp>Yes. Because email and clips run inside Podspun next to the site, you can see traffic move when you send a newsletter or post a clip.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1313,"question":1314,"answerHtml":1315},"what-is-a-podcast-clip-maker","What is a podcast clip maker?","\u003Cp>It is a tool that turns a moment from your episode into a short, shareable clip with captions and your branding. Podspun makes video clips, audiograms, and audio cuts in about two clicks.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1317,"question":1318,"answerHtml":1319},"can-it-make-vertical-video-clips-for-social","Can it make vertical video clips for social?","\u003Cp>Yes. Export a moment as a vertical video clip for Instagram, TikTok, or YouTube Shorts, as an audiogram, or as a plain audio cut.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1321,"question":1322,"answerHtml":1323},"does-it-add-captions-automatically","Does it add captions automatically?","\u003Cp>Yes. Captions are generated from the transcript and burned into the clip, so it reads on mute without any extra work.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1325,"question":1326,"answerHtml":1327},"how-does-podspun-find-good-moments","How does Podspun find good moments?","\u003Cp>It reads the full transcript and suggests the lines most worth clipping, so you start from a shortlist instead of scrubbing the whole episode.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1329,"question":1330,"answerHtml":1331},"how-much-do-clips-cost","How much do clips cost?","\u003Cp>Every account gets 3 clips free each month. Past that, clips come in packs of 25 for $20, added to your monthly bill, with no per-clip charge.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1333,"question":1334,"answerHtml":1335},"do-i-need-a-video-editor","Do I need a video editor?","\u003Cp>No. There is no timeline and no second subscription. You pick a moment, pick a format, and the captioned, branded clip is ready to download.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1337,"question":1338,"answerHtml":1339},"what-is-a-podcast-thumbnail-maker","What is a podcast thumbnail maker?","\u003Cp>It is a tool that creates episode thumbnails and title ideas. Podspun builds them in your channel's own brand template, using real frames from the episode, so each one looks like it belongs to your show.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1341,"question":1342,"answerHtml":1343},"does-it-make-youtube-thumbnails","Does it make YouTube thumbnails?","\u003Cp>Yes. It exports a 1280 by 720 PNG, the size YouTube expects, using a key-moment frame from your episode and your brand template.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1345,"question":1346,"answerHtml":1347},"how-does-it-match-my-channel-s-style","How does it match my channel's style?","\u003Cp>It learns your palette, fonts, and logo placement from thumbnails you have already made, then keeps new ones in that template.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1349,"question":1350,"answerHtml":1351},"are-the-title-suggestions-any-good","Are the title suggestions any good?","\u003Cp>The suggested titles are shaped by what already earned views on your channel, so they are tuned to your audience rather than generic.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":507,"question":508,"answerHtml":1353},"\u003Cp>Suggested titles and frame previews are free. Generating an image from a prompt or pulling an exact key-moment frame counts toward 5 free a month, then comes in packs of 10 for $5 on your monthly bill.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1355,"question":1356,"answerHtml":1357},"can-i-use-it-on-episodes-i-have-not-published-yet","Can I use it on episodes I have not published yet?","\u003Cp>Yes. Type a future episode idea and Podspun will suggest a title and a thumbnail for it, so you can plan the look before you record.\u003C\u002Fp>",[1359,1372,1382,1394,1397,1408,1418,1428],{"slug":1360,"title":1361,"entries":1362},"clips","Clips",[1363,1364,1365,1366,1367,1368,1369,1370,1371],{"slug":1159,"question":1160,"answerHtml":1161},{"slug":1163,"question":1164,"answerHtml":1165},{"slug":1167,"question":1168,"answerHtml":1169},{"slug":1171,"question":1172,"answerHtml":1173,"guideHtml":1174},{"slug":1176,"question":1177,"answerHtml":1178},{"slug":1180,"question":1181,"answerHtml":1182,"guideHtml":1183},{"slug":1185,"question":1186,"answerHtml":1187},{"slug":1189,"question":1190,"answerHtml":1191,"guideHtml":1192},{"slug":1194,"question":1195,"answerHtml":1196,"guideHtml":1197},{"slug":1373,"title":1374,"entries":1375},"search-and-assistant","Search and the AI assistant",[1376,1377,1378,1379,1380,1381],{"slug":1199,"question":1200,"answerHtml":1201},{"slug":1203,"question":1204,"answerHtml":1205,"guideHtml":1206},{"slug":1208,"question":1209,"answerHtml":1210},{"slug":1212,"question":1213,"answerHtml":1214},{"slug":1216,"question":1217,"answerHtml":1218},{"slug":1220,"question":1221,"answerHtml":1222},{"slug":1383,"title":1384,"entries":1385},"insights-and-data","Insights and data",[1386,1387,1388,1389,1390,1391,1392,1393],{"slug":1224,"question":1225,"answerHtml":1226},{"slug":1228,"question":1229,"answerHtml":1230},{"slug":1232,"question":1233,"answerHtml":1234},{"slug":1236,"question":1237,"answerHtml":1238},{"slug":1240,"question":1241,"answerHtml":1242},{"slug":1244,"question":1245,"answerHtml":1246},{"slug":1248,"question":1249,"answerHtml":1250},{"slug":1252,"question":1253,"answerHtml":1254,"guideHtml":1255},{"slug":750,"title":751,"entries":1395},[1396],{"slug":1257,"question":1258,"answerHtml":1259},{"slug":1398,"title":1399,"entries":1400},"live-portrait","Live Portrait questions",[1401,1402,1403,1404,1405,1406,1407],{"slug":1261,"question":1262,"answerHtml":1263},{"slug":1265,"question":1266,"answerHtml":1267},{"slug":1269,"question":1270,"answerHtml":1271},{"slug":1273,"question":1274,"answerHtml":1275},{"slug":1277,"question":1278,"answerHtml":1279},{"slug":1281,"question":1282,"answerHtml":1283},{"slug":1285,"question":1286,"answerHtml":1287},{"slug":1409,"title":1410,"entries":1411},"podcast-analytics","Podcast analytics questions",[1412,1413,1414,1415,1416,1417],{"slug":1289,"question":1290,"answerHtml":1291},{"slug":1293,"question":1294,"answerHtml":1295},{"slug":1297,"question":1298,"answerHtml":1299},{"slug":1301,"question":1302,"answerHtml":1303},{"slug":1305,"question":1306,"answerHtml":1307},{"slug":1309,"question":1310,"answerHtml":1311},{"slug":1419,"title":1420,"entries":1421},"podcast-clip-maker","Podcast clip questions",[1422,1423,1424,1425,1426,1427],{"slug":1313,"question":1314,"answerHtml":1315},{"slug":1317,"question":1318,"answerHtml":1319},{"slug":1321,"question":1322,"answerHtml":1323},{"slug":1325,"question":1326,"answerHtml":1327},{"slug":1329,"question":1330,"answerHtml":1331},{"slug":1333,"question":1334,"answerHtml":1335},{"slug":1429,"title":1430,"entries":1431},"podcast-thumbnail-maker","Podcast thumbnail questions",[1432,1433,1434,1435,1436,1437],{"slug":1337,"question":1338,"answerHtml":1339},{"slug":1341,"question":1342,"answerHtml":1343},{"slug":1345,"question":1346,"answerHtml":1347},{"slug":1349,"question":1350,"answerHtml":1351},{"slug":507,"question":508,"answerHtml":1353},{"slug":1355,"question":1356,"answerHtml":1357},{"slug":1439,"title":1440,"lead":1441,"entries":1442,"groups":1789},"using-podspun","Using Podspun","Step-by-step answers for common tasks in your Podspun account: editing your site, making clips, sending newsletters, choosing how videos play, custom domains, and billing.",[1443,1448,1452,1457,1462,1466,1471,1475,1479,1484,1488,1492,1497,1502,1506,1510,1514,1518,1522,1527,1531,1535,1539,1544,1548,1552,1556,1560,1564,1568,1572,1576,1580,1584,1588,1592,1597,1601,1606,1610,1614,1618,1623,1627,1631,1635,1639,1643,1647,1651,1655,1659,1663,1667,1671,1675,1679,1683,1687,1692,1696,1700,1704,1708,1712,1716,1720,1725,1729,1733,1738,1743,1748,1752,1756,1760,1764,1768,1772,1777,1781,1785],{"slug":1444,"question":1445,"answerHtml":1446,"guideHtml":1447},"build-or-edit-my-website","How do I build or edit my website?","\u003Cp>Go to \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">Website Builder\u003C\u002Fa>. Click Add Site to create one, or Open Builder on a site to edit it. A brand-new page offers three ways to start: pick a ready-made page layout, build it block by block, or ask the AI assistant. Changes save as a draft until you Publish.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The purple Visual Edit button opens the page itself for editing: click text to type, swap images in place, and drag blocks to arrange. Every block, including blocks inside containers, has side handles for changing its width. Full Bleed in Config overrides that width. Free placement adds finer columns and lets you drag blocks around the page. Inside a container, the green insertion line shows where a block will land. Press Escape during a drag or resize to cancel it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>You can also reorder blocks with the keyboard: focus a drag handle in the editing panel, press Space to pick up the block, use the arrow keys to move it, and press Space to drop it. Escape cancels the move. Use Undo or Redo to revisit a change.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-site-design\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">Website Builder · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Make the whole site feel like you.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>Choose your theme, type, images and navigation, then review your pages before publishing.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"Your website, your style sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#site-design-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#site-design-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#site-design-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#site-design-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"site-design-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Open the website you intend to change. Decide on its main purpose, the pages visitors need and a small set of brand images. A theme change affects the whole website; a page edit changes that page. Review both before publishing.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"site-design-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Choose the site and its design\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fsite-design-1.jpg\" alt=\"Your website, your style: Choose the site and its design\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Choose the site and its design\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>In Website Builder, open your website, then Site Settings → Theme. Choose a starting palette and review its type, colors, header and footer together.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Use the shared site design for a consistent look across pages. Check that your logo remains readable against both header and footer backgrounds.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Prepare a wide image for a landscape space and a portrait image for a tall space. Set a focal point when a responsive crop would otherwise cut off the important subject.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Build the pages you need\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fvisual-edit-1.jpg\" alt=\"Your website, your style: Build the pages you need\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Build the pages you need\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open a page, select Visual Edit and work with its blocks. Edit the selected block's content and layout; use a ready-made layout when you want a complete starting page.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Start with the information a visitor needs: what you do, your latest work, and how to contact you. Keep the main action easy to find.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Use Assets for your pictures and check alternative text. Preview image fitting at narrow widths instead of assuming a desktop crop will work everywhere.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Organize your navigation\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fsite-design-3.jpg\" alt=\"Your website, your style: Organize your navigation\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Organize your navigation\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Navigation → Menus and review the main navigation, footer and social links. Give each link a clear label and check its destination.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A page that exists does not automatically belong in every menu. Put the important destinations in the main menu and supporting links in the footer.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Keep social links in the Social menu so features that use your website links can follow the same list.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 4\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Review and publish\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fpages-publish.jpg\" alt=\"Your website, your style: Review and publish\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Review and publish\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Preview the draft at desktop and mobile widths. Test navigation, buttons, images and forms. Publish the reviewed change, then open the public address.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Save and Publish serve different purposes: review the draft before replacing the public version. A draft preview can be shared for review.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>For an unwanted published change, use the page's history to restore an earlier version. Check the restored page before publishing it again.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Give a podcast site one type style, a clear Episodes link and a Contact page. Add your own show artwork, review the narrow-width header, then publish the draft after checking every menu destination.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"site-design-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>Theme, logo and type work together.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Menus point to the correct pages.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Desktop and mobile previews are usable.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>The public version matches the reviewed draft.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"site-design-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>An image is cropped badly\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Adjust its fitting and focal point, or use an image with the right proportions for that space.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>The page is missing from the menu\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Add its destination in Menus; creating a page and linking it are separate steps.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":1449,"question":1450,"answerHtml":1451},"welcome-feature-guides","How do the guides on Welcome work?","\u003Cp>After your initial website setup, \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Welcome\u003C\u002Fa> shows \u003Cstrong>Meet your next favorite feature.\u003C\u002Fstrong> Each guide introduces a feature with a framed illustration. Its walkthrough shows a different screenshot for each step. Select \u003Cstrong>Show me how\u003C\u002Fstrong>, then \u003Cstrong>Next step\u003C\u002Fstrong> to follow it. Previous guide and Next guide switch features. \u003Cstrong>Browse guides\u003C\u002Fstrong> opens a gallery of illustrated covers with titles underneath. Select a cover to open that guide.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A guide relevant to your account opens at random on each visit. It stays put while you read; it does not advance automatically. The opening guide is relevant to the account type. Browse guides also offers All features and filters for Website Builder, AI tools, Contacts & Email, Data & Integrations, Clips & Media, Memberships & Income, Art & Film, and Account & Analytics. Each area has one consistent cover color and a written label; the colors do not indicate access or plan availability. The separate setup \u003Cstrong>Next step\u003C\u002Fstrong> link comes from your unfinished Checklist tasks and appears only when there is a required task you can act on. Open \u003Cstrong>Activity\u003C\u002Fstrong> for account totals, traffic and conversion charts, email audience growth, a comparison across your websites, billing, and the Switchboard.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The public homepage tips and Cloud guides use the same feature content, with a different presentation on each page. Full guide opens a detailed public walkthrough with the same step screenshots, examples, review checks and troubleshooting.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1453,"question":1454,"answerHtml":1455,"guideHtml":1456},"site-editor-chat","Can I ask the site to plan and write articles for me?","\u003Cp>Yes. Open \u003Cstrong>AI Site Editor\u003C\u002Fstrong> in your website editor's sidebar and choose \u003Cstrong>Site Editor Chat\u003C\u002Fstrong>. Type what you want the way you would say it to a person, for example \"Give me article ideas for SEO from my Italy posts\", and ask follow-up questions in the same chat.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>It works from your own content. It reads your Instagram and TikTok posts and your podcast episodes, the places your posts are about, the articles already on your site, what visitors searched for, and what they asked your site's AI box. Article ideas show how many of your posts back each one and whether an article about it exists yet. Select \u003Cstrong>Show article ideas from visitor questions\u003C\u002Fstrong> for ideas built from what visitors asked in the last 30 days, with the questions listed under each idea. Select \u003Cstrong>Write This Article\u003C\u002Fstrong> on an idea and it writes a full article in your voice from those posts, with your photos placed through it, your related posts, common questions, and a search title and description.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>It looks at every photo in your carousels, uses each picture only once (a photo you posted twice counts once), and places each one by what it actually shows, which also becomes its alt text. Ask it to redo an article, or to use more of your posts, and it writes the whole article again into a draft at the same address.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>It can also change an article you already have (\"shorten the intro of the Sedona article\", \"add a packing list\"). To add your own photos, select the paperclip, drop them onto the chat, or paste them, then say where they go. They are saved to your Assets and described for their alt text automatically.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Everything it writes is a draft. Each article it makes or changes shows a card with \u003Cstrong>Preview and Edit\u003C\u002Fstrong>, which opens the article in the editor, and \u003Cstrong>Publish\u003C\u002Fstrong>. Once an article is live, the card links to it on your site. Your chats are saved on the left, so you can come back to one later. Double-click a chat's name to rename it.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-pages\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">AI tools · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Make a page from what you publish.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>It reads your episodes and posts, suggests pages you have not written yet, and drafts each one for you.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"AI articles sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#pages-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#pages-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#pages-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#pages-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"pages-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Connect the episodes or posts you want the article to use. Choose a topic with useful material in your archive and check whether your site already has an article about it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"pages-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Choose your website and source material\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fpages-1.jpg\" alt=\"AI articles: Choose your website and source material\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Choose your website and source material\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>In Website Builder, open the correct site, then AI Site Editor → Site Editor Chat. Name the episode, posts or subject you want to use. Ask for a small set of article ideas rather than a general article about anything.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Open your website editor, then AI Site Editor and Site Editor Chat. Ask for ideas from a particular subject, place or part of your archive.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The chat reads your connected content, existing articles and visitor questions. Use a follow-up to narrow the topic instead of asking for every possible article at once.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Choose an idea with useful sources\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fpages-2.jpg\" alt=\"AI articles: Choose an idea with useful sources\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Choose an idea with useful sources\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Read the idea cards and their supporting content. Check whether the subject already has an article. Choose Write This Article for the idea you want; use a follow-up to narrow an idea before asking for a draft.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Review each idea’s supporting posts and whether an article about it already exists. Choose an idea with enough material to answer a useful reader question, then select Write This Article.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The draft can include your photos, related posts, common questions and search metadata. The assistant selects images from your material, so check that each picture belongs beside the text it accompanies.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Edit the article and its presentation\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fpages-3.jpg\" alt=\"AI articles: Edit the article and its presentation\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Edit the article and its presentation\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Preview and Edit. Compare facts with the original material. Correct the title, introduction, images, alt text and related links. Use the visual editor for individual blocks; a draft is still private at this point.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Select Preview and Edit on the article card. Read the whole article, compare its claims with the original posts or episodes, and check its images and related links.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Edit anything that needs attention. Review the title and description as well as the page itself, then publish when you are happy with it. If you ask the chat to redo an existing article, review the new draft at that article’s address before publishing.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 4\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Publish the reviewed draft\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fpages-publish.jpg\" alt=\"AI articles: Publish the reviewed draft\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Publish the reviewed draft\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Review the page at desktop and narrow widths, including search title and description. When it is ready, choose Publish, then open the public address. Redoing an existing article creates a draft at its existing address; check it before replacing the live version.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Give the article one clear purpose. A useful title names what the reader will learn; the description should describe the page that actually exists, not promise information the source never covered.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Saved chats remain in the left-hand list. Double-click a chat name to rename it so you can return to the same project. Photos added through the paperclip, drop or paste are stored in Assets; review their placement and alt text.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Ask ‘Give me article ideas from my Italy posts about travelling without a car.’ Choose an idea with relevant source posts, draft it and check that every transport recommendation comes from material you actually published.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"pages-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>The article answers one clear reader question.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>The supporting content backs its factual claims.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Photos, alt text and related links are relevant.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>The draft and search metadata have been reviewed.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"pages-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>Ideas feel generic\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Name a subject, place or group of posts and ask for ideas from that material.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>The wrong photos appear\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Open Preview and Edit to replace them, or add photos to the chat with the paperclip and say where they belong.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-visitor-questions\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">AI tools · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Write what visitors ask about.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>Site Editor Chat can suggest articles from questions visitors asked in the last 30 days.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"Articles from visitor questions sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#visitor-questions-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#visitor-questions-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#visitor-questions-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#visitor-questions-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"visitor-questions-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Use a website with recorded visitor questions. The suggestions use questions from the last 30 days, so a new site may not yet have enough activity to suggest useful articles.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"visitor-questions-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Open the site’s article-ideas chat\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fvisitor-questions-1.jpg\" alt=\"Articles from visitor questions: Open the site’s article-ideas chat\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Open the site’s article-ideas chat\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open the correct website’s AI Site Editor → Site Editor Chat. This feature uses visitor questions from that website, so check the site name before requesting ideas.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Open the website’s AI Site Editor and Site Editor Chat. Make sure you are working on the site whose visitor questions you want to use.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Think about the questions your archive can already answer. A new article should make a useful answer easier to find, rather than repeat a page you already have.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Request ideas from visitor questions\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fvisitor-questions-2.jpg\" alt=\"Articles from visitor questions: Request ideas from visitor questions\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Request ideas from visitor questions\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Choose Show article ideas from visitor questions. Read the questions beneath each idea and check existing articles. The suggestions use the last 30 days; a new or quiet site may have none. Choose a question your archive can actually answer.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Select Show article ideas from visitor questions. Read the questions listed beneath each idea and compare them with your existing articles.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Choose an idea whose questions your connected content can answer. If a question needs information you have never published, add that information yourself rather than accepting an unsupported answer.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Draft an answer, then publish when ready\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fvisitor-questions-3.jpg\" alt=\"Articles from visitor questions: Draft an answer, then publish when ready\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Draft an answer, then publish when ready\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Choose Write This Article, then Preview and Edit. Check that the article answers the original questions with supported facts. Correct its title, images and links, and review mobile layout. Publish the reviewed article and try the original question against the finished site.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Choose Write This Article, then open Preview and Edit. Check that the draft answers the questions behind the idea and links to the right source material.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Review the title, images and related links. Publish the article when it is ready, then try the original visitor question yourself and check the answer’s sources.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>If visitors repeatedly ask what to pack for a trip you covered, make a packing article from those posts. Use the questions to choose the subject and your actual posts to supply the answer.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"visitor-questions-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>The questions are from the intended website.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>The article adds something useful to the existing site.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Each recommendation has a source or your own reviewed addition.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"visitor-questions-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>There are no question-based ideas\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>A new or quiet site may have no recent questions. Ask for ideas from your episodes or posts instead.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>The article repeats an existing page\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Open the existing page and improve it, or narrow the new idea to a question it does not already answer.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":1458,"question":1459,"answerHtml":1460,"guideHtml":1461},"visual-ai-editor","What is the Visual AI Editor?","\u003Cp>A chat panel inside the page editor that makes changes when you ask in plain words: shorten an intro, add a questions and answers section, give a section a dark background. Open a page in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">Website Builder\u003C\u002Fa>, click the purple Visual Edit button, and pick the Visual AI Editor tab.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>It edits a draft and every change is checked against your site's design, so it can only make the kinds of edits you could make yourself. Nothing goes live until you press Publish.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-visual-edit\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">AI tools · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Change a page in plain words.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>Ask for a shorter introduction, a new section or a different background while editing a draft.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"Visual AI Editor sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#visual-edit-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#visual-edit-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#visual-edit-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#visual-edit-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"visual-edit-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Choose one page and one change you want to make. You need access to edit that website. Start with a small request so you can compare the result with the page you already have. This walkthrough changes a draft; publishing is a separate decision.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"visual-edit-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Open the page in Visual Edit\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fvisual-edit-1.jpg\" alt=\"Visual AI Editor: Open the page in Visual Edit\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Open the page in Visual Edit\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Website Builder → Open Builder, then the page you want to change. Choose the purple Visual Edit button and the Visual AI Editor tab. Confirm the page title before typing a request.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Open Website Builder and choose Open Builder for the correct site. Find the page you want to change, open it, then select the purple Visual Edit button. Choose the Visual AI Editor tab in the editing panel.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Look at the page before writing your request. Decide which section you mean and what should happen to it. A page title or a few words from the section make a clearer reference than ‘change that bit’.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Ask for one specific change\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fvisual-edit-2.jpg\" alt=\"Visual AI Editor: Ask for one specific change\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Ask for one specific change\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Name the section and describe the result you want. For example: “Shorten the introduction to two sentences and keep the episode links.” Send the request, wait for the response and inspect the changed section before asking for more.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Describe a single change in the chat. Say what to change, where it belongs and what to keep. For a text edit, specify the length and tone. For a design edit, name the section and the treatment you want.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Try ‘Shorten the introduction to two sentences and keep the episode links.’ Or ‘Add a questions and answers section below the introduction, using the information already on this page.’ The editor works with the website’s available blocks and design settings. Wait for the response and inspect the draft before making the next request.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>If the result misses your intention, give a focused follow-up: ‘Keep the original heading, but use the shorter introduction.’ Use Undo to revisit a change you do not want. You can also edit text or images directly in the visual editor.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Compare and correct the draft\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fvisual-edit-undo.jpg\" alt=\"Visual AI Editor: Compare and correct the draft\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Compare and correct the draft\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Check the changed text, facts, images and links against the original. Use Undo for a result you do not want, or edit the blocks directly. Give a focused follow-up if only part of the change needs correcting.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The AI editor uses the website’s existing blocks and supported design settings. A request for a completely different feature may require a different block or a separate product setting.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Check the rest of the page as well as the edited section: shortening an introduction can reveal repetition in the next section, and changing a background can affect the readability of nearby links.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 4\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Save a draft or publish\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fvisual-edit-3.jpg\" alt=\"Visual AI Editor: Save a draft or publish\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Save a draft or publish\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Save Draft keeps your reviewed work for later. Publish updates the public page. Check the narrow layout before publishing, then open the public address to confirm the change. A saved draft does not change the live website.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Read the changed section in context. Check that facts, names and links still match your source material. Look at the whole page so a good individual edit does not leave an awkward gap or repeat another section.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Review the page at a narrow width as well as on desktop. Check images, headings and any buttons or forms affected by the edit. When the draft is ready, press Publish. Then open the public page and confirm that the change appears there.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>On an episode landing page, ask: ‘Shorten the introduction to two sentences. Keep the guest name and the link to the episode. Leave the other sections as they are.’ Review that change first, then ask for a questions and answers section below it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"visual-edit-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>The correct page and section changed.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Facts and links still match the source.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>The page reads clearly on desktop and mobile.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>You have reviewed the draft before pressing Publish.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"visual-edit-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>The change is too broad\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Undo it, then name the section and ask for one specific change. Include what should stay.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>You cannot find Visual AI Editor\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Open the page itself, select Visual Edit and look for the Visual AI Editor tab. Confirm you have editing access to that website.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>The public page still looks the same\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>A draft does not change the public page. Review it and use Publish, then open the public address again.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":1463,"question":1464,"answerHtml":1465},"build-my-site-with-ai","Can AI build my whole site?","\u003Cp>Yes. Open AI Site Editor, Page Makers in your site's CMS sidebar (from \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">Website Builder\u003C\u002Fa>). Page Maker reads the shows on your site and drafts a home page, an about page, and more out of real blocks, including live episode blocks that stay current on their own. Everything arrives as drafts for you to review, edit, and publish, and one click removes the whole batch if you don't like it. Picking your colors and fonts is a separate switch, off unless you turn it on, because that is the one thing that changes your live look right away.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The same screen writes news articles from your episodes' transcripts, and points you to the Visual AI Editor for editing an existing page in plain words.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1467,"question":1468,"answerHtml":1469,"guideHtml":1470},"create-a-page-with-ai","How do I make a page with AI?","\u003Cp>Open AI Site Editor, Page Makers in the website editor's sidebar. In the Page Maker tab, choose One Page and describe the page under What Do You Want?, like \"a page about the science the show covers most\". Choose Make the page to request its plan, the page title, its address, and the sections it will build, and nothing is created until you click Create this page. Then it drafts the page out of real blocks and drops you on a live preview of the finished page.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Under Advanced, use Base It On an Episode to choose one of your episodes, so it writes only from what was actually said and links readers to the exact moments, and you can make it a news article instead of a regular page. The same box can make a whole starter site if you switch it to A Whole Site.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Site Assistant, the next item under AI Site Editor, works on the site you already have: Tighten Vertical Gaps closes big empty bands between sections, Grammar and Spelling suggests fixes for real mistakes in your text, and SEO Review suggests stronger search titles and descriptions. Each one scans first and shows you every change; nothing is applied until you accept it, one by one or all at once, and every accepted change saves a revision you can roll back.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Whatever the Page Maker makes is a private draft. You review the real output on the preview and it only goes public when you press Publish.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-page-maker\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">AI tools · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Describe it. Review the plan.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>Page Maker plans a page and its sections before building it from real website blocks.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"Page Maker sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#page-maker-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#page-maker-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#page-maker-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#page-maker-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"page-maker-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Decide what the page is for and which sections it needs. To base the page on an episode, use Advanced → Base It On an Episode so the draft has a specific source.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"page-maker-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Describe the page you need\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fpage-maker-1.jpg\" alt=\"Page Maker: Describe the page you need\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Describe the page you need\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open AI Site Editor → Page Makers → Page Maker and choose One Page. Under What Do You Want?, explain the page’s audience, purpose and sections. Include the actual information it should use; vague requests produce vague plans.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Open AI Site Editor in the website editor’s sidebar, then Page Makers and the Page Maker tab, then One Page. Describe one page, its audience and the information it should contain.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Use Advanced to base the page on an episode or choose News article under Page Type. A Whole Site is a separate choice for making a starter site.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Choose what the plan should use\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fpage-maker-options.jpg\" alt=\"Page Maker: Choose what the plan should use\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Choose what the plan should use\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Advanced. Use Base It On an Episode to search for the intended episode and Page Type to choose Regular page or News article. A Whole Site is a separate tab for a starter site. Choose Make the page to request the plan.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>An episode source makes the draft use what was actually said, including links to its moments. Page Type changes whether the result is a regular page or News article; it does not select an existing news article as the source. Choose A Whole Site only when you want the separate starter-site workflow.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Review the title, address and sections\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fpage-maker-2.jpg\" alt=\"Page Maker: Review the title, address and sections\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Review the title, address and sections\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Read the proposed title, page address and each section. Check the order and whether the plan asks for information you have not provided. Refine the request before accepting; a proposal is not a finished page.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Read the proposed title, address and sections before accepting. Check that the plan covers the page’s purpose and does not promise information you have not supplied.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Refine the request if the plan is wrong. Nothing is created until you choose Create this page, so this is the time to correct the structure.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 4\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Create and edit the private draft\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fpage-maker-3.jpg\" alt=\"Page Maker: Create and edit the private draft\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Create and edit the private draft\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Choose Create this page. Open the resulting draft and edit its real website blocks. Check source links, images, forms, search metadata and mobile layout. Publish only after reviewing the finished page, then test the public address.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Choose Create this page and review the private draft in the preview. The page uses real website blocks, which you can open and edit in the builder.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Check section order, source links, imagery and mobile layout. Review the page address and search metadata, then publish when the actual output is ready.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Request ‘Make a page about the science covered in this episode, with an introduction, three topic sections and links to the relevant episode moments.’ Review those sections in the plan before creating the draft.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"page-maker-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>The plan and page address match the intended purpose.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>The finished blocks contain reviewed information.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>The draft works on mobile before publication.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"page-maker-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>The plan contains unwanted sections\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Revise the request before choosing Create this page.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>The output needs a small change\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Edit its blocks directly or open Visual AI Editor on the draft and describe the change.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-seo-review\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">AI tools · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Review your search titles.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>Site Assistant suggests search titles and descriptions for you to accept individually.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"SEO Review sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#seo-review-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#seo-review-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#seo-review-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#seo-review-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"seo-review-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Choose the website you want to review. Search titles and descriptions should describe the actual content on each page; they are not a place to add claims the page does not support.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"seo-review-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Open the website review\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fseo-review-1.jpg\" alt=\"SEO Review: Open the website review\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Open the website review\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open AI Site Editor and the website review tool. Run the review for the site you want to improve. Wait for the findings before choosing changes; a review is a list of proposed edits, not an automatic publication.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Open AI Site Editor and choose Site Assistant. Select SEO Review for the current website.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Have a clear idea of the main subject of each important page so you can judge suggestions against the page itself.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Read each proposed change\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fseo-review-2.jpg\" alt=\"SEO Review: Read each proposed change\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Read each proposed change\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Compare the suggested title, description or page change with the existing value and the actual page. Keep names, factual claims and the purpose of the page accurate. Skip a suggestion that makes the page less precise.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Run the review and read the proposed search titles and descriptions. Compare each suggestion with the corresponding page.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Prefer a specific, accurate description over a repeated slogan. Check names, topics and any claims. The assistant shows suggestions before applying them.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Accept selected changes and verify them\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fseo-review-3.jpg\" alt=\"SEO Review: Accept selected changes and verify them\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Accept selected changes and verify them\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Accept an individual suggestion, or use the apply-all option only after reviewing the whole set. Check the affected pages and public metadata afterward. If an accepted change is wrong, use the review’s revision rollback rather than stacking another broad change over it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Accept the changes you want individually, or accept the reviewed set. Every accepted change saves a revision that can be rolled back.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Open the affected pages and verify their metadata. A revised title or description does not guarantee a search ranking or force a search engine to display that exact text.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>For an interview page, prefer a title naming the guest and the interview’s subject. Use the description to explain what the conversation covers, rather than copy the same description across every episode.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"seo-review-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>Each suggestion describes its own page accurately.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Names and claims have been checked.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Only reviewed suggestions were accepted.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"seo-review-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>A suggestion is inaccurate\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Leave it unaccepted and edit the page’s metadata yourself.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>You prefer the previous version\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Use the saved revision to restore the accepted change.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":1472,"question":1473,"answerHtml":1474},"make-any-page-with-ai","Can AI make a page from my own description?","\u003Cp>Yes. Open AI Site Editor, Page Makers in your site's CMS sidebar and use Page Maker: describe what you want in plain words (a topic page, a questions and answers page, an article), optionally base it on one of your episodes so it writes from that transcript, and choose whether it lands as a regular page or a news article. It arrives as a draft built from real blocks, and one click removes it if you don't like it.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1476,"question":1477,"answerHtml":1478},"start-a-new-post","How do I start a new post?","\u003Cp>Select \u003Cstrong>+ New post\u003C\u002Fstrong>. The editor opens and asks how you want to start. \u003Cstrong>News Article\u003C\u002Fstrong> lays out the post for you: its title as the headline, a lead photo, and the story below. \u003Cstrong>Build Block by Block\u003C\u002Fstrong> starts empty and opens the block list. \u003Cstrong>Use Our AI Assistant For Help\u003C\u002Fstrong> opens the assistant so you can describe the post in plain words. Close the window to start from an empty post.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The byline fills itself in with your site's default author, or with your only author if the site has one. A post published without a date takes the day it goes live, so it appears at the top of your news list. Set a date in the post's Config tab to use a different one; a future date schedules it.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1480,"question":1481,"answerHtml":1482,"guideHtml":1483},"ready-made-page-layouts","What are page layouts?","\u003Cp>Ready-made pages: a set of blocks already arranged for a common kind of page. Pick one, then replace the placeholder text and images with your own. Each card in the picker is drawn in your site's own colors and fonts so you can see how it will look.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>On a page, the picker leads with the pages people add most: Basic text (one rich text area for plain written pages), About Landing (the story beside a photo, then a contact form), Contact Landing, Questions and answers, Team Landing, Photo story, and News article. The landing pages a site is built with once (Home, Channel, and News landings, Live Portrait, the social wall, and the artist and filmmaker pages) are under More layouts.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>On a post or a News article, the picker shows only article layouts, News article first: the post's title as the headline, a lead photo, and the story.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Find them on any empty page, where the editor asks how you want to start, or with the Add layout button in the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">page editor\u003C\u002Fa>.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-layouts\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">Website Builder · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Start with a page already laid out.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>Choose a photo story, an about page, a contact page or another layout in your own theme.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"Ready-made layouts sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#layouts-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#layouts-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#layouts-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#layouts-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"layouts-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Choose the kind of page you need: an about page, contact page, photo story or another available layout. Have your own text and images ready to replace the placeholders.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"layouts-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Find the layout picker\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Flayouts-1.jpg\" alt=\"Ready-made layouts: Find the layout picker\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Find the layout picker\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open the page in Website Builder and choose Add layout. Use the page’s purpose to choose a suitable structure: an introduction, a landing page or a more detailed page with several sections.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Open an empty page and choose a ready-made layout, or select Add layout in the page editor.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Pages and news articles offer different choices. Article editors show article layouts, while the page picker includes common pages and More layouts.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Choose the structure, then replace its content\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Flayouts-2.jpg\" alt=\"Ready-made layouts: Choose the structure, then replace its content\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Choose the structure, then replace its content\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Preview the available layouts and choose one. Use More Layouts for additional landing-page choices. Replace sample headings, text and images with your own; selecting a layout does not make its placeholder content ready to publish.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Review the layout cards in your site’s colors and fonts. Pick the structure that best fits your content, rather than the one with the most sections.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The layout is a starting arrangement of editable blocks. You can adjust it after adding it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Check the blocks and publish\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Flayouts-3.jpg\" alt=\"Ready-made layouts: Check the blocks and publish\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Check the blocks and publish\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Edit the inserted blocks, including button links and form destinations. Check section order and spacing with your actual text, then review at a narrow width. Save the draft or publish the reviewed page and test its public links.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Replace placeholder text, images and links throughout the page. Remove sections you do not need and review any form or contact details.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Check the whole page at desktop and mobile widths before publishing. A layout is only ready when its placeholder content has become your own.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Use About Landing for a short introduction beside a portrait and a contact form. Replace the introduction and image, then check where the form sends visitor enquiries.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"layouts-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>Every placeholder has been replaced or removed.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Buttons, links and form destinations are correct.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>The layout reads well with your actual content.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"layouts-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>You cannot find the layout you want\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Look under More layouts on a page. An article editor intentionally offers article layouts only.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>The layout has too much content\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Remove unnecessary blocks and keep the sections that serve the page’s purpose.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":1485,"question":1486,"answerHtml":1487},"scrape-a-page-from-another-site","Can I copy a page from my old website?","\u003Cp>Yes. Open AI Site Editor, Page Makers in the website editor's sidebar and pick the Scrape a Page tab. Paste the address of one page on any public website and it comes across as a draft page on your site: the words in their written order, the photographs where they sit (each one added to your Assets), and the page's search title and description.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The Notes field tells the assistant what to make from the page. It can rewrite the page's text (shorten the intro, drop the prices, write it in the first person), create article types, and turn the links the page holds into articles. For example: \"create a type called Press and make each article linked under Publications an external Press article\" reads the page and plans one draft article per linked publication. Instructions like that open as an import plan under \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fimports\">Imports\u003C\u002Fa>: you see exactly what will be made, untick anything, and run it. Leave the Notes empty to bring the page across exactly as written.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>It arrives as a draft, so nothing on your live site changes until you review and publish it. To move a whole site at once, with every page and blog post, use a full migration instead.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1489,"question":1490,"answerHtml":1491},"write-an-article-from-an-episode","Can AI write an article from one of my episodes?","\u003Cp>Yes, two ways. In Entries, News \u002F Blog, click Write from an episode, search your episodes, and pick one. Or open AI Site Editor, Page Makers in the CMS sidebar, describe any page you want in Page Maker, and attach an episode to base it on. Either way the AI writes from that episode's own transcript, grounded in what was actually said, with links that jump readers to the exact moments on the episode page. It arrives as a draft for you to read, edit, and publish.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1493,"question":1494,"answerHtml":1495,"guideHtml":1496},"make-an-image-with-ai","Can I make an image with AI?","\u003Cp>Yes. Anywhere you pick an image, open the asset browser and choose the Make with AI tab. Describe the image in plain words and click Make it. You see the result first, big, and nothing is saved yet: add it to your assets when you like it, or tweak the words and make a variation until it is right. There is also a Stock photos tab for searching free photos.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-ai-images\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">AI tools · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Make the image you need.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>Describe an image in the asset picker, preview it and make variations before saving it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"AI images sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#ai-images-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#ai-images-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#ai-images-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#ai-images-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"ai-images-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Choose where the image will be used. Know the shape and subject you need before generating it, and decide whether a real source photograph would serve the page better.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"ai-images-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Open Make with AI in the image picker\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fai-images-1.jpg\" alt=\"AI images: Open Make with AI in the image picker\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Open Make with AI in the image picker\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open an image field in the website editor and choose Make with AI. Start from the field where the image belongs so you can judge its shape and role before selecting it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Open an image picker for the page or asset you are editing, then choose Make with AI. This option is for images, not audio pickers.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Describe the subject, setting, composition and style. Include useful placement details, such as room for a heading or a subject positioned away from the edge.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Describe the subject and composition\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fai-images-2.jpg\" alt=\"AI images: Describe the subject and composition\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Describe the subject and composition\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Describe the subject, setting, style and framing. Mention any space needed around the subject. Choose Make it and wait for the preview; avoid asking for paragraphs of text inside the image.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Choose Make it and wait for the large preview. Inspect the complete image before accepting it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Look closely at hands, faces, letters and any details that should be accurate. Try a variation if the subject is useful but the composition does not fit.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Choose a result and place it on the page\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fai-images-3.jpg\" alt=\"AI images: Choose a result and place it on the page\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Choose a result and place it on the page\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Review the preview. Make a variation if the subject or composition needs work, then add the selected result to your assets and choose it in the image field. Review the actual page crop and write useful alt text before saving or publishing.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Save the image to your assets when you want to keep it, then select it for the page. Review the image in the actual block rather than relying on the generation preview.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Check its crop on desktop and mobile and give it accurate alt text. Keep explanatory text in the page where it remains readable and editable.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Describe ‘An illustrated night sky above a small observatory, wide composition, the building fully inside the frame, no lettering.’ Try a variation and inspect it in the block where it will appear.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"ai-images-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>The subject is fully framed in the intended crop.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>The image contains no misleading factual detail.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Alt text describes the selected image.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"ai-images-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>The composition is too tight\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Request more space around the subject and review a variation.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>The image looks good in the picker but not on the page\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Review the block’s crop and shape or choose a version composed for that placement.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":1498,"question":1499,"answerHtml":1500,"guideHtml":1501},"edit-my-site-with-claude-or-chatgpt","Can I edit my website from Claude, ChatGPT, or Codex?","\u003Cp>Yes. Open \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fintegrations\">Data API & ChatBot Tokens\u003C\u002Fa> and select \u003Cstrong>Create token\u003C\u002Fstrong> under \u003Cstrong>AI Editing Tokens\u003C\u002Fstrong>. Pick the website, give the token a label, and copy the connector address it shows. The address is shown once. Tokens are free.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Paste it into your AI app. In Claude, open Customize, then Connectors, and add a custom connector with the address as its URL. In ChatGPT, turn on Developer mode under Settings, Security and login, then create an app in ChatGPT Plugins with the address and No Authentication. The page shows the exact steps for both. For any other AI agent, such as Claude Code, Codex or Cursor, the page gives you a message to paste in: the agent adds the connector itself and keeps it in its global settings, so it works in every session.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>After that, ask the AI in plain words for what you want: a new page, a rewritten section, a menu change, a new color or font, a news post. It can read and change pages, news posts, blocks, menus, the theme, site settings, images, redirects and custom code on that one website. Its changes go live as it makes them. Ask it to save a draft instead when you want to review a page change before it goes live.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-ai-connectors\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">Data & Integrations · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Bring your favorite AI to your site.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>Connect an AI app to one website, ask for changes in plain words and review its activity.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"AI app connections sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#ai-connectors-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#ai-connectors-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#ai-connectors-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#ai-connectors-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"ai-connectors-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>An AI Editing token grants an app editing access to one website. Changes go live as the app makes them unless you explicitly ask for a draft. Use an app and connector you intend to trust, and start with a narrowly scoped draft request.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"ai-connectors-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Choose an editing connection\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fai-connectors-overview.jpg\" alt=\"AI app connections: Choose an editing connection\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Choose an editing connection\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Data API & ChatBot Tokens → AI Editing Tokens. Read its scope: this connector can change pages, posts, menus, theme and settings on the selected website.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>This token is free and differs from the paid, read-only Data API key. Choose the tool for the access you actually need.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Every connection, read and change is recorded in the activity log. Page history provides rollback for page changes.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Create a token for the right website\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fai-connectors-1.jpg\" alt=\"AI app connections: Create a token for the right website\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Create a token for the right website\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Choose Create token. If you have several websites, select the one the AI should edit. Give the token a recognizable app label and create it only when ready to grant that access.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>With one website, the site choice is automatic. Each token belongs to one website; make a separate token for another site.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Copy the connector address when it is shown. Treat the full address as a credential and keep it private; it will not be shown again.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Connect the app and request a draft\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fvisual-edit-2.jpg\" alt=\"AI app connections: Connect the app and request a draft\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Connect the app and request a draft\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Follow the app-specific connection instructions shown with the new connector address. After connecting, identify the website and page and explicitly ask to save a draft.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>For example: ‘On the About page, shorten only the introduction to two sentences. Save a draft; do not publish.’ Name both the desired change and the publication behavior.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Review the result in Website Builder. Do not assume an AI app uses the same default as the in-product Visual AI Editor: this connector's changes can go live without an explicit draft request.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 4\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Review activity and manage access\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fai-connectors-activity.jpg\" alt=\"AI app connections: Review activity and manage access\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Review activity and manage access\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open the activity log to review connections, reads and edits. Use token rotation when replacing a connector, or revoke access when an app no longer needs it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Rotation invalidates the current connector address. Update the app with the new address before expecting it to connect again.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Use the relevant page history to roll back an unwanted page change, then review the restored version. Revoking a token stops future access; it does not itself undo past edits.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Connect an AI app to one website and ask it to shorten an About-page introduction as a draft. Review the saved draft and activity before deciding whether to publish.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"ai-connectors-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>The token belongs to the intended website.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>The connector address remains private.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Draft versus live behavior is explicitly requested.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Changes and ongoing access are reviewed.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"ai-connectors-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>The app edits the wrong website\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Check the token's site scope. A token cannot be reused to choose a different website.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>I lost the connector address\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Rotate the token and update the app with the newly shown address; the old connection stops working.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":1503,"question":1504,"answerHtml":1505},"ai-editing-token-safety","What can an AI Editing token do, and how do I stop it?","\u003Cp>A token edits one website and can do what the person who made it can do on that website. Its changes go live as it makes them, or it saves a page change as a draft when you ask it to. If you have an unpublished draft of a page open in the CMS, a change the AI makes live does not publish your draft; your draft picks up its change the next time you open it. Every publish is kept in the page’s history, so a change can be rolled back from the page in the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">Website Builder\u003C\u002Fa>. Menus keep their own history.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Anyone with the connector address can edit that website, so keep it private. To cut an AI off, open \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fintegrations\">Data API & ChatBot Tokens\u003C\u002Fa> and select \u003Cstrong>Rotate\u003C\u002Fstrong> (a new address, the old one stops working) or \u003Cstrong>Delete\u003C\u002Fstrong>. Removing someone from your team also stops every token they made. Tokens are free; the AI app runs on your own plan with that app.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A token reaches only the one website it was made for. The website is fixed on the Podspun side for every request, so nothing typed into the AI, and nothing it reads, can point it at another site. Every connection, read and change is recorded in the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fintegrations\u002Factivity\">activity log\u003C\u002Fa> with the time, the app, the IP address and place, what the AI sent, and the values each change replaced, including the full content of any page it deleted. Each change has an \u003Cstrong>Undo\u003C\u002Fstrong> button there that puts it back: a page, the settings, theme, menus, redirects, social links, a deleted page or a discarded draft. An undo is logged too and can be undone the same way. The log is kept for a year.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1507,"question":1508,"answerHtml":1509},"built-in-system-pages","Why does my site have Channels, Episodes, News, and Search pages, and can I remove them?","\u003Cp>Podspun adds these pages when they become useful: Episodes and Search once a show is connected, Channels once a custom-domain site features more than one show, and News once you publish your first article.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>On Podspun.com hosting, these standard pages are managed for you and appear read-only under Entries, then Pages. News stays editable in its own section. On a custom-domain site, each is a normal page you can rename, edit, or set to Inactive. Home and Page Not Found always stay on, since the site needs both to work.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1511,"question":1512,"answerHtml":1513},"what-blocks-can-i-add","What blocks can I add to a page?","\u003Cp>Rich text (paragraphs, headings, links, and embedded images or video), Hero (the top banner), Grid (an even grid of images or items, good for a gallery), Cards (a row of cards, with a Carousel option), Media (one image or video), CTA (a prompt with one button), Stats, Partner logos, Contact, Form (a contact form with its own inbox), FAQ, Email signup, News, and Spacer.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Plus live podcast blocks that stay current on their own: Episodes, Episodes archive, Episode list, Episode player, Playlist, Channels, Channel hero, Topics, Categories (cards for the places your episodes visit), AI Search, Caption search, Key moments, Pull quotes, and four games: the Monthly Quiz, Guess the Episode (a daily blur-reveal), Who Said It? (name the episode a quote is from), and Higher or Lower (before or after on the timeline), plus the Arcade Room that gathers them into one hub. Every game comes in a Classic or Arcade style. Add any of them with Add block in the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">page editor\u003C\u002Fa>.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1515,"question":1516,"answerHtml":1517},"hero-slides-and-fixed-content","How does the Hero block work? What are Slides and Fixed Content?","\u003Cp>A Hero has two parts. Slides are the backgrounds, and they move: add one for a still banner, or several and they rotate on their own like a carousel. Tick Add copy on a slide to give that one background its own words, which change along with it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Fixed Content does not move. It stays in one place while the slides change behind it, so use it when you want the same words or buttons on every slide, like a headline or a Watch Now button that is always there. It is off until you press Add fixed content.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A slide's Slide Content setting can also point it at live site content instead of a hand-set background: Latest News Entry shows your newest published article with a Read the Story button, Social Page shows a recent post with a View All Social button, and Live Portrait shows the Portrait's current cover with an Open Live Portrait button. A preset slide fills itself and stays current as the site changes; leave it on Custom to set the background and copy yourself.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>With one picture and the Image Layout set to Image Beside Text, more choices appear under it: Split Image Reach (inside the page or to the screen edges), Split Band, Picture Fit (show the whole picture, or let it fill its half), Picture Placement (a cut-out portrait can stand on the bottom edge), Picture Background, Headline Color, and Label Color (the small line above the headline: Default, Highlight, or Accent, all from your theme; Highlight suits a dark band). The color behind the whole hero is the block's Background, in its Config tab. On any hero, the Headline section sets the Headline Size and whether it is in capitals.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Banner Height works on any hero with a picture, whether the picture sits beside the words or runs across the whole banner. Same As Artwork Banners keeps it at the height a cover-art banner uses, cropping the picture to fit, so pages with different banners match. Natural lets the picture decide. Phones keep their own height either way.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1519,"question":1520,"answerHtml":1521},"what-is-a-reusable-block","What is a reusable (Global) block, and how do I edit one?","\u003Cp>A reusable block is content you write once and place on as many pages as you like. Every page holding it shows the same thing, so changing it in one spot changes it everywhere. You can spot one by its dashed orange outline and its Global tag, both in the block list and on the page itself.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Edit one the same way as anything else: click the text or image right on the page in the visual editor and change it. Because the content belongs to the shared block rather than to this page, the change shows on every page that holds it, and it goes live as soon as you finish typing instead of waiting for Publish (a reusable block has no draft of its own). If you want to change the wording on just one page, swap the reusable block for a normal block there.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Manage the full list under Reusable Blocks in the CMS sidebar, where you can rename one, edit it, or see which pages use it.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1523,"question":1524,"answerHtml":1525,"guideHtml":1526},"add-a-contact-form","How do I add a contact form to my site?","\u003Cp>You already have one. Every site is built with a Contact page carrying a ready-to-use form (Name, Email, Message), linked from the footer of every page. Responses go to Contact Forms, on the Responses tab. Open it in the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">page editor\u003C\u002Fa> to change the wording or the fields.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>To build another form: go to your site's Pages & Content, then Contact Forms and press + New form, at the top of the page or under the list. Give it a name, then under Add A New Question pick the kind of question and press + Add question, in any order. Text, Message, Email, Phone, Date (visitors pick from a calendar), Multiple Choice (visitors pick one of the answers you list, shown as boxes two to a row, with an optional note under them), Pick Several (the same boxes, and visitors can pick more than one), Dropdown (one answer from a menu), Number, Yes \u002F No, Star Rating (1 to 5 stars), and Text Only (your own words between the questions; it asks nothing). Each field has a label, an optional placeholder, an optional help line under the label, and a Required switch; drag rows to reorder and delete any field. You can also style the submit button (label, alignment, full width; colors follow your site's button style). Then place the form on any page with the Form block and pick it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Every form also has its own page on your site, shown under Own Link in the builder (for example yoursite.com\u002Fforms\u002Fcontact), to share anywhere. To open a form from a button or menu link, pick A form in the link and choose the form.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Pages are optional. A longer form can have them, as a multi-step form: under Pages (Optional), press + Add page and your fields so far become Page 1, with an empty Page 2 to fill in; visitors see one page at a time with Next and Back buttons and a Step 2 of 3 line. Under each page, After This Page sets where people go next: rules such as \"If Which best describes you? is I am a teacher, go to Teacher\" (a rule needs a Multiple Choice, Dropdown or Yes \u002F No question on that page), and where everyone else goes, the next page by default. Drag fields between pages, or drag a page by its grip to reorder. Only the pages a person goes through are checked and saved. A link to a form with pages can also open it already on a path: pick A form, the form, then Start At. Preview, at the top of the builder, opens the form as it is on screen, saved or not, so you can click through every path; Send is off there.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Under After Someone Sends It: What They See is a thank-you message or one of your pages. Email Me Each Submission can go to the form's own Send To address; a new address gets an email with a link and is used once it confirms (until then, and when it is empty, messages go to the address in Site Settings, Contact, or your login email). Email Them A Thank-You sends the person your own words with a copy of their answers, from your website's name, when Email is on for your account. If your newsletter is on Substack, turn on Newsletter Tick (Substack) under Mailing List Checkbox: people who tick it see your Substack subscribe box on the thank-you screen and finish there with one click. Checkbox Words changes what the checkbox says.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>In an unpaid preview, you can fill in the fields, but Send remains unavailable. Hover over Send or reach it with the Tab key to read the explanation.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Responses land in Contact Forms on the Responses tab, and each form can also email you every submission, replying straight to the visitor when the form asks for an email. When Email is on for your account and the form has an Email field, visitors also get a join-the-mailing-list checkbox with the same confirmation step as your signup forms. Spam protection (an invisible captcha and a honeypot) is built into every form, and each form's messages download as a CSV with a column per field.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The Responses tab is a table. Pick a form or a quiz in the From menu to get a column for each of its first questions; a form with pages also gets a Path column and a Path filter (Teacher, Leader...). Filter by date, search any answer, and Open a message to read every answer or delete it (you type DELETE to confirm; tick several rows to delete them together). Download CSV downloads what the table is filtered by. Picking a quiz also shows how many people got each result. People who send a form with pages are tagged in Contacts with their path, for example Connect with Betsy: Teacher.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Already have the form in Tally? On the Contact Forms page, press Copy from Tally and paste the link people use to fill it in (it looks like tally.so\u002Fr\u002Fabc123). You see what came over: its pages, questions, paths and newsletter tick, and what did not (Tally's colors and font, since your site's theme is used, and its ?path= links, which become Start At links in Podspun). Open in builder saves it as a new form to check and adjust. Only Tally can be copied for now.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-forms\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">Website Builder · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Ask exactly what you need to know.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>Build a form with the right questions, required fields, notifications and a useful thank-you message.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"Forms & enquiries sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#forms-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#forms-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#forms-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#forms-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"forms-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Decide what the form is for, what information you actually need and where submissions should go. Website enquiries and mailing-list consent are different choices; writing to you does not automatically subscribe someone to campaigns.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"forms-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Choose or create a form\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fforms-1.jpg\" alt=\"Forms & enquiries: Choose or create a form\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Choose or create a form\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>In your website editor, open Forms & Messages → Forms. Review the existing contact form or choose + New form for a different task.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A standard contact form collects a name, email and message. Use a separate form for applications, booking enquiries or another distinct purpose.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Give the form a recognizable name so you can select the correct one when placing it on a page and reviewing its messages.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Add and arrange the questions\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fforms-2.jpg\" alt=\"Forms & enquiries: Add and arrange the questions\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Add and arrange the questions\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Choose Add A New Question. Pick the field type, enter its label and help text, and mark it Required only when the answer is necessary.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Choose Text, Message, Email, Phone, Date, Multiple Choice, Pick Several, Dropdown, Number, Yes\u002FNo or Star Rating. Text Only adds instructions without collecting an answer.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Use a placeholder as an example, not as the only label. Arrange fields in the order someone would naturally answer them; preview required and optional questions.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Set pages and the submission result\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fforms-3.jpg\" alt=\"Forms & enquiries: Set pages and the submission result\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Set pages and the submission result\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>For a longer form, add pages and configure After This Page choices where you need a conditional path. Set What They See after sending to a useful thank-you message or destination.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Keep a short enquiry on one page. Split a longer form only where the division helps the visitor understand the task.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Check every conditional path in Preview. The editor's Preview does not send a real submission, so it is safe for checking layout and progression.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 4\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Configure notifications and place it\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fforms-4.jpg\" alt=\"Forms & enquiries: Configure notifications and place it\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Configure notifications and place it\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Review Email Me Each Submission and Send To. Choose whether to send a thank-you email. Place a Form block on the intended page, select this form and publish after previewing it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Use an inbox you check and follow the verification prompt when a notification address needs verification. Check the fallback address if you leave Send To empty.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Give the page a clear introduction and explain what happens next. Review actual submissions in Forms → Messages; do not rely only on inbox delivery.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>For a screening enquiry, collect name, email, venue, preferred date and a message. Make email and venue required, send notifications to the bookings inbox and thank visitors with an explanation of your response process.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"forms-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>Each question has a clear label and appropriate type.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Required fields and every page path have been previewed.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Notifications reach the intended inbox.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>The correct form is placed on the public page.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"forms-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>Messages are not in my inbox\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Check the saved notification address and its verification, then look in Forms → Messages for the submission.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>The form is too long\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Remove questions you do not use. Use optional fields or conditional pages for information relevant only to some visitors.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":1528,"question":1529,"answerHtml":1530},"faq-answer-links","Can I put links in FAQ answers?","\u003Cp>Yes. In the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">page editor\u003C\u002Fa>, open an FAQ block, expand a question, and edit its Answer. The block's Width keeps the questions to the text column or runs them across the whole section. Answers support formatted text, lists, and links. Select the words to link and use the link control to choose a page or paste an address. External links open in a new tab. You can also edit the answer directly in the page preview.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1532,"question":1533,"answerHtml":1534},"expandable-text-block","How do I show a list of essays or other texts that open when clicked?","\u003Cp>Add an \u003Cstrong>Expandable Text\u003C\u002Fstrong> block to the page in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">Website Builder\u003C\u002Fa>. Each entry has a Title, an optional Note (a line under the title, such as an author, a source or a date) and its Text. Visitors see the list of titles and notes, click a title to open its text under it, and click it again to close it. The text is in the page whether it is open or closed, so search engines can read it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>For questions and answers, use the FAQ block. It opens and closes the same way and also describes its entries to search engines as questions and answers.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1536,"question":1537,"answerHtml":1538},"podcast-games-and-arcade-room","What are the games and the Arcade Room?","\u003Cp>The games are interactive blocks built automatically from your own show. They give visitors a reason to stay, come back, and explore your older episodes, because every game is drawn from your episodes and transcripts and links back to the real episode. There are four games, plus a hub called the Arcade Room that gathers them in one place.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Cstrong>The Monthly Quiz\u003C\u002Fstrong> is a short set of questions drawn from what was said across your episodes, played right on the page with answers and explanations after each one. On the page it sits under the title “Take the Monthly Quiz!”, or under your own Heading if you set one on the block. After each answer, the explanation starts with a bold CORRECT or INCORRECT, so the player sees right away whether they got it. A new quiz arrives every month, written mostly from that month's episodes and skipping the ones the last few quizzes already asked about, so it is a gentle reason for people to check back and it does not keep circling the same episodes. On an Instagram or TikTok channel the questions are about the person: where they went, what they chose, what they recommend and why. Some are picture questions, where each answer shows the photo of the post it stands for.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Cstrong>Guess the Episode\u003C\u002Fstrong> is a daily game: one of your episode thumbnails appears heavily blurred and sharpens a little with each wrong guess. Naming it in fewer guesses scores more points (300, then 200, then 100). Everyone gets the same puzzle each day and a new one arrives at midnight, so there is a reason to come back tomorrow.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Cstrong>Who Said It?\u003C\u002Fstrong> is endless: a real line from one of your transcripts appears and the player guesses which episode it came from. Right answers build a streak, one miss ends the run, and the best streak is saved. Every reveal links to the exact moment in the episode.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Cstrong>Higher or Lower\u003C\u002Fstrong> is an endless timeline game: one episode shows its release date, a mystery episode hides its own, and the player calls whether it came out before or after. A right call keeps the streak going; one wrong call ends the run.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The \u003Cstrong>Arcade Room\u003C\u002Fstrong> is the hub. It shows an optional scoreboard on top (day streak and high scores, which you can turn off with the Show Scoreboard option) plus a grid of all four games. Visitors open one at a time, so the page stays short, and Columns sets how many game fronts sit per row. Drop the Arcade Room on a page to offer everything at once, or add any single game on its own.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Every game and the whole Arcade Room come in two looks, set by the Style option: \u003Cstrong>Classic\u003C\u002Fstrong> (the default) is a calm, clean card that matches your site's theme colors, and \u003Cstrong>Arcade\u003C\u002Fstrong> is a retro neon cabinet with a glowing marquee and press start. The game plays the same either way, so pick whichever fits your site.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The games run on your Podspun data, so connect a channel and publish your site. On an unpublished preview each game shows a short \"coming soon\" placeholder until Podspun has pulled in your episodes and transcripts. Add any of them with Add block in the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">page editor\u003C\u002Fa>, under the Podspun Quizzes & Games section.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Cstrong>Where each one lives.\u003C\u002Fstrong> The Monthly Quiz belongs to a show, because its questions are about that show. Guess the Episode, Who Said It and Higher or Lower belong to a website: each website gets one pool per game covering every show on it, so a website with six shows has three pools rather than eighteen. Set a game block to a single show and it plays that show's part of the pool. The pools are only built for a website that has one of these games on a page, so nothing is generated for a game you have not used yet. Everything is listed and editable in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fpaidposts\u002Fgames\">Quizzes & Games\u003C\u002Fa>.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1540,"question":1541,"answerHtml":1542,"guideHtml":1543},"evergreen-quiz","What is an Evergreen Quiz, and how do I make one?","\u003Cp>An Evergreen Quiz is a quiz you write yourself that stays up until you change it. It has no right answers. Each answer adds a point to one of the quiz's results, and at the end people see the result with the most points, for example \"You are apparently an Empath.\" with your write-up, one of your episodes and a button.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>To make one, open \u003Ca href=\"\u002Faccount\u002Fpaidposts\u002Fgames\">Quizzes & Games\u003C\u002Fa>, click New Quiz or Game, pick Evergreen Quiz and choose the website. Then:\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Results:\u003C\u002Fstrong> what people can come out as. Each has a Result Name (only you see it), a Title, a Write-Up, an optional Picture, an Episode, optional Text Under The Episode and a button, which can open a page or an email.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Questions:\u003C\u002Fstrong> next to each answer, pick which result it adds a point to, or No result. A Help Line under the question is optional.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>When Two Results Tie:\u003C\u002Fstrong> show the first one in the Results list, or ask one more question whose answers each point to a result.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Ask For Their Email:\u003C\u002Fstrong> Required, Optional (with a Skip) or Don't ask. Emails land in Contact Forms, on the Responses tab, with an optional newsletter tick.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Result Email:\u003C\u002Fstrong> set Email Them Their Result to Yes and each person gets their result in their own inbox right after they give their email, sent from your website's name. The email is the result itself: the fields marked Page + email (Title, Write-Up, Picture, Episode, Text Under The Episode and the button), under a Line At The Top you write, such as \"Thanks for taking the quiz. Here is your result.\" Subject is optional; left empty it is the result's Title. Send Me A Test Email sends the first result to your own login email. It needs Email turned on for your account, and each message in Messages says Result emailed: Yes or No.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003Cp>Download CSV on the quiz's row in Quizzes & Games gives a spreadsheet of everyone who gave their email to that quiz, with a column each for the date, email, result, newsletter tick, whether the result was emailed, and the page.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>To put it on a page, add the Quiz block, set Quiz Type to Evergreen and pick the quiz under Which Evergreen Quiz. The settings that only apply to the monthly quiz go away, and the Style is Classic. A Quiz block left on Monthly plays the show's quiz for this month, exactly as before.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>An evergreen quiz belongs to a website, not a show, and a website can have several, all on at once. Turn one off from the Quizzes & Games list with Set selected, Turn Off; a Quiz block showing it then shows nothing until it is back on.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-quiz\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">Contacts & Email · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Make a quiz they can play.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>Create a quiz with different results, episode recommendations and an optional result email.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"Quizzes & Games sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#quiz-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#quiz-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#quiz-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#quiz-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"quiz-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Decide the quiz’s possible results before writing its questions. Each answer should lead meaningfully toward a result, and any recommended episodes should fit that result.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"quiz-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Create an Evergreen quiz\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fquiz-1.jpg\" alt=\"Quizzes & Games: Create an Evergreen quiz\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Create an Evergreen quiz\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Quizzes & Games → New Quiz or Game. Choose Evergreen and the intended website, then Start Writing. Evergreen quizzes lead to a result based on answers; they do not score correct and incorrect responses like a knowledge test.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Open Quizzes & Games and create an Evergreen Quiz. Write the results people can receive and decide what each one should recommend.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Keep the differences between results clear so you can write questions that help choose between them.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Write the possible results first\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fquiz-results.jpg\" alt=\"Quizzes & Games: Write the possible results first\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Write the possible results first\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>In Results, add each outcome. Result Name is internal; Title and Write Up are what the visitor sees. Add a picture, related episode, Text Under Episode and Button Label \u002F Link where useful. Make each result a complete, helpful destination.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Give outcomes distinct meanings before writing the questions. Two results with almost identical write-ups make the quiz feel arbitrary. Use the related episode and button to offer a sensible next action, and check that each link belongs to that outcome.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Connect every answer to a result\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fquiz-2.jpg\" alt=\"Quizzes & Games: Connect every answer to a result\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Connect every answer to a result\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Write each question and optional Help Line. Add its answer choices and choose the result each answer contributes to, or No result. The result with the most points wins. Review every mapping; an unassigned answer cannot support an outcome you meant it to score.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Write the questions and answers, linking each answer to the relevant result. Add result text and episode recommendations where useful.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>If you offer a result email, review its wording and the visitor sign-up experience. The quiz should still be understandable when completed on a phone.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 4\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Decide how tied results are resolved\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fquiz-ties.jpg\" alt=\"Quizzes & Games: Decide how tied results are resolved\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Decide how tied results are resolved\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Under When Two Results Tie, choose the first result in Results order or Ask One More Question. The extra question shows only the tied choices. If you use order, arrange Results intentionally; the first outcome is the tie-break, not a random winner.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Test answers that tie two results and answers that give one result a clear lead. If one result wins almost every realistic path, reconsider the answer mappings or the distribution of questions instead of treating the tie setting as a scoring fix.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 5\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Configure email and newsletter consent\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fquiz-email.jpg\" alt=\"Quizzes & Games: Configure email and newsletter consent\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Configure email and newsletter consent\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Under Ask For Their Email, choose Required, Optional with Skip, or Don’t ask. Newsletter Tick is separate consent. Email Them Their Result needs Email set up on the account; set its subject and Line At Top. A blank result-email subject uses the result’s Title.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The email step appears before the result. Required prevents continuing without an address; Optional offers Skip; Don’t ask does not collect one. Choose based on the experience you want, then test the corresponding path.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Result page and result email use the shared outcome content. Send Me A Test Email sends the first result to your login address. Test delivery before enabling the feature for visitors; adding a newsletter tick does not mean every participant consented.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 6\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Save, add the quiz block and test every path\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fquiz-3.jpg\" alt=\"Quizzes & Games: Save, add the quiz block and test every path\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Save, add the quiz block and test every path\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Choose Publish Quiz for a new quiz, or Save when editing an existing quiz. On the website page, add a Quiz block, choose Quiz Type → Evergreen and select Which Evergreen Quiz. Review each result, a tie, and the email or Skip path at a narrow width before publishing. Forms & Messages records responses and result-email status.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The selected quiz belongs to that website. An Evergreen quiz block is separate from the monthly quiz type; choosing the wrong type does not display the quiz you just wrote. Turning a quiz Off leaves a block pointing to it without an active quiz to show.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The responses export includes date, email, result, newsletter consent, whether the result was emailed and the page. Review those fields when checking an actual response; a response record and successful email delivery are distinct facts.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Add a Quiz block to the website and try the quiz as a visitor. Test different answer combinations until you have seen each result.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Check that the result text and episode links match the answers you chose. Review the result email too if you enabled it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Build a ‘Where should I start listening?’ quiz with results for different interests. Link each result to relevant episodes, then take the quiz using answers for each interest.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"quiz-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>Answers lead to the intended results.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Every result and recommendation has been tested.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>The quiz works on a phone.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"quiz-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>You keep getting the same result\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Review how each answer is linked to results, then test contrasting answer combinations.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>An episode recommendation is wrong\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Update that result’s episode selection and follow the link again.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":1545,"question":1546,"answerHtml":1547},"container-space-between-blocks","How do I add space between the blocks inside a Container?","\u003Cp>Open the Container in the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">page editor\u003C\u002Fa>. At the top of its Content tab, Space Between Blocks sets the room between the blocks inside it: under each block in a stack, and between blocks that sit side by side. Choose None, Small, Medium, or Large.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>None keeps the blocks close together, which is how every Container looked before this setting existed. Phones stack the blocks in one column with their own spacing whichever you choose.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1549,"question":1550,"answerHtml":1551},"add-an-image-or-video","How do I add a single image or a video?","\u003Cp>Use the Media block: one image or video with an optional caption, good for breaking up a long page. Add it in the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">page editor\u003C\u002Fa> with Add block, then choose the image or paste the video.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1553,"question":1554,"answerHtml":1555},"add-a-gallery-or-images","How do I add a gallery, photos, or images to my site?","\u003Cp>Open your site in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">Website Builder\u003C\u002Fa> and edit the page. Click Add block and choose the Gallery block: a set of images or videos shown as a masonry grid (each one keeps its natural shape and they pack together neatly) or a carousel. You choose the column count and the spacing between items, and visitors click any item to view it full screen; videos play right in the viewer. Add each item with the image picker and give it an optional caption.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The Grid block also works for an even grid of images, the Media block holds a single image or video, and a Rich text block puts images inside text.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1557,"question":1558,"answerHtml":1559},"assets-view-and-folders","Where are my images and files? What is the Assets section?","\u003Cp>Assets holds every image and file your site uses, and it works the same as the picker you see anywhere you add an image. It opens on All assets, a searchable view of everything you have, so you never dig through folders to find a picture. Type in the search box to filter by name, Upload adds a file (or drag files straight from your desktop onto the panel), and clicking an image opens the editor to crop it or set its focal point.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The Stock photos button searches free, no-attribution photos, and Make with AI generates an image from a description, shows it to you first, and saves it only when you approve it. Folders are optional: switch to Browse folders to organize, or ignore them and All assets still shows everything.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Channel posts shows the pictures from your connected channels, like your Instagram, TikTok and YouTube posts and podcast episodes. Pick a channel to page through them or search by title. They come from each channel and update with it, so they can be viewed but not renamed or deleted there, and you can still pick one for any image on your site. Renaming or moving a file in Your assets never breaks a page, because pages keep each file's address.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1561,"question":1562,"answerHtml":1563},"image-alt-text","Do I need to write alt text for my images?","\u003Cp>Not usually. Every image you upload is described automatically (AI-made images keep the description you typed, stock photos keep the photographer's), and when you place an image in a block with an Alt Text field, the description fills in on its own. You can always edit it, and a hand-written line beats an automatic one for important images.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1565,"question":1566,"answerHtml":1567},"change-logo-colors-fonts","How do I change my logo, colors, or fonts?","\u003Cp>In the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">website editor\u003C\u002Fa>, open the theme settings to pick a color palette and fonts, and set your logo with the image picker. The colors and fonts apply across the whole site.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1569,"question":1570,"answerHtml":1571},"how-a-new-sites-palette-is-chosen","How is a new site's palette chosen?","\u003Cp>Every new site starts on one of the designed palettes shown in the theme settings. When the site is created from a channel, Podspun reads the channel's own art and picks the palette closest to it: dark or light, colorful or restrained, and which color leads. When no art can be read, the pick falls back to the channel's name and description.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The chosen palette is highlighted in the theme settings, and you can switch to any other palette there at any time.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1573,"question":1574,"answerHtml":1575},"page-width-spacing-and-corners","How do I change the page width, spacing, or corners across my site?","\u003Cp>Blocks decide how each page is arranged. The theme settings hold the site-wide defaults blocks use when they have no setting of their own. In the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">website editor\u003C\u002Fa>, open Site Settings, then Theme, then Advanced.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Spacing sets the Page Width, the Page Margins, the Reading Column for text, Section Alignment (centered, or every section on one left edge), Card Size, the Space Between Cards, and the space between blocks side by side and stacked. Fonts adds Heading Capitals, Heading Letter Spacing, Medium, Semibold and Extra Bold heading weights, more menu styles, Text Weight and Text Line Spacing (Snug, Default or Airy) for paragraphs, the Site Name Style (spaced or tight capitals, or set like a heading, upright or italic), a Subheadings font with Subheading Capitals for small headings and card titles, and a Menu size and a Page title size (the title at the top of each page) beside the other Type sizes. Images sets the corners of cards, panels and bands. Colors has Field Borders, the edge color of form fields. Buttons has Wide capitals.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The header and footer have their own options under Site Settings: the header's Finish (with or without the shadow and the gradient over photos), its Height (Default, Roomy or Tall), and Dim Other Menu Pages, and the footer's Background and Space Above. Picking a palette fills in the values it was designed with, and you can change any one afterward.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A block's own Config tab can set Sit Close to the Block Above, which removes the space between it and the block above (a button that belongs to the list above it). A Gallery in the Carousel style can be kept to the Reading Column.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>An Image + Text block beside its text can put the picture on the Right, give it less of the row with Picture Width (a third or a quarter instead of two fifths), show the whole picture without cropping it (Picture Fit), and set a Picture Background, a color around the picture with room on every side. A Call to action block's Placement can be Middle of the page, which centers the panel on themes that otherwise start it at the left edge. In any text box, the Text style menu has Label (small bold capitals above a heading) and Large Text (an introduction set big), the Center button centers a line, and the Text color menu sets a line in your theme's Accent or Highlight color. Subheading sets a heading in the theme's Subheadings font. A Rich text block's Alignment can be Middle of the page, which moves the block to the middle of the page with its lines left-aligned, or Centered, which also centers every line, for a short statement.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A Cards block can set Card Text Size to Large, for a row of cards that are mostly words. A Live Portrait block shown as a Teaser can be Compact, a slim band with a small picture. The footer's Background can also be a color you pick. A block's photo background keeps the focal point set on the picture in Assets. A Big Image's Size can be To the screen edges, for a wide strip or banner.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1577,"question":1578,"answerHtml":1579},"publish-or-preview-a-draft","How do I publish my changes or preview a draft?","\u003Cp>Edits in the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">website editor\u003C\u002Fa> save as a draft and do not change the live site until you Publish. Use the preview to see a draft first, then click Publish to make it live. You can roll back to an earlier version if needed.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A draft stays current on its own: if the live page gets edited while a draft is open, those live changes are folded into the draft the next time you open it (your own draft edits always win), so publishing a draft never quietly undoes newer live work. The What changed link next to the Draft chip lists every difference before you publish.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>To publish several pages at once, go to Entries then Pages, tick the pages you want, and press Publish Changes in the bar at the bottom. It counts how many of the ticked pages have edits waiting, and it skips any page that is already up to date. A page missing something required is named and left alone rather than published half finished. This is not the same as the Set Status control beside it: status decides whether a page is live at all, while Publish Changes sends out the edits sitting on top of it.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1581,"question":1582,"answerHtml":1583},"see-what-changed-in-a-draft","How do I see what a draft changes before I publish it?","\u003Cp>Open the draft in the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">website editor\u003C\u002Fa> and click What changed, next to the draft label at the top. It shows every difference side by side, the live page on the left and the draft on the right, with removed words struck out and new words highlighted. That covers page settings, blocks you added or removed, edits inside cards and slides, and rearranged blocks.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The Pages list shows the same thing at a glance: a page with a draft that holds real changes carries a chip like Draft, 4 changes, and clicking the chip opens that draft. A draft that matches the live page shows no chip.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Version history works the same way: open View all revisions and click Compare on any version to see exactly what restoring it would change before you roll back.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1585,"question":1586,"answerHtml":1587},"schedule-a-page","Can I schedule a page to go live later?","\u003Cp>Yes. In the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">page editor\u003C\u002Fa>, set Go Live At in the sidebar to a future date and time. The page stays hidden until then, and appears on its own when the time passes. Leave it empty to be live right away. News articles schedule the same way with the Publish date in their Config tab.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1589,"question":1590,"answerHtml":1591},"restore-a-menu-version","Can I restore an earlier header or footer menu?","\u003Cp>In the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">website editor\u003C\u002Fa>, open Header or Footer, choose Links, and click Revision history. Each saved change records the menu, its date, and who saved it. Click Review to compare an earlier version with the menu in your editor, then Use this version to load it. Save applies the restored menu to the website and records another revision.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>History preserves link order, dropdowns, destinations, and header and footer buttons. Restoring one menu leaves the other menu and page content alone. Header appearance, logos, fonts, and custom CSS are separate settings and are not restored with a menu. Versions from before menu history began are available only when an actual saved record has been recovered; no missing history is reconstructed.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1593,"question":1594,"answerHtml":1595,"guideHtml":1596},"paid-posts-members","What is News \u002F Blog and how do members work?","\u003Cp>News \u002F Blog (the section previously called "Off Mic") turns your website's news articles into a members newsletter. In an article's editor, set Who Can Read It to Members Only: visitors then see the opening of the post plus a join card, and the post wears a Members badge in your News \u002F Blog listings. Readers join with their email and can sign in three ways: a one-time emailed sign-in link, a password created on Podspun's central member page, or Google. One Podspun member account works across every show they belong to.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Open \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fpaidposts\">News \u002F Blog\u003C\u002Fa> to write and manage articles. In Automation Config, turn on Email Published Posts To Members if you want new published posts emailed automatically. With that switch off, publishing does not send an email. The article's Config tab also has Send to Members for sending by hand. Manage readers and paid plans in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fmemberships\">Memberships\u003C\u002Fa>, and connect Stripe in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fpayments\">Payment Setup\u003C\u002Fa>.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-members\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">Memberships & Income · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Publish something for your members.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>Choose whether a post is for everyone, members or paid members.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"Members-only posts sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#members-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#members-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#members-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#members-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"members-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Decide whether this post is for everyone, members or paid members. Review the website’s membership settings before offering paid access.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"members-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Write a post for the intended website\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fmembers-1.jpg\" alt=\"Members-only posts: Write a post for the intended website\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Write a post for the intended website\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open that website’s News \u002F Blog and choose Write a Post. Write the article and its free introduction, choose its title and images, and keep it as a draft while configuring access.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Open News \u002F Blog and create a post. Write the content and give it a title that clearly describes what readers will receive.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Review the draft’s images and links before changing its audience. The audience setting controls access to the post.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Choose who can read it\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fmembers-2.jpg\" alt=\"Members-only posts: Choose who can read it\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Choose who can read it\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Under Who Can Read It, choose Everyone, members who sign in for free, or paid subscribers. Membership setup controls access; a paid post needs the website’s payment and subscription setup. Review which part of the post visitors can see before signing in.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Choose who can read it: everyone, members or paid members. Compare that choice with the promise you make on the website and in the post’s introduction.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A member-only post and a paid-member post have different audiences. Choose deliberately rather than assuming every signed-in visitor has paid access.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Check sign-in and member email settings\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fmembers-3.jpg\" alt=\"Members-only posts: Check sign-in and member email settings\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Check sign-in and member email settings\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Review the website’s member sign-in presentation and the News \u002F Blog Automation Config choice for sending posts to members. Publishing and email are separate settings: do not assume every post is emailed. Test the signed-out, free-member and paid-member access appropriate to this post before publishing.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Open member and payment settings to confirm the site’s available plans before choosing paid access. A public link card to an outside publication is not a Podspun paid post and cannot grant that publication’s subscription access.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>If you enable post emails, review the account’s email setup, audience and the actual published post. Keep welcome messages and campaign sends distinct from access permissions.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Review membership settings and the post, then publish when ready. Test the public view and the relevant member view.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Check the sign-in or membership invitation a visitor sees and confirm that the intended readers can reach the full post. Review any associated member email as well.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Publish a behind-the-scenes update for members. Check how it appears to a signed-out visitor, then sign in as a member and confirm that the complete post is available.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"members-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>The post has the intended access level.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>The visitor invitation describes that access accurately.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>The appropriate member can read the full post.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"members-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>A reader cannot access the post\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Check the post’s audience and whether that reader has the required membership.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>The post is visible to the wrong audience\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Review and correct its access selection, then test the public and member views again.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":1598,"question":1599,"answerHtml":1600},"paid-posts-where-they-live","What web address do my posts live at?","\u003Cp>Posts live under their own landing page, \u002Fposts, created automatically with your first post. It's a system page like your News landing: you can rename its address (to \u002Fnewsletter, \u002Fletters, anything) and edit its layout in the CMS, but it can't be deleted. Your News section stays separate for press and announcements, so the newsletter and the news never mix.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Each post's address is \u002Fposts\u002F<its-slug>, and the slug is editable in the post's editor. If a post is ever reached under the wrong address, it forwards permanently to the right one, so links never break.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1602,"question":1603,"answerHtml":1604,"guideHtml":1605},"paid-posts-charge-for-posts","How do I charge for posts with a paid membership?","\u003Cp>Open \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fmemberships\">Memberships\u003C\u002Fa> (under Income in the sidebar). First connect a Stripe account (setup takes a few minutes; if you already use Stripe you can sign in with it). Then, for each website, turn on Offer Paid Memberships and set a monthly price, an annual price, or both, from $1 to $10,000.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Now set any article's Who Can Read It to Paid Members. Visitors and free members see the opening of the post plus a subscribe card with your prices; a reader signs in with their email, picks a plan, and pays through Stripe checkout. The money goes to your own Stripe account, and you handle payouts and refunds from your own Stripe dashboard. A paid member reads every paid post on the site, and Send to Members emails a paid post only to paying subscribers. Subscribers manage or cancel their plan through Stripe's billing portal, from the same subscribe card once they are paid.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-memberships\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">Memberships & Income · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Give your regulars something extra.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>Set membership prices and access, connect payments and pair your offer with members-only content.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"Paid memberships sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#memberships-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#memberships-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#memberships-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#memberships-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"memberships-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Define what free members and paid members receive. Prepare the content or benefits that make the offer useful. Membership pricing and content access are separate settings; both must agree with the public offer.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"memberships-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Review payments and the offer\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fpayments-1.jpg\" alt=\"Paid memberships: Review payments and the offer\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Review payments and the offer\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Payment Setup to confirm the shared Stripe connection, then open Memberships for the membership offer and pricing.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>State what someone gets before asking them to pay. Use the price and billing period configured for this website, not a hard-coded example from a guide.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Check account permissions if pricing controls are unavailable; payment and membership setup require the appropriate role.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Set membership pricing\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fmemberships-1.jpg\" alt=\"Paid memberships: Set membership pricing\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Set membership pricing\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Review the paid membership prices, billing periods and saved offer. Make sure the public description agrees with the configured price and access.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Keep free signup and paid membership distinct. Joining an email list is not the same as purchasing a membership.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Before changing an existing offer, review how current memberships and renewals are handled by the displayed controls.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Assign content access\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fmembers-2.jpg\" alt=\"Paid memberships: Assign content access\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Assign content access\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>In the post editor, choose whether each post is for everyone, members or paid members. Publish only after reviewing both content and access.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Make a clear free preview when appropriate, but verify that the protected content remains behind the intended access level.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Use a member-only post for free signed-in members and the paid setting for content that requires payment; a title saying ‘exclusive’ does not enforce access.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 4\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Review the visitor experience\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fmemberships-2.jpg\" alt=\"Paid memberships: Review the visitor experience\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Review the visitor experience\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Preview joining, sign-in and protected content from the public site. Check what a logged-out visitor sees and what the intended member level can open.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Member sign-in uses the site's member flow. Check the links and confirmation email rather than expecting a Cloud account login to represent a visitor membership.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Review membership records and payment state when helping an existing member. Email subscription status and paid access are different records.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Offer free updates to signed-in members and paid bonus posts to paying members. Configure the paid offer, mark the bonus content correctly and review the logged-out and member experiences before promoting it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"memberships-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>The offer and configured pricing agree.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Protected posts use the intended access level.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Joining and member sign-in are understandable.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Payment and member access states have been reviewed.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"memberships-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>A person joined email but cannot open a paid post\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Email signup does not purchase a paid membership. Review their membership and payment state.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>Protected content appears publicly\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Review the post's saved access setting and public preview rather than relying on its title or menu position.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":1607,"question":1608,"answerHtml":1609},"paid-posts-member-accounts","How do readers sign in to read members posts?","\u003Cp>Readers get real accounts on your website, under \u002Fmembers (renameable in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fmemberships\">Memberships\u003C\u002Fa>, under Income). They join with a secure one-time email sign-in link, continue with Google, or use their central Podspun member account. Opening an emailed link shows a Podspun confirmation button first, so an automatic mailbox scanner cannot use it before the reader does.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Signed-in members manage their newsletter preference, paid plan (through Stripe's own billing portal), and sign out at \u002Fmembers. Password setup and reset happen only on Podspun's secure central member page, never on a publisher-controlled website. A password reset signs out older member sessions across every show. A Members link appears in your site header automatically once you use News \u002F Blog members posts, and the join card under every gated post points readers to the same pages.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1611,"question":1612,"answerHtml":1613},"paid-posts-auto-draft","Can a post be drafted automatically when a new episode goes up?","\u003Cp>Yes. On the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fpaidposts?tab=config\">News \u002F Blog Automation Config tab\u003C\u002Fa>, each website has a Draft Posts From New Episodes switch. With it on, whenever a new episode of your shows arrives and its transcript is ready, we write a companion article from that transcript, with links that jump readers to the exact moments on the episode page.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Every one of these arrives as a draft in your News \u002F Blog library, never published and never emailed on its own. You read it, edit it, set who can read it (everyone, members, or paid members), publish, and send it to your members when you're happy with it. We draft each episode once and check for new episodes every hour, covering episodes published in the last week.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1615,"question":1616,"answerHtml":1617},"paid-posts-auto-draft-social","Can a post be drafted automatically from a new Instagram or TikTok video?","\u003Cp>Yes. On the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fpaidposts?tab=config\">News \u002F Blog Automation Config tab\u003C\u002Fa>, each website with an Instagram or TikTok account has a Draft Posts From New Social Posts switch. With it on, each new video that has spoken words gets a short article written from what the video says and from its caption, with the video itself under the article. Which Posts narrows this to one account, or to one set of an account such as a hashtag set.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Each one arrives as a draft in your News \u002F Blog library. Nothing is published or emailed until you do it. Please read each draft before you publish it: the spoken words come from speech recognition, which can misspell a name. A photo post, or a video with very few spoken words, gets no draft. We draft each video once and check for new videos every hour, covering videos posted in the last week.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1619,"question":1620,"answerHtml":1621,"guideHtml":1622},"news-feed-stories","Can my website list news from other publications by itself?","\u003Cp>Yes. Add each publication as a News Feed channel in the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fchannels\">Dataweaver\u003C\u002Fa>: choose Add channel, pick News Feed, and enter the website's address or the address of its RSS feed. The preview shows the outlet's name and its newest headlines before you add it. Podspun then checks the feed every hour for new stories. Nothing is billed for a News Feed channel.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Each website chooses which feeds it publishes from and how many items a day, in that site's \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fpaidposts?tab=config\">News \u002F Blog, Automation Config\u003C\u002Fa>, under Stories From News Feeds:\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Link Cards Per Day\u003C\u002Fstrong> (0 to 40): a card with the outlet's headline, the outlet's name and a picture, which opens the story on the outlet's own site in a new tab. Add Our Summary To Link Cards puts one line under it saying what the story reports.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Combined Stories Per Day\u003C\u002Fstrong> (0 to 10): when two or more of your outlets report the same thing, a short article on your own site that credits and links each report in its Sources.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Daily Roundup\u003C\u002Fstrong>: one article each evening, soon after 5 PM in your site's time zone, listing every story added since the last roundup with a line about each and a link. An evening with fewer than 5 new stories gets no roundup. Roundup Picture sets a wide picture the roundup wears every day, like the cover of a regular column, and Roundup Card Picture a square one for its card in News \u002F Blog. Without them, a roundup wears its top story's picture. A roundup is filed under its own type, Roundup. Your News page lists it with the other stories; to show the roundups in a row of their own, add a News Index block and set its Type to Daily roundups only.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003Cp>Ticking your first outlet fills in 10 link cards and 2 combined stories a day, which you can change. Focus On and Leave Out tell it in your own words what to favour and what to skip, and File Under Category puts every item in one of your News categories. The numbers are spread across the day, so new items arrive from morning to night.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Which stories are chosen: each new story is scored for how well it fits what your website covers, and the best ones are published first. When several outlets report the same event, it appears once. No single outlet takes more than half of a day's link cards.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>What is shown is the outlet's headline, its name and a link. The outlet's own text is never copied onto your site: the summary line and the combined stories are written in new words. Pictures are your choice, under Pictures. The story's own picture is the one the outlet published with it, such as a film still or a poster, copied into your Assets. A picture made for your site is generated from the story's subject and shows a place or an object, never a person or lettering. A story that has no picture of its own gets a made one either way. A link card stays for 30 days and then comes off your site, unless you edited it, featured it or picked it for a block. Combined stories and roundups are your own articles and stay. A card you delete stays deleted. The stories do not feed your Ask search.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>To have a home page row show your own stories first and the newest after them, open that page's News block, choose your own stories under Featured Articles and set How Many In The Grid to the number of newest stories that follow.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-news\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">Data & Integrations · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Keep up with the publications you follow.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>Add feeds, then choose link cards, combined stories or a daily roundup for your website.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"News feeds sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#news-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#news-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#news-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#news-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"news-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Choose publications you want to follow and decide how their stories should appear: source link cards, combined stories or a daily roundup. Preserve clear links to the original reporting.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"news-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Connect the publications you want to follow\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fnews-1.jpg\" alt=\"News feeds: Connect the publications you want to follow\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Connect the publications you want to follow\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Podspun Dataweaver → Add channel → News Feed. Enter a publication’s website or RSS address, then Preview. Check the publication name and headlines before adding it. Repeat for the sources you actually want this website to use.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Add a News Feed channel in Podspun Dataweaver. Review the feed’s source and confirm it contains the publication you intended.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Connect the sources first so the website can use the correct incoming stories.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Select sources and daily output limits\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fnews-2.jpg\" alt=\"News feeds: Select sources and daily output limits\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Select sources and daily output limits\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>In the intended website, open Content → News \u002F Blog → Automation Config. Under Stories From News Feeds, select the outlets. Set Link Cards Per Day from 0–40 and Combined Stories Per Day from 0–10; zero disables that output. The first selected outlet starts with 10 cards and 2 combined stories.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Link cards open the original reporting in a new tab. Combined stories are short articles drawing on at least two reports about the same event and include source links. Quotas are distributed through the day, not necessarily published all at once.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Feeds are checked hourly and the system avoids repeated events; no outlet supplies more than half the day’s cards. Select sources for relevance instead of adding more sources only to fill a quota.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Open the website’s News \u002F Blog and Automation Config. Choose the feeds and the story presentation you want.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Review the distinction between a card linking to a source and a generated combined story or roundup. Select the treatment that fits your editorial purpose.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Choose pictures and link-card summaries\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fnews-pictures.jpg\" alt=\"News feeds: Choose pictures and link-card summaries\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Choose pictures and link-card summaries\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Set Add Our Summary To Link Cards if you want an original summary line. Under Pictures, choose the story’s own picture or a picture made for your site. Original pictures are stored in Assets; if a story has no usable picture, a generated one can be used with either choice.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A generated news picture uses a place or object rather than inventing a person or placing lettering inside the image. Review its relevance to the article; an illustration is not proof that a depicted event happened.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Keep the difference between a card linking to another publisher and an article written on your own website clear. Open source links when checking the resulting presentation.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 4\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Set roundup, topic filters and category\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fnews-roundup.jpg\" alt=\"News feeds: Set roundup, topic filters and category\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Set roundup, topic filters and category\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Daily Roundup creates a recap after 5 PM in the website’s time zone when at least five new stories are available. Use Focus On, Leave Out and File Under Category to guide the selection. Choose Save Settings for this website; choosing values without saving does not apply them.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Focus On describes relevant subjects; Leave Out excludes subjects you do not want. Start with precise topics and inspect the results before adding a long list of rules. A category helps the website’s News blocks show the right group of stories.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Daily Roundup is optional and its minimum story count matters: turning it On does not guarantee a roundup on a quiet day. Check the site time zone before expecting its after-5-PM schedule.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 5\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Review the public News presentation\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fnews-3.jpg\" alt=\"News feeds: Review the public News presentation\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Review the public News presentation\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Check the resulting News list and the website’s News block filters. Open cards to verify their original source. Read combined stories and roundups with their source links. Featured Articles can put your own stories first; How Many In The Grid controls the additional grid items.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Link cards expire after 30 days unless edited, featured or selected by a block. Combined stories and roundups remain. A deliberately deleted card is not repeatedly re-added.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Outside News Feed stories do not become sources for Ask & Search. News automation, imported Substack posts and your episode archive are different inputs with different purposes.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Review the resulting stories on the website. Check titles, images, source links and how several stories sit together in the News list.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>For combined stories or roundups, read the full text and inspect the original sources. Change the configuration if the result is repetitive or does not fit the publication’s tone.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Follow a few relevant publications and begin with source link cards. Review their presentation before deciding whether a daily roundup would be more useful to your visitors.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"news-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>The selected feeds are the intended sources.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>The presentation distinguishes source links from combined stories.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Visitors can open the original reporting.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"news-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>The wrong publication appears\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Check the News Feed channel and the feeds selected in Automation Config.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>The News list feels repetitive\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Review the selected sources and whether cards or a roundup better suit the site.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":1624,"question":1625,"answerHtml":1626},"related-content-under-posts","What shows under each post, and can I turn it off?","\u003Cp>Up to three rows show under every post: Related reading (other posts from your website, the ones in the same category or on the same subjects first), Related episodes, and Related social posts (your Instagram and TikTok posts). Podspun finds them by itself. There is nothing to pick.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Episodes and social posts are matched on the post’s subjects, the labels each post is given when it is written. An episode or a social post is shown when it shares a subject that the post’s own title names, as one of its topics, in its title, or in its caption. A subject that only a few of your episodes or posts share counts for more than a common one. A post with nothing that matches shows no row. A post built around one episode shows the episodes related to that episode.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>All three are on for every website. To turn one off, open \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fpaidposts?tab=config\">News \u002F Blog, Automation Config\u003C\u002Fa> and set Related Posts Under Each Post, Related Episodes Under Each Post, or Related Social Posts Under Each Post to Off. A post where you placed your own Related Social Posts block keeps your picks, and the automatic social row is left out there.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A new episode or social post can join a post’s row within about an hour.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1628,"question":1629,"answerHtml":1630},"paid-posts-ideas","Where do post ideas for my newsletter come from?","\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fpaidposts\u002Fideas\">Content Ideas\u003C\u002Fa>, under AI Site Editor, lists your own episodes and social posts that have no News \u002F Blog article made from them yet, newest first. Each row says whether it is an episode or a social post, and which platform it came from. \u003Cstrong>Draft a News \u002F Blog Article\u003C\u002Fstrong> writes a blog article from that episode or post's own words (its transcript, description, or caption) and leaves it as a draft in your News \u002F Blog library for you to review. \u003Cstrong>Draft a Quiz\u003C\u002Fstrong> writes quiz questions about it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Once your sites have visitors, the section also shows what people opened most in the last 30 days, and the words they searched, including searches that found nothing. Click a searched word and Page Makers opens with that topic filled in, ready to draft an article.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Everything listed comes from your own content and your own visitors. Before you have visitor activity, those lists say so instead of inventing ideas.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1632,"question":1633,"answerHtml":1634},"email-a-post-to-members","How do I email a News \u002F Blog post to my members?","\u003Cp>Open the post, publish it, then go to its \u003Cstrong>Config\u003C\u002Fstrong> tab and click \u003Cstrong>Send to members\u003C\u002Fstrong> under Email This Post to Members. It goes to the members of every site the post shows on (its Where It Shows setting), and a person who joined two of your sites gets one copy. A paid post goes only to paying subscribers.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Sending is always your choice: publishing a post never emails anyone on its own. The button waits until the post is published, because the email carries the published version. Config also shows when a post was last sent and to how many people, so you never send twice by accident.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1636,"question":1637,"answerHtml":1638},"email-topics","How do visitors choose which emails they get from my website?","\u003Cp>Open your website in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">Website Builder\u003C\u002Fa>, then Config, Email List, and add rows under \u003Cstrong>Email Topics\u003C\u002Fstrong>: pick one of your lists for each, type the name visitors see (for example Auction Watch) and one line about it, and drag the rows into order. Make the lists first in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Femail\u002Flists\">Email Campaigns, Lists\u003C\u002Fa>.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The website's Join pop-up then signs visitors up for every topic, with the checkboxes folded under one small line below the email field (Subscribe to All newsletters) so a visitor can untick what they do not want. One sign-up covers every email. An Email Signup block shows its heading, its text and one button that opens the same pop-up with the block's list ticked. The block has no email field of its own, so there is only ever one way to sign up. A signed-in member sees a Get these emails button instead.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Members turn each topic on or off on their member page under Your emails. Everyone who signs up is in your \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Femail\u002Fcontacts\">Contacts\u003C\u002Fa> with the lists they chose, so you can send a campaign to one topic.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1640,"question":1641,"answerHtml":1642},"news-page-search-box","Can visitors search the articles on my News page?","\u003Cp>Yes, and it is already on. Every News page shows a search box above the article grid: visitors type a word and the grid narrows to the articles whose title or summary match, including an article currently featured at the top. Clearing the box brings the full list back.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Next to it are Categories and Subjects. Each is a heading that opens to a list with the number of articles beside every name, so a visitor can narrow to one, and a long list has its own search box. When your news carries stories from two or more outside publications, a Sources heading lists them the same way, so a visitor can see one outlet's stories. A Sort dropdown switches between newest first and oldest first. Load More reveals the next batch. How many articles show before that first press is the News Index block's How Many In The Grid setting, in the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">page editor\u003C\u002Fa>. Articles Across, on the same block, sets the most cards in a row (3, 4 or 5) when the Layout is Cards; Automatic sizes the cards to the page.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>This searches news articles only. The episode search on your Episodes page is separate.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1644,"question":1645,"answerHtml":1646},"news-featured-image-layout","How does Podspun choose the image layout for a news article?","\u003Cp>Podspun tags artwork as it is imported from episodes and social posts: photo, illustration, meme, card with text, minimal card, screenshot, or graphic. The Hero and News Index blocks use that tag when their layout is Automatic. Photos and illustrations can fill the header. Composition-sensitive images stay whole beside the headline so their text and design are not cropped. With Image Beside Text, a picture drawn on one flat color, such as show cover art or a poster, is shown whole and is never cropped. When that layout runs to the screen edges, the band behind the headline takes the picture's own color.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>To override one article, open it in the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">website editor\u003C\u002Fa>. In Config, correct the Featured Image Type if needed. Open the article's Hero block and set Single Image Layout to Automatic, Full Bleed, or Image Beside Text. On the News landing page, the News Index block has the same choice for its featured article. This changes presentation only. It does not add another block or alter the original image.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1648,"question":1649,"answerHtml":1650},"news-card-without-picture","What shows on a News card when the article has no picture?","\u003Cp>Your website's logo. When an article has no picture, its card on the News page shows your logo centered in the picture frame, on your theme's background color, so the card lines up with the cards that have pictures. A website with no logo shows its name there instead. The Featured Spotlight row does the same for any card without a picture, and the Event Calendar for an event without one.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>To show a real picture instead, open the article in the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">website editor\u003C\u002Fa> and add a Custom Share Graphic in its settings. For an external press link, add its Feature Graphic.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1652,"question":1653,"answerHtml":1654},"external-press-articles","Can my News page link to press coverage on other sites?","\u003Cp>Yes. When you create a news article, an Article Type switch sits under the title: Internal Article (the default, a normal article you write in blocks) or External Press Link. An external article is a pointer to coverage somewhere else: you give it a title, a feature graphic, and the link to the outside piece, and set its publish date and category under Config like any article.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>External articles appear in your News listings alongside your own articles, sorted by publish date, but clicking one opens the outside coverage in a new tab instead of a page on your site. They stay out of your sitemap since there is no on-site page to index.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1656,"question":1657,"answerHtml":1658},"rename-off-mic-section","Can I call the News \u002F Blog section something else on my site?","\u003Cp>Yes. In \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fmemberships\">Memberships\u003C\u002Fa> (under Income in the sidebar), each website has a \u003Cstrong>What This Section Is Called\u003C\u002Fstrong> field. Type the name you want (Newsletter, Dispatch, anything) and save. It changes the heading on the posts page, the crumb trail above each post, and any menu item pointing at that page, all at once, including menu items that still carry the section's old name, "Off Mic".\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>It only changes what readers see on that one site. Your posts stay one library across the account, and each site can use its own name.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1660,"question":1661,"answerHtml":1662},"choose-where-a-channel-appears","How do I choose where a channel appears?","\u003Cp>Open \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fchannels\">Podspun Dataweaver\u003C\u002Fa>. The \u003Cstrong>Where It Appears\u003C\u002Fstrong> menu on each channel shows its assigned custom website or Podspun.com page. Choose another destination from that menu to move the channel.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1664,"question":1665,"answerHtml":1666},"keep-shorts-off-my-site","How do I keep Shorts or certain videos off my site?","\u003Cp>Open the channel in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fchannels\">Podspun Dataweaver\u003C\u002Fa> and use Filter the feed. Video type shows both, full videos only, or Shorts only (a Short is under three minutes). By title adds rules like \"title must contain\" or \"title cannot contain\".\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>It is a display filter: everything stays imported, the filtered episodes are just hidden from every surface, so changing your mind later brings them back instantly.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1668,"question":1669,"answerHtml":1670},"split-one-feed-into-shows","Can I split one feed into separate shows?","\u003Cp>Yes. Open the channel in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fchannels\">Podspun Dataweaver\u003C\u002Fa> and use Split into shows. Episodes matching your rules become their own show, listed under the parent channel, with its own pages, search, and presentation settings. Useful when one feed carries several series.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1672,"question":1673,"answerHtml":1674},"check-for-new-episodes-now","How do I check for new episodes right now?","\u003Cp>Open the channel in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fchannels\">Podspun Dataweaver\u003C\u002Fa> and click Check now under Check for new episodes (available once every three hours). You rarely need it: Podspun also checks automatically through the day and runs a full sync nightly.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1676,"question":1677,"answerHtml":1678},"choose-how-videos-play","How do I choose how my videos play, and does it affect ads?","\u003Cp>Go to \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fcollection\">Podspun.com Setup\u003C\u002Fa>, open the podcast, and use How videos play. It is a YouTube-only setting with three modes. Normal play is our interactive player with the live synced transcript, but YouTube does not run ads on it. Ads play uses YouTube's standard click-to-play player so YouTube can run ads (the transcript stays searchable but no longer highlights live). Link out to YouTube sends viewers to YouTube.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Pick Ads play if ad revenue matters; pick Normal play for the richest on-site experience.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1680,"question":1681,"answerHtml":1682},"how-posts-play","How do my TikTok and Instagram posts play, and do plays count on the platform?","\u003Cp>Each social channel has a How Posts Play setting in its editor under \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fcollection\">Podspun.com Setup\u003C\u002Fa>, with two players.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The \u003Cstrong>Podspun player\u003C\u002Fstrong> (the default) plays our archived copy of the post right on the page. It starts instantly, the transcript beside it is clickable so a reader can jump to any line, and plays count in your Podspun analytics. These plays do not appear in the post's TikTok or Instagram view count, because the platforms only count plays that stream through their own players.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The \u003Cstrong>TikTok \u002F Instagram player\u003C\u002Fstrong> uses the platform's own embedded player, so each real play counts toward the post's view count there. It loads slower, and the transcript sits beside it as plain text without the click-to-jump.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>One thing worth weighing: a post earns nearly all of its platform views in its first days in the feed. These pages mostly help people find and read older posts through search and topics, so for older posts the running count barely moves either way, and the choice mostly comes down to how the page feels to use.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1684,"question":1685,"answerHtml":1686},"youtube-subscribe-popup","What is the subscribe pop-up on my YouTube link?","\u003Cp>When your site's YouTube social link points at your channel or a video, YouTube can greet visitors who aren't subscribed yet with a small \"Subscribe?\" prompt. It's on by default; turn it off with the checkbox under your YouTube link in the site's Menu Layouts, Social section. It only has an effect on channel and video links.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1688,"question":1689,"answerHtml":1690,"guideHtml":1691},"use-my-own-domain","How do I use my own custom domain?","\u003Cp>In \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">Website Builder\u003C\u002Fa>, open your site's Setup and choose Custom domain. The page has two steps. Step 1: enter your domain and press Save and Continue. Step 2 then shows the DNS records to add at the company that runs your domain, with a Check DNS button and the live status. The records stay listed after the domain is live. Once the DNS is verified, the site switches from simple Podspun.com hosting to the custom-domain mode.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Both the address with www and the one without reach your site. To choose which one visitors end up on, open Site Settings, then Key Domain Setup, then Redirects, and pick under With or Without www.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>No domain yet? A panel beside the field in step 1 links to two places to buy one. At Cloudflare, the domain connects to your site in one click: the “Add everything to Cloudflare for me” button writes every record for you. At Dynadot, step 2 walks you through Dynadot’s DNS form one field at a time.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The record for the domain itself (@) is a CNAME, or your DNS company’s ALIAS or ANAME option. If your company offers none of those for the domain itself, see \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fpodspun.com\u002Fhelp\u002Fusing-podspun\u002Fdomain-itself-cannot-take-a-cname\">My DNS company cannot add a CNAME for the domain itself\u003C\u002Fa>.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-domains\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">Website Builder · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Put your name on your website.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>Connect your domain, check the DNS records and confirm your public website address.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"Your own domain sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#domains-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#domains-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#domains-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#domains-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"domains-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>You need a domain you control and access to its DNS settings. Keep your existing mail records: connecting a website does not require replacing your email provider. The exact records shown by Podspun are the authority for your website.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"domains-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Enter your website domain\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fdomains-1.jpg\" alt=\"Your own domain: Enter your website domain\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Enter your website domain\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>In Website Builder, open Domain Setup, choose Custom domain and enter the domain. Choose Save and Continue to see the records for that site.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Double-check spelling before saving. A domain belongs to the correct website; do not enter another site's address.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Podspun.com hosting is the simpler alternative if you are not ready to connect a custom domain. Custom DNS setup is for the full website address you control.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Add the displayed DNS records\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fdomains-2.jpg\" alt=\"Your own domain: Add the displayed DNS records\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Add the displayed DNS records\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>At the company managing your DNS, add the website records and ownership record exactly as listed in Domain Setup. The website target is connect.podspun.com.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>For the domain itself (@), use CNAME when supported, or the provider's ALIAS\u002FANAME equivalent. If neither is available, follow the A-record fallback shown in the help for this setup; do not copy an IP address from an old guide.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The www record is separate. Preserve MX records and existing mail configuration, and resolve conflicting website records rather than creating contradictory records.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Check DNS and the public address\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fdomains-3.jpg\" alt=\"Your own domain: Check DNS and the public address\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Check DNS and the public address\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Return to Setup and choose Check DNS. Read the status for each record, resolve anything missing and open the domain once verification completes.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>DNS updates can take time. Check that you changed the authoritative DNS provider rather than an inactive settings page at a different registrar.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Check the domain with and without www, your important page links and secure loading. Keep the live records listed in Setup for future reference.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Connect yourshow.com by adding the @ and www website records plus Podspun's ownership verification. Keep the mail provider's MX records, then use Check DNS and test the public website.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"domains-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>The domain is assigned to the intended site.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>The website and ownership records pass verification.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Existing email still uses its intended provider.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>The main address and www version open correctly.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"domains-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>My DNS provider rejects CNAME on @\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Use ALIAS\u002FANAME if offered. The domain help explains the current A-record fallback when neither is supported.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>Records still appear missing\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Check the authoritative DNS company, record names and conflicting old website records. Allow propagation time before checking again.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":1693,"question":1694,"answerHtml":1695},"domain-itself-cannot-take-a-cname","My DNS company cannot add a CNAME for the domain itself. What do I do?","\u003Cp>The record for the domain itself (shown as @) can be added three ways. Use the first one your DNS company offers.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Col>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>CNAME\u003C\u002Fstrong> on @ pointing to connect.podspun.com. This is the record Key Key Domain Setup lists.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>ALIAS\u003C\u002Fstrong> or \u003Cstrong>ANAME\u003C\u002Fstrong> on @ pointing to connect.podspun.com. Some companies offer this where a CNAME on the domain itself is not allowed. Dynadot calls it ANAME.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Only if it offers neither: an \u003Cstrong>A record\u003C\u002Fstrong> on @ pointing to 13.52.190.131, which is Podspun’s own address.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Fol>\u003Cp>In all three cases www is a CNAME pointing to connect.podspun.com, and the ownership TXT record is the same.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>With the A record, your site’s address is www.yourdomain.com, and yourdomain.com forwards to it. Key Domain Setup sets With or Without www to www for you once it finds the A record, and keeps it there.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>GoDaddy has no CNAME, ALIAS or ANAME for the domain itself, so for a domain whose DNS is at GoDaddy, Key Domain Setup lists the A record from the start. After adding the records, press Check DNS.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1697,"question":1698,"answerHtml":1699},"what-is-podspun-com-setup","How do I use Podspun.com hosting?","\u003Cp>Open \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">Website Builder\u003C\u002Fa> and choose a site. Under Setup, choose \u003Cstrong>Podspun.com\u003C\u002Fstrong> for simple hosting without custom DNS, or \u003Cstrong>Custom domain\u003C\u002Fstrong> for the full website builder.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Podspun.com hosting loads and manages the standard public pages for you, so custom pages are read-only and you cannot add more. You can still write and manage News, quizzes, and shared content in the same builder. Email gathering is currently off on Podspun.com-hosted sites. Switch to Custom domain when you want to add or redesign pages.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1701,"question":1702,"answerHtml":1703},"your-podspun-page","What is my Podspun page, and how do I change what is on it?","\u003Cp>Every channel you add gets a page on podspun.com at its own address. A page can also gather several of your channels under one address: podcasts, YouTube, TikTok, and Instagram together, episodes and posts merged and searchable in one place.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fcollection\">Podspun.com Setup\u003C\u002Fa> shows your pages as cards at the top; the list below holds channels that appear nowhere on podspun.com. To merge channels, press Edit on a page and use Channels Shown On This Page: tick the channels it should gather, and name the page and pick its address (keeping the channel's own address is fine; that address then shows the merged page). A channel gathered onto a page is managed from that page, never in two places.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1705,"question":1706,"answerHtml":1707},"show-or-hide-podcast-on-podspun-com","How do I show or hide a podcast on podspun.com?","\u003Cp>Go to \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fcollection\">Podspun.com Setup\u003C\u002Fa>, open the podcast, and use Active. Active gives the podcast its own public page on podspun.com, where people can browse, play, and search its episodes; Inactive takes that page down and removes the podcast from podspun.com entirely.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>While it is Active, Podspun.com Exposure sets how findable the page is: Full (promoted across Podspun and indexed by search engines), SEO Only (indexed by search engines but never featured by Podspun), or Unlisted (up for anyone with the link, but search engines skip it and Podspun does not list it anywhere; linking it on a Cross Link still shows it there).\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>If a feed is split into separate shows, each show is listed on its own and has its own settings, so you can, for example, index one show and hide another. Editing a show changes only that show.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>To change several at once, check them in the Podspun.com Setup list and use Change a setting: it can set Active, Podspun.com Exposure, AI search, and How videos play for all of the checked items.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1709,"question":1710,"answerHtml":1711},"promote-my-website-on-podspun-com","How does my custom website get promoted on Podspun.com?","\u003Cp>It already is. Open a site in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">Website Builder\u003C\u002Fa>, then Site Settings, then Key Domain Setup, then Podspun Exposure: Expose this website and its channels on Podspun.com is set to Yes for every site. It only takes effect once the website is live: a website that is still a preview is not listed on Podspun.com.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>It is a free way to promote the website to people browsing Podspun.com. Every listing links straight to your site, so all the SEO lives on your own domain. The subjects a listing shows up under are read from your episodes by Dataweaver, so there is nothing to fill in. Set it to No to keep the site off Podspun.com.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1713,"question":1714,"answerHtml":1715},"what-is-a-collection-page","What is a Cross Link on podspun.com?","\u003Cp>A page on podspun.com carrying your own name and logo that ties several of your podcasts together, at its own address like podspun.com\u002Fcollection\u002Fyour-name, so a visitor who finds one show finds the rest. Good for networks and agencies. Set it up under the Cross Links tab in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fcollection?tab=crosslinks\">Podspun.com Setup\u003C\u002Fa>: name it, write a short bio, pick the podcasts, and optionally add an email signup that feeds your Email contacts. Cross Links used to be called collection pages.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1717,"question":1718,"answerHtml":1719},"unlisted-collection-page","Can I keep a Cross Link out of Google?","\u003Cp>Yes. On the page's settings under the Cross Links tab in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fcollection?tab=crosslinks\">Podspun.com Setup\u003C\u002Fa>, set Private to Yes. The page stays up at its direct link so you can share it, but it is left out of search engines and podspun.com listings. Useful while you set it up, for demos, client previews, and a soft launch. Set it back to No when you want it found.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1721,"question":1722,"answerHtml":1723,"guideHtml":1724},"what-is-quick-start","How do I migrate my website, Instagram, and TikTok?","\u003Cp>Open \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fimports\">Add New Site\u003C\u002Fa>. Select \u003Cstrong>Add New Website\u003C\u002Fstrong>. Add your website under \u003Cstrong>Existing website\u003C\u002Fstrong> and your podcast or social links in the channel fields, choose the \u003Cstrong>Site Language\u003C\u002Fstrong>, then select \u003Cstrong>Build my site\u003C\u002Fstrong>. Left on English, the site uses the language your posts or pages are written in when it is clearly another one. Podspun reads your links and builds the site. When it is done, the site is in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">Website Builder\u003C\u002Fa>, where you can change anything. There is no plan to approve first.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Each page keeps its own shape: headings, paragraphs, pictures and bullet lists stay as they were, an FAQ where questions open to their answers becomes an FAQ block, and a contact or question form becomes a form in your site's Forms section with the same questions, placed where it was. Newsletter sign-up boxes, search boxes and logins are not copied, since your new site has its own.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Every blog post from your old website comes across, before and after you pay. A large blog opens once its newest 100 posts are in, and the older ones keep arriving after that; the Imports screen shows how many are left. Each podcast or social channel brings in its newest 10 items with transcripts and search. A Substack pasted in a channel field is connected to the new site: its posts are listed in the site's News and the site's search reads them. When your existing website is itself a Substack, its pages (About, Work With Me and the rest) come across as pages and its posts arrive through that same connection. Your website address works with or without www. Nothing is charged until you turn the site on, and turning it on imports the rest of each channel.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>To start manually, select \u003Cstrong>Add a site by hand\u003C\u002Fstrong>, enter a \u003Cstrong>Website Name\u003C\u002Fstrong>, and select \u003Cstrong>Create my site\u003C\u002Fstrong>. Your account's layout is selected already; \u003Cstrong>Change starting layout\u003C\u002Fstrong> shows the other options. The new site includes its pages, navigation, and a contact form, and opens in the visual editor. Existing websites are unchanged. You can edit the private preview before choosing a domain and reviewing the price to publish. No payment is required to create the preview.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-imports\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">Data & Integrations · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Give your existing work a new home.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>Start from your website and channel addresses, build a private preview and review what was brought across.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"Website & channel imports sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#imports-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#imports-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#imports-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#imports-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"imports-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Use a website and channel sources you own or manage. Gather their addresses and decide on the language for the new site. An imported preview still needs a careful review against the original site before activation.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"imports-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Choose how to start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fimports-1.jpg\" alt=\"Website & channel imports: Choose how to start\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Choose how to start\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Add New Site. Start from an existing website and channels, or choose the manual website option when you want to build from scratch.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>An existing website URL describes the site to bring across. Podcast or social channel fields describe content sources; keep those separate.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A manual site asks for a Website Name and lets you choose a starting layout. Use the option that matches the work you already have.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Add sources and language\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fimports-2.jpg\" alt=\"Website & channel imports: Add sources and language\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Add sources and language\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Enter the website address and supported channel addresses in their own fields. Choose Site Language, review the detected sources and choose Build my site when ready.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Check addresses for redirects and similar names. Your source should be the intended site or channel, not a screenshot or a search-results page.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Read the import\u002Factivation terms displayed for your account. A private preview and turning a site on are separate stages.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Review the private preview\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fimports-3.jpg\" alt=\"Website & channel imports: Review the private preview\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Review the private preview\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Follow the build status and open the preview when ready. Compare the original and imported site: pages, navigation, order, images, text and important links.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Check for duplicated or empty blocks and verify that images match the relevant content. Do not accept a generic-looking page simply because the build completed.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Latest content can be available while older material continues importing. Review the build and channel processing states separately.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 4\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Finish setup before turning it on\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fdomains-1.jpg\" alt=\"Website & channel imports: Finish setup before turning it on\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Finish setup before turning it on\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Edit the preview, verify forms and destinations, and choose the hosting\u002Fdomain setup. Turn the website on only after the review and the account's activation terms are clear.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Check the narrow-width layout, social links and key visitor actions. Keep the site's main purpose easy to recognize.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A private preview does not mean the custom domain is configured. Finish the displayed DNS steps when using your own domain.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Bring across a creator website plus podcast and video channels. Compare the preview's menu order, page images and enquiry form to the original, correct mismatches, then finish domain setup before activation.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"imports-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>Website and channel addresses are correct.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Imported pages, menus and images match the source.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Forms and important links work in the preview.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Hosting and activation terms were reviewed.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"imports-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>The preview looks unlike my source\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Compare specific pages and images, fix the draft and review it again before activation.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>Older content is missing\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Review channel import progress and exclusions; historical processing may continue after the site preview is ready.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":1726,"question":1727,"answerHtml":1728},"listen-page-from-import","What is the Listen page on my imported site?","\u003Cp>When you build a site from a link, Podspun notes every place your show is listed: the Apple Podcasts and YouTube channels in your plan, and any Spotify link on your old website (shown as the same show on Apple Podcasts, since Spotify pages cannot be read or embedded). Those become a Listen page of buttons, one per listing, and Listen appears in the header menu.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>This is how you keep a show as a link-out without importing its episodes: leave that source unticked in the plan and its listing still lands on the Listen page. Edit the buttons like any other block, or delete the page if you do not want it.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1730,"question":1731,"answerHtml":1732},"see-analytics","Where do I see analytics for my channels?","\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fanalytics\">Analytics\u003C\u002Fa>, under Creator Tools. It covers traffic, campaign attribution, visitor journeys, conversions, and gross checkout revenue across your sites, split into Traffic, Social, and Email Digest tabs. The Social tab shows how a TikTok or Instagram catalog performs: total views and likes, which topics pull views, posting rhythm, top posts, and views over time.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>To ask about those numbers in plain words, or for content ideas drawn from them, use the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fanalytics?tab=ask\">AI Chatbot\u003C\u002Fa>. Narrative has its own tab in Analytics & Insights.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1734,"question":1735,"answerHtml":1736,"guideHtml":1737},"analytics-report-pdf","Can I download or send an analytics report?","\u003Cp>Yes. In \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fanalytics\">Analytics\u003C\u002Fa>, click Report. Pick the dates (the presets cover 7, 30, or 90 days, or set an exact start and end), write an optional note that prints at the top, then Download PDF or enter an address and Send. The one-page report shows visitors, page views, AI questions, searches, signups, a views-by-day chart, and your top pages, sources, questions, searches, and episodes.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The sent email carries the PDF as an attachment and replies come to you. Reports cover up to 90 days, which is how long the daily figures are kept.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-analytics\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">Account & Analytics · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>See what people are finding.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>Explore traffic, social and email results over a chosen period, then make a report you can share.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"Analytics & reports sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#analytics-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#analytics-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#analytics-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#analytics-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"analytics-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Choose what decision the report should help you make and a meaningful date range. Analytics availability depends on the features enabled for the account. Website traffic, social metrics and email results measure different activities.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"analytics-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Choose the report area\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fanalytics-1.jpg\" alt=\"Analytics & reports: Choose the report area\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Choose the report area\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Analytics and choose Traffic, Social or Email Digest. Start with the area relevant to your question rather than combining unrelated totals.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Traffic covers website visits and actions. Social covers connected social data. Email Digest covers email results.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Check the website\u002Fchannel scope where available, especially on accounts with more than one source.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Set the period and compare\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fanalytics-2.jpg\" alt=\"Analytics & reports: Set the period and compare\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Set the period and compare\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Choose Today, Yesterday, a preset range or custom dates. Review the chart and tables for that period before comparing it with another.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Make comparisons over equivalent periods. The date controls use UTC day boundaries; short-period hourly\u002Fday presentation follows the display rules shown by the report.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A missing measurement is not necessarily zero. Check tracking\u002Fsource availability before interpreting an empty table.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Review actions and campaigns\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fanalytics-3.jpg\" alt=\"Analytics & reports: Review actions and campaigns\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Review actions and campaigns\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>In Traffic, review the available conversions and campaign information alongside visits. Look at UTM\u002Fsource information and confirmed visitor actions when judging a campaign.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A click or visit is not the same as a purchase, signup or other confirmed conversion. Read what each metric measures.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Use the evidence to choose a specific next action, such as improving a page visitors reach or covering a recurring unanswered search.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 4\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Create a useful report\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fanalytics-report.jpg\" alt=\"Analytics & reports: Create a useful report\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Create a useful report\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Report, choose the period and add context where needed. Download the PDF and review it before sharing or using the email option.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Keep the report note factual and name the period. Check the PDF's dates, scope and measurements before treating it as a client result.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Send email sends a real report to the selected recipient. Downloading and reviewing it first lets you confirm the contents without sending.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Review 30 days of website traffic and the confirmed signups from a campaign. Compare the prior equivalent period, add a factual report note and download a PDF for review.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"analytics-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>Report area, website and date range are correct.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Equivalent periods are compared.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Visits and confirmed actions are distinguished.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>The generated report was reviewed before sharing.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"analytics-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>Figures seem different from another report\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Compare the scope, period, timezone boundaries and metric definitions before assuming a tracking error.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>There is no data for a source\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Check whether that source is connected and has data for the selected period.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":1739,"question":1740,"answerHtml":1741,"guideHtml":1742},"make-a-clip","How do I make a clip?","\u003Cp>Open \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fclips\">Clips and Thumbs Maker\u003C\u002Fa> and, on the Clips tab, tick a suggested clip (Use in a clip). A bar rises at the bottom of the screen: press Make clip. Tick several and the button reads Make one clip from them, which joins them into one clip. The clip editor opens as its own screen with five tabs: Trim (click the transcript to set the start, drag the timeline, set the length), Format (video clip, audiogram, or mp3, and the shape), Captions, Logo, and Finish. The preview on the right shows the result on every tab. Press Make clip under it. Finished clips land in My Outputs, ready to download and post.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Your first 3 clips each month are free; past that they come in packs of 25.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-clips\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">Clips & Media · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Make a clip from any moment.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>Any moment becomes a captioned vertical clip, no editor needed. 3 clips a month included.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"Captioned clips sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#clips-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#clips-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#clips-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#clips-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"clips-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Choose an episode with a usable moment and decide where the clip will be shown. The shape, captions and branding should fit that destination.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"clips-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Choose the episode moment\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fclips-1.jpg\" alt=\"Captioned clips: Choose the episode moment\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Choose the episode moment\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Clips & Thumbs Maker and choose an episode moment. In clip ideas, tick Use in a clip on the moment you want, then use the Make clip button below the selections. The checkbox selects a moment; it does not open the editor by itself.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Open Clips & Thumbs Maker and select an episode moment. Start with a section that makes sense without the full episode.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Listen before and after your selection so the opening has enough context and the ending does not cut off the point.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Trim the actual beginning and ending\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fclips-trim.jpg\" alt=\"Captioned clips: Trim the actual beginning and ending\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Trim the actual beginning and ending\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>In Trim, use the transcript to choose the start, then adjust the waveform range and duration. Play the selection with a little surrounding context. Keep This Length preserves the duration while moving the range; do not cut the first or last word in half.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Choose a moment that makes sense without the whole episode. Keep the speaker’s qualification or explanation when removing it would change the meaning. A suggested moment is a starting range, not an instruction to keep an awkward cut.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Choose format, captions and logo\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fclips-2.jpg\" alt=\"Captioned clips: Choose format, captions and logo\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Choose format, captions and logo\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>In Format, choose Video, Audiogram or MP3 and a shape: 9:16, 4:5, 1:1 or 16:9. For video, choose Fill frame or Show whole. In Captions and Logo, set the style, word count, size, position and branding. MP3 does not have visual captions or a logo.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Captions offers Clean, Outline, Box, Spoken, Headline and Word Box. Choose one to six words at a time or a whole line, then use More options for font, case, colors, active-word treatment, outline, box or shadow. Play the preview to check names and readability.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Logo placement uses a nine-position grid. Channel Preferences supplies reusable defaults and logos, including for virtual channels. Show whole preserves the video with a blurred background; Fill frame crops to fill the chosen shape.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Review the trim in the editor and choose the output format. Check the caption wording, the caption appearance and your logo placement.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Watch the whole preview. Pay attention to names, caption timing and whether text overlaps a face or an important part of the picture.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 4\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Save a draft or render the clip\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fclips-3.jpg\" alt=\"Captioned clips: Save a draft or render the clip\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Save a draft or render the clip\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Finish and play the preview. Save as Draft keeps an unfinished composition for later; Make Clip starts rendering the finished output. Wait for the job to complete, then open My Outputs, play the finished file and download it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Make the clip and wait for the output. Open My Outputs and review the rendered file, not only the editor preview.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Play it from beginning to end, then download the version you want to share. Check sound, captions and framing on the device where your audience will watch.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Turn one complete answer from an interview into a vertical clip. Start just before the answer needs context, keep its conclusion and verify the guest’s name in the captions.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"clips-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>The moment makes sense on its own.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Caption text and timing are accurate.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>The completed output has clear sound and suitable framing.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"clips-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>The clip starts mid-thought\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Extend the trim or choose a moment with a clearer opening.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>The preview is good but the finished clip is wrong\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Review the rendered output in My Outputs and return to the editor to correct the affected setting.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":1744,"question":1745,"answerHtml":1746,"guideHtml":1747},"get-my-catalog-as-data","How do I get my catalog as data (the API)?","\u003Cp>Data API keys, under \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fintegrations\">Data API & ChatBot Tokens\u003C\u002Fa> in your account, are for advanced users who want to export Podspun data into other applications. A key lets another app pull your episodes and transcripts as JSON.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-data-api\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">Data & Integrations · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Take your catalog to another app.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>Give an application authenticated read access to your channels and episodes through the documented Data API.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"Data API sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#data-api-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#data-api-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#data-api-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#data-api-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"data-api-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>The Data API gives another app read access to your account's channels and episodes. Each key has the recurring price shown on the creation screen. This is separate from a free, site-scoped AI Editing token that can change a website.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"data-api-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Read the API scope and documentation\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fdata-api-1.jpg\" alt=\"Data API: Read the API scope and documentation\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Read the API scope and documentation\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Settings → Data API & ChatBot Tokens and find Data API Keys. Open Data API documentation for the current base URL, authentication method, endpoints and parameters.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Choose this when a developer or integration needs structured catalog data. Check what the consuming app will store and who can access it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Use the live documentation rather than constructing guessed endpoints. The account role must allow creating a key when it adds a charge.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Review cost and create a named key\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fdata-api-create.jpg\" alt=\"Data API: Review cost and create a named key\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Review cost and create a named key\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Choose Create key. Read the account-specific price or agreement coverage, label the integration and continue only when you intend to start that access and any charge.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The creation prompt explains whether the key is created immediately or follows checkout. A label helps you distinguish applications later.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Create a separate key for an independently managed app so replacing one integration does not force unrelated apps to change; each key can add its own recurring charge.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Use and maintain the connection\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fdata-api-3.jpg\" alt=\"Data API: Use and maintain the connection\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Use and maintain the connection\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Copy the new key when it is revealed and store it in the consuming app's secure server-side configuration. Use the documented authentication and inspect the returned catalog.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The full key is shown once. Keep it out of screenshots, public page code and source repositories. If it is lost, use the rotation flow and update the application.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Review status and Last Used in the keys table. Rotate or delete keys deliberately: the old credential stops working and the consuming app must be updated.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Give a server-side catalog integration its own named key. Read the channels and episodes with the documented API, check pagination and identifiers, then review Last Used to confirm the intended integration is using it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"data-api-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>API scope and recurring cost are understood.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>The key is stored privately in the intended application.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Returned data matches the intended catalog.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Unused or replaced credentials are handled deliberately.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"data-api-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>I cannot see Create key\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Ask the account owner or a Full Admin; creating a charged key is restricted by account role.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>An application stops working after rotation\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Update it with the newly issued key. The previous key no longer authenticates.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":1749,"question":1750,"answerHtml":1751},"send-a-newsletter","How do I send a newsletter or email my audience?","\u003Cp>Go to \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Femail\">Email Campaigns\u003C\u002Fa> and click New campaign. Build the email from templates, pick a list, and send; every campaign shows its sent, open, and click counts. Personal email sends one message to one person. Email is on for every account and free for your first 100 subscribed contacts, then $9.00\u002Fmonth up to 500.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1753,"question":1754,"answerHtml":1755},"contacts-in-one-place","Where do I see everyone across my account in one place?","\u003Cp>Open \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fcontacts\">Contacts\u003C\u002Fa>. It shows one row per person across your whole account, with every relationship they hold: newsletter subscriber, member (free or paid), store buyer, donor, sorted by their latest activity. It reads across all your sites and tools, so someone who subscribed on one site and bought from another shows up once, whole.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Bring in a list from another email service with Import contacts at the top of that page. Manage mailing lists in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Femail\u002Fcontacts\">Email Campaigns\u003C\u002Fa>, memberships are managed right there too (removing one signs the reader out of that site); buyers and donors join your contacts when they check Email me updates at checkout.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1757,"question":1758,"answerHtml":1759},"join-a-second-email-list","What happens when a subscriber signs up for a second list?","\u003Cp>A signup block can point at a specific list (a drop alert, an event list). When someone who is already subscribed joins from its button, they are added to that list and stay on every list they were already on. The request is recorded on their contact, and nothing is sent twice.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>An address that has unsubscribed is never re-added by a form. The form tells them so and points them to the link in any past email, where re-subscribing is their own explicit choice. On the site's member page, a signed-in member sees Your emails, one checkbox for each Email Topic the website offers, and can turn one off without leaving the rest; any other list they joined shows below with Leave. Manage lists in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Femail\u002Flists\">Email Campaigns, Lists\u003C\u002Fa>.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1761,"question":1762,"answerHtml":1763},"billing-profile-team","Where do I manage billing, my profile, or my team?","\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fbilling\">Billing\u003C\u002Fa> has your subscription, usage, and past bills. \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fprofile\">User Profile\u003C\u002Fa> is your own name, email, password, and sign-in, whichever account you are working in. \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Faccounts\">Accounts\u003C\u002Fa> is where you name this account, give other people access, and switch between accounts.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1765,"question":1766,"answerHtml":1767},"billing-only-access-and-invoices","Can someone manage invoices without managing my content?","\u003Cp>Give them the Billing Only role in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Faccounts\">Accounts\u003C\u002Fa>. Their dashboard shows the selected account, amount owed, monthly plan, next invoice, saved card, and each unpaid invoice with a Pay invoice link. The account menu, at the top of the page and above Sign out, switches between accounts they can access. They also have their own User Profile and Contact \u002F Feedback. They cannot edit websites, content, settings, or team access.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Emailed invoice links work without signing in. If no card is saved, Add a card to continue opens the secure card form, then returns to the invoice to pay. Adding a card does not pay the invoice by itself.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1769,"question":1770,"answerHtml":1771},"switch-or-add-accounts","How do I switch between accounts or add another?","\u003Cp>Go to \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Faccounts\">Accounts\u003C\u002Fa>. It lists every account you created or were given access to; Switch to this account moves you into it. The account chip on the dashboard also lets you switch from a dropdown. Add new account creates a fully separate account with its own channels, websites, people, and billing.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>If you were only given access to other people’s accounts, you have no account of your own yet. Add new account then makes your own account, with you as its owner, and takes you into it.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1773,"question":1774,"answerHtml":1775,"guideHtml":1776},"give-my-team-access","How do I give other people access to my account?","\u003Cp>Go to \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Faccounts\">Accounts\u003C\u002Fa> and use Add someone to invite them by email with a role. The roles, from the most access to the least:\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Full Admin:\u003C\u002Fstrong> Every part of the account, including Billing and giving people access. Can also do the things that add a charge, such as turning a website on or creating a Data API key.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Tech Admin:\u003C\u002Fstrong> Everything a Full Admin has except Billing, giving people access, and anything that adds a charge. Sets up channels, imports and websites, including each website's design, domain and settings.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Content Admin:\u003C\u002Fstrong> Content only: website pages, posts, menus and images, plus art, films, clips, email campaigns, contacts and analytics. Cannot open channels, imports, the list of websites, a website's settings or domain, or anything about money.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Billing Only:\u003C\u002Fstrong> Invoices and payment methods only, plus their own User Profile and Contact \u002F Feedback. Nothing else in the account.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003Cp>Everyone has their own User Profile for their name, password and sign-in. They sign in with their own Podspun login, and you can change or remove access anytime. If they have no login yet, they enter their email on the sign-in screen with any password: it tells them no password is set yet and emails them a link to set one. Giving someone access does not create a Podspun account for them: they work in yours.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>These roles are the one place you manage access. They cover every website in the account too: a Full or Tech Admin can fully edit each site, and a Content Admin can edit each site's content. There is no separate per-site access list to keep in sync.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-team\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">Account & Analytics · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Make room for your team.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>Give each person their own login and the account role that matches the work they do.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"Team & account access sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#team-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#team-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#team-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#team-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"team-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>You must be the account owner or have Full Admin access to give someone account access. Choose a role based on the work they actually need to do. Delegated roles cover this account; do not describe them as access to only one page or site.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"team-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Open access for the correct account\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fteam-1.jpg\" alt=\"Team & account access: Open access for the correct account\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Open access for the correct account\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Accounts and review which account you are managing. Find Add someone and People with access.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>People sign in with their own Podspun login; you remain the owner. Do not share your login as a substitute for adding a person.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>If you manage multiple accounts, switch to the intended account before granting access. The access is for that account's resources.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Choose the appropriate role\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fteam-2.jpg\" alt=\"Team & account access: Choose the appropriate role\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Choose the appropriate role\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Read the role choices before adding someone: Full Admin, Tech Admin, Content Admin or Billing Only.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Full Admin includes billing and giving people access. Tech Admin covers setup and websites but excludes billing, granting access and actions that add a charge.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Content Admin covers content work. Billing Only opens the billing area. Choose the smallest role that covers the person's real task; these are account roles, not a per-page invitation.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Add and review access\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fteam-3.jpg\" alt=\"Team & account access: Add and review access\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Add and review access\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Enter the person's intended email, choose the role and submit when ready to grant access. Review the resulting status in People with access.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Each access action saves on its own. Adding someone grants real access and sends the relevant invitation; it is not a harmless preview.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Review the email and role together before submitting. If the person already has a Podspun login, they use it to enter the account they were given.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 4\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Maintain the team list\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fteam-4.jpg\" alt=\"Team & account access: Maintain the team list\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Maintain the team list\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Review People with access when responsibilities change. Use the role control to change access, resend an invitation when needed or remove the intended person.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Changing a role saves immediately. Removing access stops that person from working in the account; it does not remove their separate account, if they have one.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Check invitation status before repeatedly resending. Keep access current when someone stops working with you.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Give an editor Content Admin so they can work on posts and pages, and a setup specialist Tech Admin for website\u002Fchannel configuration. Keep billing and access management with the owner or an intended Full Admin.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"team-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>The intended account is selected.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Email and role match the intended person and job.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Invitation or active status was reviewed.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Access is maintained as responsibilities change.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"team-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>I cannot add someone\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Only the owner or a Full Admin can grant account access.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>A colleague expects their own paid account\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Being given access provides a login into the shared account; it does not create a separate account with its own websites and billing.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":1778,"question":1779,"answerHtml":1780},"given-access-own-account","I was given access to someone else's account. Do I have my own?","\u003Cp>No. When someone gives you access to their account, you get a Podspun login and you work in their account with the role they gave you. No account of your own is created, so there is nothing of yours to set up or pay for. If you signed up for Podspun yourself before being given access, you keep the account you signed up with.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>You can start your own account at any time. Open \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fprofile\">User Profile\u003C\u002Fa> and select \u003Cstrong>Start my own account\u003C\u002Fstrong>, or use \u003Cstrong>Add new account\u003C\u002Fstrong> on \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Faccounts\">Accounts\u003C\u002Fa>. Give it a name and you are taken into it as its owner. It has its own channels, websites and billing, and the account menu switches between it and the accounts you were given.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1782,"question":1783,"answerHtml":1784},"whats-on-dashboard-card","How do I see which features are on for my account?","\u003Cp>On the Welcome page, select \u003Cstrong>Activity\u003C\u002Fstrong> to see the Switchboard and Analytics. The Switchboard lists your account features with their live state: Podspun.com, Websites, the Data API, News \u002F Blog, the Store, Donations, Email Campaigns, Payment Setup, and your Contacts count. Each row has a Configure link straight to that area’s setup, so turning something on or adjusting it is one click from Activity.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1786,"question":1787,"answerHtml":1788},"merge-or-delete-news-tags-and-categories","How do I merge or delete several news tags or categories at once?","\u003Cp>Open \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">your website\u003C\u002Fa>, then Pages & Content, News \u002F Blog, and the Tags or Categories tab. Tick the ones you want (search the list to find them), and a bar appears under the list.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Merge into one:\u003C\u002Fstrong> pick the name to keep. Every article that had any of the ticked ones now has the one you kept, and the others are removed.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Delete:\u003C\u002Fstrong> removes the ticked ones. The articles stay; they only lose those labels.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003Cp>Both take effect straight away. Rename and Delete on each row still work one at a time, and those wait for Save.\u003C\u002Fp>",[1790,1808,1822,1830,1837,1844,1864,1875,1887,1891,1899,1906,1916],{"slug":1791,"title":1792,"entries":1793},"building-with-ai","Building pages with AI",[1794,1795,1796,1797,1798,1799,1800,1801,1802,1803,1804,1805,1806,1807],{"slug":1444,"question":1445,"answerHtml":1446,"guideHtml":1447},{"slug":1449,"question":1450,"answerHtml":1451},{"slug":1453,"question":1454,"answerHtml":1455,"guideHtml":1456},{"slug":1458,"question":1459,"answerHtml":1460,"guideHtml":1461},{"slug":1463,"question":1464,"answerHtml":1465},{"slug":1467,"question":1468,"answerHtml":1469,"guideHtml":1470},{"slug":1472,"question":1473,"answerHtml":1474},{"slug":1476,"question":1477,"answerHtml":1478},{"slug":1480,"question":1481,"answerHtml":1482,"guideHtml":1483},{"slug":1485,"question":1486,"answerHtml":1487},{"slug":1489,"question":1490,"answerHtml":1491},{"slug":1493,"question":1494,"answerHtml":1495,"guideHtml":1496},{"slug":1498,"question":1499,"answerHtml":1500,"guideHtml":1501},{"slug":1503,"question":1504,"answerHtml":1505},{"slug":1809,"title":1810,"entries":1811},"pages-and-blocks","Pages and blocks",[1812,1813,1814,1815,1816,1817,1818,1819,1820,1821],{"slug":1507,"question":1508,"answerHtml":1509},{"slug":1511,"question":1512,"answerHtml":1513},{"slug":1515,"question":1516,"answerHtml":1517},{"slug":1519,"question":1520,"answerHtml":1521},{"slug":1523,"question":1524,"answerHtml":1525,"guideHtml":1526},{"slug":1528,"question":1529,"answerHtml":1530},{"slug":1532,"question":1533,"answerHtml":1534},{"slug":1536,"question":1537,"answerHtml":1538},{"slug":1540,"question":1541,"answerHtml":1542,"guideHtml":1543},{"slug":1545,"question":1546,"answerHtml":1547},{"slug":1823,"title":1824,"entries":1825},"images-and-files","Images and files",[1826,1827,1828,1829],{"slug":1549,"question":1550,"answerHtml":1551},{"slug":1553,"question":1554,"answerHtml":1555},{"slug":1557,"question":1558,"answerHtml":1559},{"slug":1561,"question":1562,"answerHtml":1563},{"slug":1831,"title":1832,"entries":1833},"look","Logo, colors and fonts",[1834,1835,1836],{"slug":1565,"question":1566,"answerHtml":1567},{"slug":1569,"question":1570,"answerHtml":1571},{"slug":1573,"question":1574,"answerHtml":1575},{"slug":640,"title":1838,"entries":1839},"Drafts, publishing and menus",[1840,1841,1842,1843],{"slug":1577,"question":1578,"answerHtml":1579},{"slug":1581,"question":1582,"answerHtml":1583},{"slug":1585,"question":1586,"answerHtml":1587},{"slug":1589,"question":1590,"answerHtml":1591},{"slug":1845,"title":1846,"entries":1847},"news-and-members","News and members",[1848,1849,1850,1851,1852,1853,1854,1855,1856,1857,1858,1859,1860,1861,1862,1863],{"slug":1593,"question":1594,"answerHtml":1595,"guideHtml":1596},{"slug":1598,"question":1599,"answerHtml":1600},{"slug":1602,"question":1603,"answerHtml":1604,"guideHtml":1605},{"slug":1607,"question":1608,"answerHtml":1609},{"slug":1611,"question":1612,"answerHtml":1613},{"slug":1615,"question":1616,"answerHtml":1617},{"slug":1619,"question":1620,"answerHtml":1621,"guideHtml":1622},{"slug":1624,"question":1625,"answerHtml":1626},{"slug":1628,"question":1629,"answerHtml":1630},{"slug":1632,"question":1633,"answerHtml":1634},{"slug":1636,"question":1637,"answerHtml":1638},{"slug":1640,"question":1641,"answerHtml":1642},{"slug":1644,"question":1645,"answerHtml":1646},{"slug":1648,"question":1649,"answerHtml":1650},{"slug":1652,"question":1653,"answerHtml":1654},{"slug":1656,"question":1657,"answerHtml":1658},{"slug":1865,"title":1866,"entries":1867},"channels-and-episodes","Channels, episodes and videos",[1868,1869,1870,1871,1872,1873,1874],{"slug":1660,"question":1661,"answerHtml":1662},{"slug":1664,"question":1665,"answerHtml":1666},{"slug":1668,"question":1669,"answerHtml":1670},{"slug":1672,"question":1673,"answerHtml":1674},{"slug":1676,"question":1677,"answerHtml":1678},{"slug":1680,"question":1681,"answerHtml":1682},{"slug":1684,"question":1685,"answerHtml":1686},{"slug":1876,"title":1877,"entries":1878},"domain-and-podspun-com","Your domain and podspun.com",[1879,1880,1881,1882,1883,1884,1885,1886],{"slug":1688,"question":1689,"answerHtml":1690,"guideHtml":1691},{"slug":1693,"question":1694,"answerHtml":1695},{"slug":1697,"question":1698,"answerHtml":1699},{"slug":1701,"question":1702,"answerHtml":1703},{"slug":1705,"question":1706,"answerHtml":1707},{"slug":1709,"question":1710,"answerHtml":1711},{"slug":1713,"question":1714,"answerHtml":1715},{"slug":1717,"question":1718,"answerHtml":1719},{"slug":744,"title":745,"entries":1888},[1889,1890],{"slug":1721,"question":1722,"answerHtml":1723,"guideHtml":1724},{"slug":1726,"question":1727,"answerHtml":1728},{"slug":1892,"title":1893,"entries":1894},"analytics-clips-data","Analytics, clips and data",[1895,1896,1897,1898],{"slug":1730,"question":1731,"answerHtml":1732},{"slug":1734,"question":1735,"answerHtml":1736,"guideHtml":1737},{"slug":1739,"question":1740,"answerHtml":1741,"guideHtml":1742},{"slug":1744,"question":1745,"answerHtml":1746,"guideHtml":1747},{"slug":1900,"title":1901,"entries":1902},"email-and-contacts","Email and contacts",[1903,1904,1905],{"slug":1749,"question":1750,"answerHtml":1751},{"slug":1753,"question":1754,"answerHtml":1755},{"slug":1757,"question":1758,"answerHtml":1759},{"slug":1907,"title":1908,"entries":1909},"account-and-team","Account and team",[1910,1911,1912,1913,1914,1915],{"slug":1761,"question":1762,"answerHtml":1763},{"slug":1765,"question":1766,"answerHtml":1767},{"slug":1769,"question":1770,"answerHtml":1771},{"slug":1773,"question":1774,"answerHtml":1775,"guideHtml":1776},{"slug":1778,"question":1779,"answerHtml":1780},{"slug":1782,"question":1783,"answerHtml":1784},{"slug":750,"title":751,"entries":1917},[1918],{"slug":1786,"question":1787,"answerHtml":1788},{"slug":1920,"title":1921,"lead":1922,"entries":1923,"groups":2049},"email","Email and newsletters","The built-in newsletter tool: contacts and lists, signup forms on your site, campaigns with open and click tracking, sending from your own domain, and pricing. Standard plans include 100 subscribed contacts; Artspun Professional and Managed include 1,000.",[1924,1929,1933,1937,1941,1945,1949,1954,1958,1962,1966,1971,1975,1979,1983,1987,1991,1995,1999,2003,2007,2011,2015,2019,2023,2027,2031,2033,2037,2041,2045],{"slug":1925,"question":1926,"answerHtml":1927,"guideHtml":1928},"what-is-email-campaigns","What is Email Campaigns?","\u003Cp>Podspun's built-in newsletter tool, at \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Femail\">Email Campaigns\u003C\u002Fa>. It is on for every account: you get Campaigns (build and send newsletters from templates), Personal email (one message to one person), Contacts, Lists, and Templates. Every campaign reports sent, opens, and clicks, and the legal footer and unsubscribe link are added automatically.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-email\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">Contacts & Email · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Send your next newsletter.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>A signup block on your site and newsletters from the Email tool. Free up to 100 contacts.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"Email campaigns sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#email-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#email-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#email-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#email-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"email-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Choose the audience and purpose of the newsletter. Review the contacts you intend to send to and have the episode, article or other links ready.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"email-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Start a draft campaign\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Femail-1.jpg\" alt=\"Email campaigns: Start a draft campaign\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Start a draft campaign\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Email Campaigns and choose New campaign. Give it an internal Campaign name that you can recognize later. This starts an editable campaign; it does not send a message.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Open Email Campaigns and create a campaign. Give it a useful internal name and choose the recipients.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Confirm that the chosen list is the intended audience before building the message. A design preview cannot tell you whether the recipient selection is correct.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Build and preview the email\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Femail-2.jpg\" alt=\"Email campaigns: Build and preview the email\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Build and preview the email\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Add the content blocks you need and replace every sample heading, image and link. Preview desktop and mobile. Keep one clear main action and check its destination. The email includes the required footer and unsubscribe link.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Build the email around one clear purpose. Add its subject, content and links, then inspect the preview.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Check the first paragraph, images and button destinations. Make sure any dates, names and offers are correct and that the message makes sense without the website open beside it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Set the sender, subject and recipients\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Femail-settings.jpg\" alt=\"Email campaigns: Set the sender, subject and recipients\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Set the sender, subject and recipients\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Choose Continue to open send settings. Fill Subject, Preview text, From name and From email. Under Send to, choose Everyone subscribed or Specific lists and select the intended lists. Check both the audience and the sender before going on; the internal campaign name is not the inbox subject.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Use a subject that accurately describes the email and preview text that adds useful context. Use a From email address on your verified sending domain. Podspun checks that domain and the footer address before sending; configure both under Email → Config → Sending DNS Setup. If a list is missing, correct the account’s Email list setup before sending.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A campaign sends to its selected audience, not automatically to everyone whose email appears anywhere in the account. Review the list choice against the purpose of this message.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 4\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Send a test and inspect the actual email\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Femail-3.jpg\" alt=\"Email campaigns: Send a test and inspect the actual email\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Send a test and inspect the actual email\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Use Send a test to and enter your test address. Review the delivered email’s subject, preview text, images, links and mobile layout. Test subject and Note at Top can identify a test; sending a test does not send the campaign to the selected audience.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Send a test and open it in your inbox. Try every important link and check the message on a phone as well as desktop.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Return to the campaign, correct anything the test exposed and confirm the final recipients before sending. Sending a test and sending the campaign are separate actions.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 5\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Choose now or schedule the send\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Femail-schedule.jpg\" alt=\"Email campaigns: Choose now or schedule the send\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Choose now or schedule the send\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Under When to send, choose now or schedule. For a schedule, set Send date and time and confirm the intended timing. Review the final audience, sender and subject, then choose Send campaign or Schedule send when ready. Keep it as a draft if anything is unfinished.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A test delivery and a production send are separate actions. Correct anything found in the test before final submission, especially broken links, old dates or a wrong recipient list. For a scheduled campaign, review the saved scheduled state rather than assuming that selecting a date alone scheduled it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Announce a new episode with a short introduction and one clear listening link. Send yourself a test, play the episode through that link and check the email on your phone before sending to the list.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"email-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>The recipient list is correct.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>The subject, content and dates have been reviewed.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>A test email arrived and its links work.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"email-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>The test looks wrong on a phone\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Simplify the layout and review image and text sizes, then send another test.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>A link opens the wrong page\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Correct it in the campaign and retest the actual delivered email.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":1930,"question":1931,"answerHtml":1932},"email-box-columns-and-styles","How do I add colored boxes, side-by-side columns or checkmark lists to an email?","\u003Cp>In the email builder (a campaign in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Femail\">Email Campaigns\u003C\u002Fa>, or the welcome email), add these from Add a block on the right:\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Box:\u003C\u002Fstrong> a colored, rounded panel that holds other blocks. Select it to pick its Background (Charcoal, Light gray, White, or any color) and its Text (dark text for a light box, light text for a dark one), and to add blocks inside it. A Box can hold another Box or Columns, for example a white card inside a gray panel.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Columns:\u003C\u002Fstrong> two blocks side by side, such as a book cover next to its title and a button. Column Widths sets narrow left, two equal, or wide left. The columns stay side by side on phones, so keep a picture in the narrow one.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003Cp>Two blocks also have a new style. A Heading's \u003Cstrong>Heading Style\u003C\u002Fstrong> is Plain or Serif (Georgia, for a website with serif headings). A Text block's \u003Cstrong>List Style\u003C\u002Fstrong> draws its lists as Bullets, Checkmarks or Numbered circles; checkmarks and circles use your button color, set in Config, Buttons.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Inside a Text block, the toolbar's style menu makes a line a \u003Cstrong>Label\u003C\u002Fstrong> (small bold capitals) or \u003Cstrong>Large Text\u003C\u002Fstrong>, and \u003Cstrong>Text color\u003C\u002Fstrong> colors the words you select with any color, for example a green label over a dark box or a few words picked out in a sentence. ✕ Color puts them back to the normal color.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Drag a block by its grip to move it within its own list: the email, the inside of a box, or one column.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1934,"question":1935,"answerHtml":1936},"email-background-picture-and-fonts","Can an email have a background picture and my own fonts?","\u003Cp>Yes. In the email builder (a campaign in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Femail\">Email Campaigns\u003C\u002Fa>, or the welcome email), click an empty part of the page so that no block is selected. The panel on the right shows \u003Cstrong>Email Design\u003C\u002Fstrong>:\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Background Picture:\u003C\u002Fstrong> a picture behind the whole email. Your headings, text and buttons sit on top of it.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Email Color:\u003C\u002Fstrong> the color behind your blocks. With a background picture it shows in an inbox that has pictures switched off, so pick a color close to the picture.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Text:\u003C\u002Fstrong> Dark text or Light text. Light text is for a dark color or picture.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Side Margins:\u003C\u002Fstrong> Standard or Wide. Wide keeps text in a narrower column. Phones always use Standard.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Page Color:\u003C\u002Fstrong> the color around the email.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003Cp>Fonts are the same in every email you send. Set them in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Femail\u002Fconfig\u002Ffonts\">Email, Config, Fonts\u003C\u002Fa>: a Heading Font for Heading blocks, a Body Font for text and buttons, a Text Size and a Line Spacing. The fonts are the ones the website builder offers, so an email can match your site. Apple Mail and the iPhone Mail app show them as chosen. Gmail and Outlook cannot load a font, so they show a similar standard one.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A Heading block has a \u003Cstrong>Size\u003C\u002Fstrong> from Small to Extra Large, an \u003Cstrong>Icon\u003C\u002Fstrong> (a small picture to its left) and \u003Cstrong>Line Under Heading\u003C\u002Fstrong> (a line in your button color that starts at the icon). A Divider's \u003Cstrong>Line\u003C\u002Fstrong> is Thin or Bold. Button \u003Cstrong>Size\u003C\u002Fstrong>, Standard or Large, is in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Femail\u002Fconfig\u002Fbuttons\">Config, Buttons\u003C\u002Fa>. Inside a Text block, Heading 1, 2 and 3 in the style menu make a larger bold line in the body font.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1938,"question":1939,"answerHtml":1940},"email-header-image-and-sender-name","Can my emails carry my own picture and name?","\u003Cp>Yes. In \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Femail\u002Fconfig\u002Ffooter\">Email → Config → Header & Footer\u003C\u002Fa>, upload a Header Image. It shows at the top of every email you send: campaigns, the welcome email, confirmations and drop alerts. Leave it empty and an email opens with your website's logo, when it has one.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The name a subscriber sees as the sender is your From Name, set in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Femail\u002Fconfig\u002Fsending\">Config → Sending DNS Setup\u003C\u002Fa>. Until you set one, emails about a website are sent under that website's name.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1942,"question":1943,"answerHtml":1944},"email-footer-social-links","Can my email footer use my website's social links?","\u003Cp>Yes. In \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Femail\u002Fconfig\u002Ffooter\">Email → Config → Footer\u003C\u002Fa>, choose whether the footer's social links come from one of your websites or from a list you add by hand. When you point it at a website, every email reads the site's current links (the ones you manage in that site's Menu Layouts → Social section) at send time, so updating them on the site updates your emails too.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The links show as icons, each platform's own mark, and a link to anything else gets a globe. To show the platform names in text, set Show Social Links As to Names in text on the same screen.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>When the footer follows a website, the website itself is the last icon, and its domain is the last line of the email. A website that has no domain of its own yet is left out.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1946,"question":1947,"answerHtml":1948},"what-does-email-cost","What does Email cost?","\u003Cp>Standard plans include your first 100 subscribed contacts, then $9.00\u002Fmonth up to 500, stepping up as your list grows. Artspun Professional and Managed include 1,000 subscribed contacts. Above that allowance, the standard email tier is priced for your total subscribed contact count.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The tier picks itself from your live contact count, and only Subscribed contacts count: pending, unsubscribed, and bounced addresses do not. Turn Email off anytime and its separate charge stops.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1950,"question":1951,"answerHtml":1952,"guideHtml":1953},"add-or-import-contacts","How do I add or import my contacts?","\u003Cp>Open \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fcontacts\">Contacts\u003C\u002Fa> and choose Import contacts. Export your list from your old email service as a CSV file and choose it. Every column is read: the address, name, company, phone, postal address, tags, notes, the signup date, and who is subscribed or unsubscribed. A column that matches none of those is kept on the contact as an extra detail under its own heading.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Before anything is saved you see a review: how many people are new subscribers, how many are already in your contacts, and any rows that were skipped and why. People the file marks as not subscribed are added as contacts who are never emailed, or you can leave them out. If they did sign up and the file has it wrong, tick Everyone in this file is subscribed and they come in as subscribers. Someone who unsubscribed or bounced stays that way with or without the tick, and an import sends no email.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>To add one person by hand, open Contacts in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Femail\u002Fcontacts\">Email Campaigns\u003C\u002Fa> and choose Add contact. Each contact carries a status (Subscribed, Pending, Unsubscribed, Bounced, Complaint, or Wrote in only) and list memberships, and only Subscribed contacts count toward your monthly tier.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-contacts\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">Contacts & Email · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Get your people in one place.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>Import contacts with a review first, keep subscription statuses intact and build lists for the right audience.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"Contacts & lists sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#contacts-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#contacts-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#contacts-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#contacts-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"contacts-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Export your existing contacts as CSV and keep subscription status information. Only import people you are entitled to contact. An enquiry, purchase or imported name is not automatically permission for marketing email.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"contacts-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Understand the audience you have\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fcontacts-1.jpg\" alt=\"Contacts & lists: Understand the audience you have\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Understand the audience you have\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Email → Contacts. Filter by subscription status, how contacts arrived, website or list; use Search contacts to find one person.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Subscribed, Pending, Unsubscribed, Bounced and Complaints have different sending eligibility. Wrote in only identifies enquiries without a mailing subscription.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Use the website and list filters to avoid mixing audiences when preparing a campaign. A contact can exist in the account without being eligible for marketing email.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Import and review before saving\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fcontacts-2.jpg\" alt=\"Contacts & lists: Import and review before saving\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Import and review before saving\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Choose Import CSV, then Choose a CSV file or Paste rows instead. Read the column mapping, invalid rows, duplicate handling and import totals before confirming the import.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Every column is read; unmatched information is kept with the contact. Review the email column and subscription statuses instead of assuming the importer guessed correctly.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Previously unsubscribed or bounced addresses are not a shortcut to a fresh subscription. Keep those suppressions intact. Importing contacts does not send a campaign.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Add an individual when needed\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fcontacts-3.jpg\" alt=\"Contacts & lists: Add an individual when needed\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Add an individual when needed\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>For one person, choose Add contact, enter the email and optional first and last name, then save. Review the resulting contact and status before including them in a campaign.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Use the person's actual address and avoid adding the same person through repeated variations. Search first when you are unsure whether they already exist.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A subscriber's eligibility comes from their saved status, not from being present in the table. Review Pending or Wrote in only separately from Subscribed.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 4\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Create a useful list\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fcontacts-4.jpg\" alt=\"Contacts & lists: Create a useful list\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Create a useful list\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Lists and choose New list. Give it a purpose-based name, then organize the contacts or groups that belong to that audience.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A list groups contacts; a group is a smaller slice within a list. Use names that help you choose the right audience at campaign time.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>For automatic website signups into a list, configure the destination under Config → Signups. Verify the destination before promoting the signup form.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 5\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Check the campaign audience\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Femail-2.jpg\" alt=\"Contacts & lists: Check the campaign audience\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Check the campaign audience\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>When building a campaign, choose its intended list and review the eligible audience before sending. Test the campaign separately from importing or editing contacts.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Only eligible subscribed contacts receive marketing campaigns; a list must not bypass unsubscribe, bounce or complaint status.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Confirm the subject, sender, links, list and recipient count together. A test email reviews the message; it is not proof that the selected audience is correct.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Import your old newsletter CSV, review its email and status columns, and create a ‘Screening updates’ list. Route the relevant signup into that list and review eligible subscribers before sending an announcement.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"contacts-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>Import mapping and row totals were reviewed.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Subscription and suppression statuses remain correct.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Lists have clear purposes and signup destinations.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>The campaign audience is reviewed separately from the import.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"contacts-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>A contact is present but will not receive a campaign\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Check its subscription status. Wrote in only, pending, unsubscribed, bounced and complaint contacts are not an eligible subscribed campaign audience.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>A signup reaches the wrong list\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Review Email → Config → Signups and the signup's website or collection-page destination.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":1955,"question":1956,"answerHtml":1957},"collect-signups-on-my-site","How do visitors join my mailing list?","\u003Cp>Add the Email signup block to any page of your website, or turn on the signup on one of your podspun.com Cross Links. On a website the block is a heading, a line of text and one button; the button opens the website's Join pop-up, which is the one place visitors sign up. Signups flow into your Podspun contacts (recommended) or straight into your Mailchimp account, whichever you pick under Signups in Email's Config.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>In your \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fwebsites\">website editor\u003C\u002Fa>, open Config, then Email Popup. Open Automatically waits seven seconds after a visitor arrives by default. Wait Before Opening also offers 15 or 30 seconds. Moving between pages does not restart that wait. Signup links open the popup immediately, and closing it respects the quiet period set under If They Close It.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Every website also has a signup page at \u002Fsignup, for example https:\u002F\u002Fyourdomain.com\u002Fsignup. It shows the same Join card in the page, and the pop-up does not open by itself there. Use that address to send people to sign up from somewhere else, such as an email, a store on another service or a link in a bio. To open the pop-up over one particular page instead, add ?join=1 to the end of that page's address, for example https:\u002F\u002Fyourdomain.com\u002F?join=1.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Confirm email before subscribing (double opt-in) is on by default, and you can send an automatic welcome email with your own subject. Design the email itself with Design welcome email, which opens the same email builder campaigns use (headings, text, pictures, buttons, boxes and columns); the screen shows a preview of what subscribers get, and an older plain message keeps sending as it is until you open the builder and save. To see it in a real inbox, type an address under Send a test, at the bottom of that card, and click Send test: a copy of the saved welcome email goes to that address only, with [Test] in front of the subject. The welcome email is off until you turn it on under Signups in Email's Config, and until then a new subscriber gets nothing from you. While it is off, your website editor shows a note above each signup block to remind you. Visitors never see that note.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1959,"question":1960,"answerHtml":1961},"signups-from-another-website","Can a store or another website add people to my Podspun list?","\u003Cp>Yes, by sending people to your website's signup page. It is at \u002Fsignup on your website, for example https:\u002F\u002Fyourdomain.com\u002Fsignup, and it shows the same Join card your pop-up does. Use that address as the link behind the signup button on the other site. The person signs up there and is added the same way as any other signup on your website, with the email topics they chose. Adding ?join=1 to the end of any page address, for example https:\u002F\u002Fyourdomain.com\u002F?join=1, opens the Join pop-up over that page, which works too.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>This works from a store on another service such as Shopify, a link in a bio, an email or a QR code. Make it a button that links to your website. A signup box that sits on the other website keeps the addresses in that service, because a form on another website cannot write into your Podspun list.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>To bring across addresses another service has already collected, export them from that service as a CSV file and import the file under Contacts in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Femail\">Email Campaigns\u003C\u002Fa>.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1963,"question":1964,"answerHtml":1965},"use-substack-for-signups","Can my website use my Substack instead of a Podspun list?","\u003Cp>Yes. In your website's editor, open Site Settings, then Email Popup and its Config tab. Under Signups Go To, choose Substack and paste your Substack address (for example https:\u002F\u002Fyourname.substack.com, or the custom domain your Substack is on). The website's Join pop-up, which every signup block's button opens, then shows Substack's own subscribe box, and the addresses people enter go to your Substack list. It is one or the other: with Substack chosen, no Podspun list is used for that website. Fill the Substack Address and Save the settings. A blank address falls back to the Podspun form. This routes new sign-ups; it does not migrate existing contacts. Choose Podspun to go back to your own list.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>When you build a site from a link and your old website linked to a Substack, the address is filled in for you.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>If you have no Substack, leave this on Podspun. Your sign-ups go to your own list in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Femail\">Email Campaigns\u003C\u002Fa>, and newsletters and members posts are sent from Podspun, so you do not need a second platform.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1967,"question":1968,"answerHtml":1969,"guideHtml":1970},"send-from-my-own-domain","Can I send email from my own domain?","\u003Cp>Yes. In \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Femail\">Email Campaigns\u003C\u002Fa>, open Config and then Sending DNS Setup. Pick one of your website domains and choose the sender: the domain itself, a ready-made subdomain (ps.yourdomain.com), or a subdomain you name. It shows the exact DNS records to add and flips to Verified once they are in place. A campaign can be sent once the domain shows Verified. Your automatic emails (signup confirmations, welcome emails, member sign-in links and new post emails) need no setup and go out from a Podspun address with your From name on them.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Only three records are needed, all pointing at Podspun: SPF, DKIM, and DMARC. This sets up sending, not receiving. Podspun does not run an inbox for you, so replies go to the Reply-to address you set in Sending DNS Setup, which should be a real email you already check (like your Gmail). Set that and every reply reaches you.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-email-setup\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">Contacts & Email · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Send from your name, in your style.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>Verify your sending domain, set your sender and reply-to, and finish your newsletter header and footer.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"Email setup & branding sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#email-setup-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#email-setup-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#email-setup-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#email-setup-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"email-setup-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Choose the domain you will send from and an existing inbox for replies. You need DNS access for campaign sending. Automatic signup confirmations and member links can use Podspun's sender without campaign-domain setup.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"email-setup-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Open Sending DNS Setup\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Femail-setup-1.jpg\" alt=\"Email setup & branding: Open Sending DNS Setup\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Open Sending DNS Setup\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Email → Config → Sending DNS Setup. Choose the website domain and, when adding a sending domain, select the domain itself or the subdomain you want to use.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A sending domain is for outgoing campaigns. Podspun does not replace your receiving inbox or mail provider.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A subdomain can keep campaign sending separate from your main domain. Use the exact records displayed for the chosen sender.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Verify your sending records\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Femail-setup-dns.jpg\" alt=\"Email setup & branding: Verify your sending records\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Verify your sending records\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Add the displayed SPF, DKIM and DMARC records at your DNS provider, then return and check the domain's status. Campaign sending needs the domain to show Verified.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Keep other valid SPF providers when updating an existing SPF record; do not create two contradictory SPF records for the same name.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Use the displayed host names and values. Website pointing records and email sending records have different jobs even when shown on the same setup screen.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Set the sender and reply-to\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Femail-setup-defaults.jpg\" alt=\"Email setup & branding: Set the sender and reply-to\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Set the sender and reply-to\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Under Email defaults, enter From name, From email and Reply-to email, then Save defaults. From email must use your verified sending domain.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A Gmail address is useful as Reply-to if you read that inbox, but it is not a campaign sender at your own verified domain.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>When Reply-to is empty, replies use From email. Make sure that address receives mail at an inbox you can open.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 4\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Choose the email header\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Femail-setup-header.jpg\" alt=\"Email setup & branding: Choose the email header\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Choose the email header\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Header & Footer. Add an optional Header Image and save it. Leave it empty if you want emails to use the website logo where available.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A wide image works best in the email's 600-pixel desktop width. Review a mobile inbox as well as the desktop presentation.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>This header is shared across emails. Avoid an image tied to one campaign when you want it to serve as your everyday brand header.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 5\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Finish the footer and address\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Femail-setup-footer.jpg\" alt=\"Email setup & branding: Finish the footer and address\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Finish the footer and address\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Review the tagline, social links and real mailing address, then Save footer. Choose website social links or your own list; review the unsubscribe footer in a test.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The postal address is required for marketing email. The unsubscribe link is part of the email system; do not substitute a visual footer for it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Using website social links keeps email aligned with Menus → Social. Check those destinations before sending.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 6\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Test and review the setup\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Femail-settings.jpg\" alt=\"Email setup & branding: Test and review the setup\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Test and review the setup\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Return to Sending DNS Setup and use Send a test email to inspect your sender, reply-to, branding and footer. Then review the dashboard setup checklist before your first campaign.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A test sends one actual email to the address you choose. Confirm that recipient before using Send test.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Check message links, mobile rendering, sender identity and reply handling. Build and review the campaign audience separately before sending to subscribers.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Send campaigns as hello@yourshow.com, route replies to the inbox you already check, use the show logo as the header and include your mailing address. Verify DNS, then review a test in desktop and mobile inboxes.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"email-setup-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>Sending domain is Verified.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>From email uses that domain and replies reach a real inbox.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Header, social links and mailing address are correct.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>A test message was reviewed before a campaign send.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"email-setup-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>My From email is rejected\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Use an address at the verified sending domain. Put your Gmail or other existing inbox in Reply-to instead.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>Email setup is complete but sending fails\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Review domain verification, sender, mailing address and eligible subscribed recipients on the campaign's checks.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":1972,"question":1973,"answerHtml":1974},"email-dashboard","What do I need to set up before I can send a campaign?","\u003Cp>Open \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Femail\">Email Campaigns\u003C\u002Fa>. It opens on the Dashboard, which lists the steps and marks each one Done from what your account really has:\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Verify your sending domain:\u003C\u002Fstrong> campaigns go out from your own domain, set up once under Config, Sending DNS Setup.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Set your From name and From email:\u003C\u002Fstrong> the address has to be at your sending domain, for example hello@yourdomain.com. A Gmail address does not count.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Add your mailing address:\u003C\u002Fstrong> every campaign shows a postal address in its footer, per the CAN-SPAM Act. It is under Config, Header & Footer.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Add your contacts:\u003C\u002Fstrong> import a list from another email service, or collect signups on your website.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Send your first campaign.\u003C\u002Fstrong>\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003Cp>Each open step has a button that goes to the screen where it is done. These are the same checks the Send button runs, so when the Dashboard says you are all set, a campaign will send. Under the steps are your counts: subscribed contacts, lists and campaigns sent.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Signup confirmations, welcome emails and member sign-in links need none of this. They already go out from a Podspun address with your From name on them.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1976,"question":1977,"answerHtml":1978},"send-a-campaign-test-to-reviewers","How do I send a test of a campaign to other people?","\u003Cp>Open the campaign in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Femail\u002Fcampaigns\">Email Campaigns\u003C\u002Fa> and press Continue to reach the Send screen. Under Send a test to, type one address, or several separated by commas (up to 10), and press Send test. Each person gets their own copy. A test never goes to your list, and it is not counted in the campaign's numbers. It arrives from your own From name and address when your sending domain is verified, the way the campaign will.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Two boxes under it are for a test that other people will review. \u003Cstrong>Test Subject\u003C\u002Fstrong> gives the test its own subject line; leave it empty and the test uses your subject with [Test] in front. \u003Cstrong>Note at the Top\u003C\u002Fstrong> shows a few sentences in a bar above the email, after the words \"NOTE: this is a test only.\", for example a link that is not final yet. The note is in the test only and is never sent to your list.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1980,"question":1981,"answerHtml":1982},"send-a-test-email","How do I send myself a test email?","\u003Cp>In \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Femail\">Email Campaigns\u003C\u002Fa>, open Config and then \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Femail\u002Fconfig\u002Fsending\">Sending DNS Setup\u003C\u002Fa>. Under Send a test email, the box starts with your own login email; change it if you want the test somewhere else, then press Send test. One email goes out using the From name, From email and Reply-to on that screen, whether or not you have saved them, so you can try a change before keeping it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The card then says how the test was sent. If your From email is at a sending domain that shows Verified, it went out from your own address through that domain, the way a campaign does, and the card names the address replies go to. If not, it went out from a Podspun address with your From name on it, the way your automatic emails do, and the card says what a campaign still needs: a sending domain, its DNS records, or a From email at the verified domain (for example hello@yourdomain.com in place of a Gmail address).\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>To see how one campaign looks in an inbox, use Send a test to on that campaign in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Femail\">Email Campaigns\u003C\u002Fa>.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1984,"question":1985,"answerHtml":1986},"where-do-replies-go","Where do replies to my emails go?","\u003Cp>To the Reply-to address you set in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Femail\u002Fconfig\u002Fsending\">Sending DNS Setup\u003C\u002Fa>. Podspun sends your email but does not receive mail for you, so pick a real inbox you already check, like your Gmail or an address on a mail service you run, and every reply goes straight there. If you leave Reply-to blank, replies go to your From email, so that one also needs to be a real inbox you can open. Your website domain needs no receiving setup for this: it only sends.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1988,"question":1989,"answerHtml":1990},"where-do-i-add-dns-records","Where do I add the DNS records?","\u003Cp>At the company that manages your domain’s DNS, which is usually where you bought the domain (GoDaddy, Namecheap, Squarespace, Cloudflare, and so on). In \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Femail\u002Fconfig\u002Fsending\">Sending DNS Setup\u003C\u002Fa>, if your domain is not on Cloudflare, Podspun reads your domain’s settings and names the company for you, with a link to open its control panel. Sign in there, find your domain, open its DNS settings, and add the rows shown. If your domain is on Cloudflare, use the “Add everything to Cloudflare for me” button and it writes them for you. If it is at Dynadot, the page lists Dynadot’s own steps, including the ANAME it uses for the domain itself.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Each Host is shown the way most DNS companies ask for it: the part before your domain (www), and @ for the domain itself. Click a Host or Value to copy it. If your DNS company wants the full name, add your domain to the end.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1992,"question":1993,"answerHtml":1994},"opens-and-clicks","Can I see who opened and clicked my emails?","\u003Cp>Yes. The Campaigns list in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Femail\">Email Campaigns\u003C\u002Fa> shows each campaign's sent, open, and click counts. Unsubscribes are handled automatically through the footer link and the contact's status updates on its own.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":1996,"question":1997,"answerHtml":1998},"turn-email-off","How do I turn Email off?","\u003Cp>Email is on for every account and free for your first 100 contacts, then $9.00\u002Fmonth. To turn it off, open \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Femail\u002Fconfig\u002Fsending\">Email Campaigns → Config → Sending Setup\u003C\u002Fa> and flip Email On to No. Signup collection and sending stop, and so does the monthly charge. Your contacts stay saved, so turning it back on later picks up where you left off.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2000,"question":2001,"answerHtml":2002},"what-is-podcast-email-marketing","What is podcast email marketing?","\u003Cp>It is sending newsletters to the people who follow your show, so you reach them directly instead of hoping an algorithm does. Podspun sends from your own domain, pulls in your latest episodes, and tracks opens and clicks.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2004,"question":2005,"answerHtml":2006},"how-much-does-email-cost","How much does email cost?","\u003Cp>It is billed by active contacts and starts at $9 a month for up to 500, stepping up as your list grows. The band is picked automatically from your live contact count, so you never choose a plan by hand.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2008,"question":2009,"answerHtml":2010},"can-i-send-from-my-own-domain","Can I send from my own domain?","\u003Cp>Yes. Set up your sending domain once and newsletters go out from your name. Podspun handles the authentication that keeps mail in the inbox.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2012,"question":2013,"answerHtml":2014},"can-i-import-contacts-i-already-have","Can I import contacts I already have?","\u003Cp>Yes. Import a CSV of contacts, organize them into lists, and send to the right group. One-click unsubscribes are handled for you.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2016,"question":2017,"answerHtml":2018},"do-i-need-a-separate-tool-like-mailchimp","Do I need a separate tool like Mailchimp?","\u003Cp>No. Email runs inside Podspun next to your site, clips, and search, and the composer pulls your episodes in directly, so there is no second login and no second bill.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2020,"question":2021,"answerHtml":2022},"will-my-newsletters-land-in-the-inbox","Will my newsletters land in the inbox?","\u003Cp>Sending from an authenticated domain is the single biggest factor, and Podspun sets that up. Every email also carries a working unsubscribe, which keeps your sender reputation healthy.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2024,"question":2025,"answerHtml":2026},"what-is-a-paid-newsletter-for-a-podcast","What is a paid newsletter for a podcast?","\u003Cp>It is a set of posts your listeners pay to read, usually companion writing to your episodes: the full story behind a case, extended show notes, or subscriber-only commentary. Free posts and members grow the list; paid posts give your biggest fans a way to support you.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2028,"question":2029,"answerHtml":2030},"is-this-like-substack","Is this like Substack?","\u003Cp>Yes, the model is the same: free and paid subscribers, posts on the web and by email, you set the price. The differences: it lives on your own domain instead of a Substack address, it sits next to your episodes and search, and Podspun drafts posts from your transcripts and your audience's activity instead of leaving you with a blank page. If you already publish on Substack, you can also connect it to Podspun as a channel. If you are starting fresh, this is the newsletter, so you do not need a second platform.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":507,"question":508,"answerHtml":2032},"\u003Cp>Nothing monthly. Podspun takes 1.5% of each paid subscription, the same cut model as the store. Stripe's own card processing applies as with any payment platform.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2034,"question":2035,"answerHtml":2036},"how-do-my-readers-pay","How do my readers pay?","\u003Cp>Through Stripe checkout, at the monthly or annual price you set. The subscription is billed on your own Stripe account, payouts go straight to you, and readers manage or cancel their plan through Stripe's billing portal.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2038,"question":2039,"answerHtml":2040},"how-do-readers-sign-in","How do readers sign in?","\u003Cp>Three ways: a one-time email link with no password, an email and password, or Google. Accounts live on your site under \u002Fmembers, and lost passwords reset through the same email link.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2042,"question":2043,"answerHtml":2044},"can-podspun-really-write-the-posts","Can Podspun really write the posts?","\u003Cp>It drafts them. Each new episode with a transcript can arrive as a companion article, grounded in what was actually said, with links that jump readers to the exact moments in the episode. You read it, edit it, and decide if it publishes. Nothing goes out on its own.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2046,"question":2047,"answerHtml":2048},"do-i-need-a-mailing-list-tool-as-well","Do I need a mailing list tool as well?","\u003Cp>No. Sending a post to your members is built in, and the join form can feed your Podspun email contacts too. If you run bigger campaigns, the Email add-on is there, but Off Mic (Posts) sends on its own.\u003C\u002Fp>",[2050,2070,2080],{"slug":74,"title":75,"entries":2051},[2052,2053,2054,2055,2056,2057,2058,2059,2060,2061,2062,2063,2064,2065,2066,2067,2068,2069],{"slug":1925,"question":1926,"answerHtml":1927,"guideHtml":1928},{"slug":1930,"question":1931,"answerHtml":1932},{"slug":1934,"question":1935,"answerHtml":1936},{"slug":1938,"question":1939,"answerHtml":1940},{"slug":1942,"question":1943,"answerHtml":1944},{"slug":1946,"question":1947,"answerHtml":1948},{"slug":1950,"question":1951,"answerHtml":1952,"guideHtml":1953},{"slug":1955,"question":1956,"answerHtml":1957},{"slug":1959,"question":1960,"answerHtml":1961},{"slug":1963,"question":1964,"answerHtml":1965},{"slug":1967,"question":1968,"answerHtml":1969,"guideHtml":1970},{"slug":1972,"question":1973,"answerHtml":1974},{"slug":1976,"question":1977,"answerHtml":1978},{"slug":1980,"question":1981,"answerHtml":1982},{"slug":1984,"question":1985,"answerHtml":1986},{"slug":1988,"question":1989,"answerHtml":1990},{"slug":1992,"question":1993,"answerHtml":1994},{"slug":1996,"question":1997,"answerHtml":1998},{"slug":2071,"title":2072,"entries":2073},"podcast-email-marketing","Podcast email questions",[2074,2075,2076,2077,2078,2079],{"slug":2000,"question":2001,"answerHtml":2002},{"slug":2004,"question":2005,"answerHtml":2006},{"slug":2008,"question":2009,"answerHtml":2010},{"slug":2012,"question":2013,"answerHtml":2014},{"slug":2016,"question":2017,"answerHtml":2018},{"slug":2020,"question":2021,"answerHtml":2022},{"slug":2081,"title":2082,"entries":2083},"podcast-paid-newsletter","Paid newsletter questions",[2084,2085,2086,2087,2088,2089,2090],{"slug":2024,"question":2025,"answerHtml":2026},{"slug":2028,"question":2029,"answerHtml":2030},{"slug":507,"question":508,"answerHtml":2032},{"slug":2034,"question":2035,"answerHtml":2036},{"slug":2038,"question":2039,"answerHtml":2040},{"slug":2042,"question":2043,"answerHtml":2044},{"slug":2046,"question":2047,"answerHtml":2048},{"slug":2092,"title":2093,"lead":2094,"entries":2095,"groups":2176},"monetize","Earning from your show","Ways your Podspun pages can earn: contextual affiliate ads on your episode pages paid through your own affiliate code, and how YouTube ad revenue works on Podspun.",[2096,2101,2105,2110,2114,2118,2123,2128,2132,2136,2140,2144,2148,2152,2156,2160,2164,2168,2172],{"slug":2097,"question":2098,"answerHtml":2099,"guideHtml":2100},"how-affiliate-ads-work","How do affiliate ads on my episodes work?","\u003Cp>Turn on Show ads in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fmonetize\">Product Affiliate Ads\u003C\u002Fa> and add your affiliate code (your Amazon Associates tag, like yoursite-20). Episode pages then show a product recommendation that follows what is being said and changes as the conversation moves, and purchases through it are credited to your code, so the money is yours. Podspun does not take a cut.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>This is separate from the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Faffiliates\">Referral Affiliate Program\u003C\u002Fa>, which pays you for sending new customers to Podspun. One product-ad setting can cover everything, or use Set ads separately to control podspun.com and each of your websites individually.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-affiliates\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">Memberships & Income · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Recommend things you love.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>Use your own retailer tracking links for product recommendations and review where they appear.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"Product Ads sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#affiliates-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#affiliates-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#affiliates-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#affiliates-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"affiliates-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Product Ads are outward links to another retailer using your own affiliate tracking. They are separate from a native store product sold through your Stripe connection and from the Podspun referral program.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"affiliates-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Open Product Ads\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Faffiliates-1.jpg\" alt=\"Product Ads: Open Product Ads\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Open Product Ads\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Under Income, open Product Ads and review the available product\u002Fad settings for your account and website.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Choose an affiliate recommendation when the visitor will buy from the external retailer. Use Store products when you are selling and fulfilling your own item.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>You need the retailer or network's own approved tracking details. Podspun does not invent an affiliate code for you.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Set your retailer tracking\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Faffiliates-2.jpg\" alt=\"Product Ads: Set your retailer tracking\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Set your retailer tracking\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Enter your own tracking details in the relevant retailer fields and save. Check whether you are changing account defaults or a particular website's settings.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Use the code issued to you by the retailer. An ordinary product URL and a tracked affiliate URL are not always equivalent.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Review the website-specific override before assuming all sites use the same code. Keep your affiliate disclosure appropriate for the placement.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Review the public placement\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Faffiliates-3.jpg\" alt=\"Product Ads: Review the public placement\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Review the public placement\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Preview the product recommendation or ad placement on the intended website. Open the outgoing link and check the destination and tracking.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Give visitors an accurate description and image for the product. A recommendation should be useful beside the content where it appears.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>External sales and commissions are tracked by the retailer\u002Fnetwork; native Store orders and Podspun referrals are different systems.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Add your own approved retailer code, review the recommendation beside relevant content and confirm that its link opens the right product with your tracking intact.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"affiliates-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>The affiliate program and tracking belong to you.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Account defaults and site overrides are understood.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Public links reach the correct retailer product.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>The placement and disclosure are clear.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"affiliates-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>I do not have an affiliate code\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Apply to the retailer or network; use the approved code it gives you.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>I expected these purchases in Store orders\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Product Ads send buyers to another retailer. Native store orders are purchases handled through your own store checkout.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":2102,"question":2103,"answerHtml":2104},"do-i-need-my-own-affiliate-code","Do I need my own affiliate code to show ads?","\u003Cp>To earn from product affiliate ads, yes: sign up for Amazon Associates and paste your tag into \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fmonetize\">Product Affiliate Ads\u003C\u002Fa>. On podspun.com, a blank code means no ad shows at all, so you never promote products without earning. On your own websites, a blank code falls back to Podspun's code until you add yours.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>This Amazon code is unrelated to the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Faffiliates\">Referral Affiliate Program\u003C\u002Fa>, where you share a Podspun referral link and Podspun pays you when referred customers subscribe.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2106,"question":2107,"answerHtml":2108,"guideHtml":2109},"footer-credit-referral-code","Does the Podspun credit in my site's footer use my referral code?","\u003Cp>Only when you turn it on. Every website hosted on Podspun shows a small Powered by Podspun, a Heroic Company credit in its footer, and its Podspun link is a plain link unless you choose otherwise. A Visual Artist website says Powered by Artspun, a Heroic Company, and its Artspun link opens the Artspun page.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>To make that link your referral link, open \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Faffiliates\">Referral Affiliate Program\u003C\u002Fa> and tick Carry my code on my sites' footer credits. It applies to every site in the account, and you can turn it off again in the same place.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-referrals\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">Memberships & Income · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Pass Podspun along.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>Find your referral code, understand the credit and track the accounts you refer.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"Podspun referrals sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#referrals-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#referrals-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#referrals-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#referrals-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"referrals-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Podspun referrals concern new Podspun accounts, not your own store sales or retailer affiliate links. Read the current referral terms and status in your account before describing a credit to someone.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"referrals-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Find your referral code\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Freferrals-1.jpg\" alt=\"Podspun referrals: Find your referral code\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Find your referral code\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Under Income, open Podspun Referrals. Review your code and the referral information displayed for your account.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Use your account's own code. Keep the link intact so the referral can be attributed correctly.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Read the current program details rather than promising a fixed reward from an old screenshot.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Choose where to share it\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Freferrals-2.jpg\" alt=\"Podspun referrals: Choose where to share it\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Choose where to share it\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Use the referral link where you actually recommend Podspun. Review the optional Podspun footer credit settings when using a website credit for referrals.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Keep the recommendation clear and identify Podspun as the destination. A referral link is not an invitation to your private Cloud account.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Sharing your link is a separate communication action; choose the audience and channel intentionally.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Review referral status\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Freferrals-3.jpg\" alt=\"Podspun referrals: Review referral status\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Review referral status\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Return to Podspun Referrals to review attributed accounts and any displayed credit or reward status.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Distinguish an attributed signup from a qualified or credited referral. Follow the status and terms shown by the program.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Ask support about a missing attribution with the relevant public referral details; do not expose your private account credentials.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Use your referral link in a recommendation for another creator, then review the account's referral status after they sign up under the program's terms.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"referrals-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>The link contains your own referral code.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>The recommendation and destination are clear.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Current terms are understood.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Attributed and qualified referral states are distinguished.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"referrals-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>A signup is not shown\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Check that the full referral link was used and review the program's current attribution rules.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>I want commission on a retailer product\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Use Product Ads and the retailer's own affiliate tracking; that is separate from Podspun referrals.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":2111,"question":2112,"answerHtml":2113},"earn-from-youtube-ads","Can I still earn YouTube ad revenue on Podspun?","\u003Cp>Yes, if your source is YouTube and the channel is set to Ads play under How videos play in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fcollection\">Podspun.com Setup\u003C\u002Fa>. That mode uses YouTube's standard player, the kind YouTube runs ads on, and the revenue flows to YouTube and you exactly as it does on youtube.com. Podspun takes no share. See the full answer under Will my YouTube video ads run on Podspun.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2115,"question":2116,"answerHtml":2117},"affiliate-listings","How do I show products that link out to another retailer?","\u003Cp>Open \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fcommerce\u002Faffiliate\">Affiliate Listings\u003C\u002Fa> under Store & Donations and click Add listing. Give it a title, photos, the retailer's name, the retailer's link, and the price as the retailer shows it, then set it to Active. Affiliate listings show with or without a Stripe connection, because the card opens the retailer in a new tab and never goes through your cart. Only your own products need Stripe.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>To put them on a page, add or edit a Store Products Grid block and set its Source to Affiliate listings or Both. Group listings with collections (made under \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fcommerce\u002Fsettings\">Store Settings\u003C\u002Fa>, Affiliate Collections) and the block can show one collection at a time. Every card says Sold by and the retailer's name, and any page that shows one carries a short affiliate disclosure line. Available From and Available Until hide a listing outside a window, so a seasonal pick drops off on its own.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Amazon links carry your own Amazon Associates tag from \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fmonetize\">Product Affiliate Ads\u003C\u002Fa>, added when the page renders. The link you pasted is stored as is, so any tracking the retailer added stays on it. Links to other retailers are never changed.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2119,"question":2120,"answerHtml":2121,"guideHtml":2122},"open-a-store","How do I sell products on my website?","\u003Cp>Open \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fcommerce\">Store & Donations\u003C\u002Fa> in your account. Connect a Stripe account under Payments (money goes straight to your own Stripe, and one connection also powers donations and paid memberships), add products under Products (physical or digital, with options like size and color, photos, and stock counts), then turn the store on in Store Settings. Your website gets a store page automatically, and the Store Designer lets you arrange it in your site's own look. Product details include a breadcrumb trail above the images and purchase options, with links to Home and Shop followed by the product name. This also appears in the Product block in custom product layouts. Orders arrive under Orders, where you mark them shipped or refund them; digital products deliver themselves by email. You can set the store up while your site is still a preview; checkout opens when the site is turned on.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The store costs nothing monthly. Podspun's share per sale falls as you sell more in a month (5% on the first $500 a month, 3% to $2,000, then 1.5%), plus card processing.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-store\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">Memberships & Income · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Turn your work into a storefront.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>Set up products, payments, shipping and your store presentation, then manage real orders in one place.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"Your store sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#store-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#store-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#store-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#store-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"store-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Decide what you sell, whether it is physical or digital, its price and fulfilment process. Payment Setup supplies the shared Stripe connection for your store, donations and memberships. Previewing a store and accepting real checkout are different stages.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"store-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Connect payments\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fpayments-1.jpg\" alt=\"Your store: Connect payments\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Connect payments\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Payment Setup and connect your own Stripe account using the displayed flow. Review the connection status before relying on checkout.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Payments go through your Stripe connection. Complete its required business and payout setup, and read any provider terms before accepting them.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Use the same payment setup for the site's store, donations and memberships rather than creating separate connections for each feature.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Open your store\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fstore-open.jpg\" alt=\"Your store: Open your store\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Open your store\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Store & Donations → Store Settings and turn Store On when you are ready to configure it. Read the displayed store and payment fees before enabling it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Enabling the store saves immediately. The store remains unavailable for purchases until the website and Stripe connection are ready.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Review Details, Shipping and Tax separately. Enabling a store does not create a product or establish your fulfilment policies.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Create the product catalog\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fstore-1.jpg\" alt=\"Your store: Create the product catalog\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Create the product catalog\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Store & Donations → Products. Add the product's title, description, price, pictures and physical or digital details.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Review options\u002Fvariants, stock and availability where relevant. A product picture should show the item being sold rather than unrelated website artwork.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>For digital goods, check the delivery file. For physical goods, make sure the description and fulfilment information are clear before publishing.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 4\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Set store policies and fulfilment\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fstore-2.jpg\" alt=\"Your store: Set store policies and fulfilment\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Set store policies and fulfilment\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Store Settings. Review the store page, currency, categories, policies and order emails. Configure Shipping and Tax for your actual sales requirements.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Use the settings tabs for their separate jobs; review shipping zones and thresholds before offering delivery to a destination.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Check whether prices include tax and whether shipping is taxed. Use your own applicable settings rather than copying a generic example rate.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 5\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Design the storefront\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fstore-3.jpg\" alt=\"Your store: Design the storefront\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Design the storefront\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Store Designer and Product Page to review the catalog and individual product presentation. Preview image fitting, product information and the purchase controls.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Choose the store layout through the shared website design controls so it fits the rest of your site.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Use concise, accurate product details and clear category names. Preview long names, multiple pictures and a sold-out product.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 6\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Review checkout and orders\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fstore-4.jpg\" alt=\"Your store: Review checkout and orders\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Review checkout and orders\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Review each product’s Status: Draft stays private; Active appears in the store. When payments and the website are ready for live sales, verify the public purchase flow deliberately. Use Orders to review payment and fulfilment for real orders.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A preview alone does not prove live checkout is active. Checkout requires the site to be on and the payment connection ready.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Fulfil, refund or cancel only the intended order. Financial actions change a real customer's transaction; reviewing an order is separate from carrying out those actions.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Create a signed-print product with pictures and stock, set the shipping destinations you serve, review store policies and preview the product page. Confirm payment readiness before making the store available to customers.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"store-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>Stripe and checkout readiness are verified.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Product, price, options and stock are correct.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Shipping, tax and policies match your business.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>The public storefront and order process were reviewed.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"store-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>A preview shows a store but checkout is unavailable\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Check site activation and Payment Setup. A design preview can exist before live checkout is ready.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>A product is difficult to buy\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Review availability, variant selection, shipping destinations and the product-page presentation.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":2124,"question":2125,"answerHtml":2126,"guideHtml":2127},"take-donations","How do I take donations on my website?","\u003Cp>Open \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fcommerce\u002Fdonations\">Store & Donations\u003C\u002Fa> in your account and turn donations on. You choose the suggested amounts, whether monthly and yearly giving are offered, and whether supporters can leave a note or appear on a public supporters list. Your website gets a donate page automatically, and the Donate block can put a giving card on any page.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Donations need the same Stripe connection as the store (set up under Payments). Gifts go to your own Stripe account; Podspun's share is 1.5%. Receipts live under Receipts, and recurring gifts can be canceled from the receipt's link.\u003C\u002Fp>","\u003Carticle class=\"help-guide\" id=\"guide-donations\">\u003Cheader>\u003Cp class=\"help-guide__eyebrow\">Memberships & Income · Full walkthrough\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Ch2>Let people support what you do.\u003C\u002Fh2>\u003Cp>Build your donation appeal with suggested amounts, recurring support and your own Stripe connection.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fheader>\n    \u003Cnav class=\"help-guide__contents\" aria-label=\"Donations & supporters sections\">\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#donations-before\">Before you start\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#donations-steps\">Walkthrough\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#donations-review\">Review checklist\u003C\u002Fa>\u003Ca class=\"hover-link\" href=\"#donations-help\">If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fnav>\n    \u003Csection id=\"donations-before\">\u003Ch3>Before you start\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Decide what support funds and whether you want one-off, monthly or yearly options. Use Payment Setup for your own Stripe connection. Publish a clear appeal so donors understand what their support means.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cdiv id=\"donations-steps\" class=\"help-guide__steps\">\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 1\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Check the shared payment connection\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fpayments-1.jpg\" alt=\"Donations & supporters: Check the shared payment connection\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Check the shared payment connection\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Payment Setup and review Stripe connection readiness. Donations use the same payment connection as the store and memberships.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Review provider setup before accepting payments. A donation page design can be previewed before the website and checkout are live.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Confirm that the intended account will receive payments; do not reconnect a different account casually.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 2\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Write the appeal and choose amounts\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fdonations-1.jpg\" alt=\"Donations & supporters: Write the appeal and choose amounts\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Write the appeal and choose amounts\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Open Store & Donations → Donations. Switch Accept Donations on to reveal the settings. Set the heading, message and suggested amounts, review recurring options, then Save the reviewed configuration.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Make the purpose concrete and keep the amount choices understandable. Review which one-off, monthly or yearly choices visitors will see.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Use the available settings for donor notes and public supporter display. Explain the choice clearly rather than exposing a donor's details unexpectedly.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 3\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Place and preview the donation experience\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fdonations-2.jpg\" alt=\"Donations & supporters: Place and preview the donation experience\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Place and preview the donation experience\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Review the donation page or add the donation block to the intended page. Check the appeal, amounts, recurrence choices and presentation at narrow widths.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Choose the placement based on the visitor's context: a support page can hold the full explanation, while a block can invite support beside relevant content.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Check payment readiness before inviting live donations. A visible donation button alone is not proof that payment setup is complete.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003Csection class=\"help-guide__step\">\u003Cspan class=\"help-guide__step-label\">Step 4\u003C\u002Fspan>\u003Ch3>Review receipts and ongoing support\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cfigure class=\"help-guide__figure\">\u003Cimg src=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Fassets\u002Fguides\u002Fdonations-3.jpg\" alt=\"Donations & supporters: Review receipts and ongoing support\" loading=\"lazy\" decoding=\"async\"\u002F>\u003Cfigcaption>Review receipts and ongoing support\u003C\u002Ffigcaption>\u003C\u002Ffigure>\u003Cp>Configure the Thank You Message visitors see after donating and Save. Use Receipts to review real donation records and check how recurring supporters can manage or cancel their support.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Keep one-off and recurring support distinct when reviewing records. Do not treat a monthly pledge as a one-off donation.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A refund or cancellation affects a real payment. Review the intended record carefully before performing either action.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fsection>\u003C\u002Fdiv>\n    \u003Caside class=\"help-guide__example\">\u003Ch3>Try this\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cp>Create a support page explaining how donations fund the next season. Offer clear one-off and recurring choices, preview the page and verify payment readiness before promoting it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Faside>\n    \u003Csection id=\"donations-review\">\u003Ch3>Review checklist\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>The appeal explains what support funds.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Suggested amounts and recurrence choices are correct.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Payment setup is ready for live donations.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>Receipt and recurring-support management are understood.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Csection id=\"donations-help\">\u003Ch3>If you get stuck\u003C\u002Fh3>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>The donation design appears but payment fails\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Review Payment Setup and website activation, then the current donation settings.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003Cdetails class=\"help-guide__problem\">\u003Csummary>A donor asks about recurring support\u003C\u002Fsummary>\u003Cp>Check their receipt and recurrence before explaining the available management or cancellation link.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Fdetails>\u003C\u002Fsection>\n    \u003Cp class=\"help-guide__start\">\u003Ca class=\"btn-link\" href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\">Try it in Podspun Cloud ↗\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>\u003C\u002Farticle>",{"slug":2129,"question":2130,"answerHtml":2131},"sell-a-preorder","How do I sell a product as a preorder?","\u003Cp>Open the product under \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fcommerce\">Store & Donations\u003C\u002Fa>, Products, and in the Drop section set Preorder to Yes. Type the expected shipping in Ships By as a plain phrase or date (for example, late November 2026); buyers see it as Ships by late November 2026. Save the product.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A preorder is bought like any product: the button reads Preorder instead of Add To Cart, payment is taken at checkout through your connected Stripe, and the order arrives under Orders for you to ship when the goods are ready. Stock counts still apply, so a preorder with a Stock of 0 shows Sold out. A preorder can also have an opening and closing time.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2133,"question":2134,"answerHtml":2135},"store-promo-codes","How do I make a promo code for my store?","\u003Cp>Open \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fcommerce\u002Fpromos\">Promo Codes\u003C\u002Fa> under Store & Donations and click Add promo code. Type the code buyers will enter, like FANGORIA20, choose Percent off or Amount off, and set Status to Active. The discount comes off the products in the cart. Shipping and tax are never discounted, and tax is worked out on the discounted amount.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Starts and Ends limit a code to a window, so a campaign code stops working on its own. Partner names the outlet or campaign a code belongs to, and the list shows the paid orders and sales for each code. Each code has a partner link: a visitor who opens it has the code applied in their cart, and a buyer can also type the code in the cart. Checkout checks the code again, so a code set back to Draft or archived stops working right away. Orders that used a code show the discount and the code under \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fcommerce\u002Forders\">Orders\u003C\u002Fa>.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2137,"question":2138,"answerHtml":2139},"product-badges","How do I put a label like Exclusive on a product card?","\u003Cp>Open the product in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fcommerce\u002Fproducts\">Products\u003C\u002Fa> (or the listing in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fcommerce\u002Faffiliate\">Affiliate Listings\u003C\u002Fa>) and type a short word or phrase in Badge, like Festival edition or Exclusive. It shows at the top of the card in your site's accent color.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Each item takes one badge, so the label stays readable. Leave Badge empty for no label.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2141,"question":2142,"answerHtml":2143},"split-the-store-into-sections","How do I show different groups of my products in separate sections?","\u003Cp>Make a category for each group in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fcommerce\u002Fsettings\">Store Settings\u003C\u002Fa>, then file each product under its category in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fcommerce\u002Fproducts\">Products\u003C\u002Fa>.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>On the page, add a Store Products Grid block for each group, set Source to Your products, and pick the group in Merch Category. For example, one grid for festival merch and another for your everyday line.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Give each grid a Heading and, if you like, an Intro: one line under the heading saying what the group is. The heading, the line and the products then read as one section.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>When the grids are groups inside one larger section, such as several partner shops under one Affiliate Store heading, set each grid's Heading Size to Subsection. Its heading then shows smaller than the section titles, so a group reads as part of the section above it. Offer Grid blocks have the same setting.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A grid with nothing to show a visitor leaves the public page, heading and Intro included. That is the case for your own products until Stripe is connected under Payments: they show on your preview address and stay hidden on your real domain. A heading that should show either way belongs in a text block above the grid.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2145,"question":2146,"answerHtml":2147},"schedule-a-product-drop","How do I set a product to open and close at a set time (a drop)?","\u003Cp>Open \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fcommerce\">Store & Donations\u003C\u002Fa>, go to Products, and open the product. In the Drop section choose the Time Zone the times are typed in, then set Opens On and Opens At, and, if the sale has an end, Closes On and Closes At. Save the product. Leave both blank to keep selling with no end.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Before the opening time the store shows when the drop opens and takes no orders; after the closing time it shows Ended. Both are checked again at checkout, so a cart that was filled early or late is refused with the opening time or the words This drop has ended. A checkout that started while the drop was open keeps its payment window and can finish even if the close passes during it. Edition Size (for example, Edition of 50) is shown to buyers as information; the Stock count is what stops sales.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2149,"question":2150,"answerHtml":2151},"what-buyers-see-during-a-drop","What do buyers see before, during, and after a drop?","\u003Cp>Every store surface (the product card, the product page, and the Drop block) shows the same state, worked out from the product's opening and closing times, its stock, and its Preorder setting, in this order:\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cul>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Before it opens:\u003C\u002Fstrong> a clock panel marked Upcoming, with the opening time in the visitor's own time zone and a large countdown in days, hours, minutes and seconds, and no buy button. The Drop block can show an Email me when it opens link here.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Open:\u003C\u002Fstrong> Add To Cart, and when a closing time is set, the same clock panel marked Open now (Closing soon in its last two days) counting down to the close.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Preorder:\u003C\u002Fstrong> the same, with the button reading Preorder and the line Ships by followed by your phrase.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Sold out:\u003C\u002Fstrong> the words Sold out and nothing to press. Under Store Settings, Sold Out can hide sold-out products from the store grid instead.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003Cli>\u003Cstrong>Ended:\u003C\u002Fstrong> the words Ended (This drop has ended on the product page) and nothing to press.\u003C\u002Fli>\u003C\u002Ful>\u003Cp>A visitor watching the page sees the button appear at the opening time and disappear at the closing time without reloading. Checkout applies the same rule on the server.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2153,"question":2154,"answerHtml":2155},"drop-block","How do I put a drop on a page with a countdown and an alert-me button?","\u003Cp>Open the page in the editor, add the Drop block (in the Store section of the block picker), and choose the Product. The block shows the product's first photo, its title (or the Heading you type), the Story written on the product, its edition size, its opening and closing times in the visitor's time zone, a countdown, and the action for where the drop stands: Add To Cart, Preorder, or, before it opens, an Email me when it opens link.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Choose a list under Alert Me List to show that link before the opening time. A visitor who is not signed in gets your website's Join pop-up, which names the drop and has that list ticked; a signed-in member asks in one click. When the drop opens, each of them gets one email on its own, with the product's picture and a button to the drop. The product's Drop section lists everyone waiting, and they are in your \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Femail\u002Fcontacts\">Contacts\u003C\u002Fa>. Leave Alert Me List blank to show no link. Set Show Story to No to show only the price, the times, and the action. The buy button needs your Stripe connected under Payments; the alert link does not.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2157,"question":2158,"answerHtml":2159},"auction-create-a-lot","How do I run a timed auction on my website?","\u003Cp>Open \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fcommerce\u002Fauctions\">Auctions\u003C\u002Fa> under Store & Donations and click Add lot. A lot is one item up for bidding: give it a title, photos from your assets, a description, and its provenance and condition. Set the Starting Amount, an optional Reserve, and the Bid Increment in your store currency, then choose the Time Zone and the opening and closing date and time. Save it as a draft, use Put in preview to show it on the site without bidding, and click Open bidding when you are ready.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Every lot gets its own page at \u002Fauctions\u002F<lot>, and your site's Auctions page lists every visible lot after its own content. The Auction Lots block puts lot cards on any page, either every lot open for bidding or lots you choose. Lots show with or without a Stripe connection; only the winner's payment needs one, set up under \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fcommerce\u002Fpayments\">Payments\u003C\u002Fa>.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2161,"question":2162,"answerHtml":2163},"auction-reserve-and-increments","How do the reserve and the bid increment work?","\u003Cp>The Starting Amount is the smallest first bid. After that, every bid must beat the current high bid by at least the Bid Increment. The lot page always shows the minimum next bid, and a bid below it is refused with that number.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A Reserve is the lowest amount you will sell for. Bidders see that a reserve exists, never the figure. Bids below the reserve are still taken, so bidding can build toward it; at the close, the lot sells only if the winning bid reaches the reserve, and otherwise it ends Unsold. Leave the Reserve blank for a no-reserve lot.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Once you click Open bidding, the starting amount, reserve, increment, window, and soft-close settings are locked. The only change allowed after that is extending the close, and that extension is recorded on the lot and shown to bidders.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2165,"question":2166,"answerHtml":2167},"auction-soft-close","What is the soft close, and why did a lot's closing time move?","\u003Cp>The soft close stops a last-second bid from ending an auction before anyone can answer it. Each lot has a Soft Close Window and an Extend By value, both in minutes, and both set before bidding opens. When a bid lands inside the last window's worth of minutes, the close moves to that moment plus the Extend By value. That can happen more than once; bidding ends when a full window passes with no new bid.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Every extension is recorded on the lot and appears in the bid history, and the lot page tells bidders that a late bid extends the close. The scheduled closing time you set never changes; what moves is the effective close. Set the Soft Close Window to 0 to turn the soft close off for a lot.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Closing is handled on the server, on a schedule, whether or not anyone is looking at the page. A bid that arrives after the close is refused, and a bid that arrives in the same instant as the close either extends it or is refused, never both.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2169,"question":2170,"answerHtml":2171},"auction-what-bidders-see","What do bidders see, and do they need an account?","\u003Cp>Bidders are members of your website. A free member account is enough: on a lot page a signed-out visitor sees a Sign in to bid card, enters their email, and the sign-in link brings them straight back to the lot. No password is needed. Manage members under \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fpaidposts\">Members\u003C\u002Fa>.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>The lot page shows the photos, description, provenance and condition, the current bid or the starting amount, the number of bids, the closing time in the visitor's own time zone with the auction's zone named beside it, the minimum next bid, the state (Preview, Open, Closed, Unsold, Awaiting payment, Settled, or Canceled), your fulfillment terms, and the bid history. History shows each bidder under an alias (a first name and initial, or Bidder and a number), never an email. The page refreshes itself every 20 seconds while bidding is open and says so if a refresh fails.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A bidder who is outbid gets an email with a link back to the lot. Your own view of the bid history, under Auctions, shows every bid asked for, accepted or refused, with the member's email beside the alias.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2173,"question":2174,"answerHtml":2175},"auction-winner-payment","How does the winner pay, and what happens if they do not?","\u003Cp>When a lot closes with a winning bid at or above the reserve, the winner is awarded the lot and emailed a Pay now link. The lot page shows the same button to that member and nobody else. Payment runs through Stripe on your own connected account, for exactly the winning amount, and the winner has the lot's Payment Window (72 hours unless you set another value) to pay. A physical lot collects a shipping address at payment; put shipping and delivery terms in the lot's Fulfillment Terms and Shipping Note, since no shipping charge is added to the bid.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Once paid, the lot shows as Settled, the winner gets the usual receipt, and the order appears under \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fcommerce\u002Forders\">Orders\u003C\u002Fa> like any store order, marked as an auction. Podspun's share is the same per-sale cut as a store sale.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>If the deadline passes unpaid, the award expires and the lot lands in Unpaid awards on the \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fcommerce\u002Fauctions\">Auctions\u003C\u002Fa> page. Nothing happens automatically: there is no second-chance offer and no charge. Contact the bidder, relist the item as a new lot, or click Mark handled to take it off the list. Canceling a lot keeps its record and voids a pending award; a paid lot is refunded from the order, never by canceling the lot.\u003C\u002Fp>",[2177,2186,2196,2203],{"slug":2178,"title":2179,"entries":2180},"affiliate-ads","Affiliate ads",[2181,2182,2183,2184,2185],{"slug":2097,"question":2098,"answerHtml":2099,"guideHtml":2100},{"slug":2102,"question":2103,"answerHtml":2104},{"slug":2106,"question":2107,"answerHtml":2108,"guideHtml":2109},{"slug":2111,"question":2112,"answerHtml":2113},{"slug":2115,"question":2116,"answerHtml":2117},{"slug":2187,"title":2188,"entries":2189},"store-and-donations","Store and donations",[2190,2191,2192,2193,2194,2195],{"slug":2119,"question":2120,"answerHtml":2121,"guideHtml":2122},{"slug":2124,"question":2125,"answerHtml":2126,"guideHtml":2127},{"slug":2129,"question":2130,"answerHtml":2131},{"slug":2133,"question":2134,"answerHtml":2135},{"slug":2137,"question":2138,"answerHtml":2139},{"slug":2141,"question":2142,"answerHtml":2143},{"slug":2197,"title":2198,"entries":2199},"drops","Drops",[2200,2201,2202],{"slug":2145,"question":2146,"answerHtml":2147},{"slug":2149,"question":2150,"answerHtml":2151},{"slug":2153,"question":2154,"answerHtml":2155},{"slug":2204,"title":2205,"entries":2206},"auctions","Auctions",[2207,2208,2209,2210,2211],{"slug":2157,"question":2158,"answerHtml":2159},{"slug":2161,"question":2162,"answerHtml":2163},{"slug":2165,"question":2166,"answerHtml":2167},{"slug":2169,"question":2170,"answerHtml":2171},{"slug":2173,"question":2174,"answerHtml":2175},{"slug":2213,"title":2214,"lead":2215,"entries":2216,"groups":2261},"managing","Account and managing your site","Syncing and update speed, feed filters, hiding episodes, fixing transcripts, how your data is used with AI, YouTube ads, contacting support, and what happens if you leave.",[2217,2221,2225,2229,2233,2237,2241,2245,2249,2253,2257],{"slug":2218,"question":2219,"answerHtml":2220},"how-fast-do-new-episodes-update","How fast does Podspun update new episodes?","\u003Cp>Your show syncs automatically every night after you connect it, whether it is a YouTube channel, an Apple Podcasts show, or an RSS feed. Podspun also updates transcripts and auto-generated highlights, summaries, and other insights. No extra work needed.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2222,"question":2223,"answerHtml":2224},"private-or-unlisted-episodes","Does Podspun work with private or unlisted episodes?","\u003Cp>Podspun only pulls in your public episodes, but you still have control over what shows up. You can hide any episodes you don't want on your Podspun site, so even public videos can stay behind the curtain if you'd like.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2226,"question":2227,"answerHtml":2228},"wrong-or-missing-transcript","What if my transcript is wrong or missing?","\u003Cp>Episodes play audio or video directly on the episode page, including in previews before a transcript is ready. Select the audio cover to play or pause it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Podspun pulls the transcript from your source where one exists (YouTube, Apple Podcasts, or your RSS feed). When a source has no transcript, the Dataweaver transcribes the audio for you. If a word looks off, the cleanest fix is to correct it at the source so the next sync picks it up. If you connected by RSS or Apple Podcasts and need a correction, email us at \u003Ca href=\"mailto:hello@podspun.com\">hello@podspun.com\u003C\u002Fa> and we'll help.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2230,"question":2231,"answerHtml":2232},"why-wont-some-episodes-transcribe","Why do some episodes say they won't transcribe?","\u003Cp>A few episodes have no captions at the source and no audio Podspun can fetch to transcribe. The Dataweaver keeps retrying for about a week after import, then marks them so they stop holding up your channel's progress. The channel's Transcribed stat in \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Fchannels\">Podspun Dataweaver\u003C\u002Fa> shows the count. Those episodes still appear on your site; they just have no searchable transcript. If captions appear at the source later, a re-sync picks them up.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2234,"question":2235,"answerHtml":2236},"what-is-the-alerts-page","What is the Alerts page?","\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fcloud.podspun.com\u002Faccount\u002Ftodos\">Checklist\u003C\u002Fa> is one list of everything left to set up, for your account and for each of your websites. A ring shows how many tasks are done. Anything that needs attention (a failed charge, a preview about to lock) comes first, then the single next step, then a card per website with its own launch tasks, then the remaining tasks grouped as Most important and Nice to have. Finished tasks collapse into Done. The number beside Checklist in the sidebar is how many tasks are still open. An optional task, such as bringing channels into the Dataweaver, has a Dismiss button: a dismissed task leaves the list and the count, and moves to Dismissed at the bottom, where Put back returns it. A website's Overview shows the same tasks for that site until they are all done.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2238,"question":2239,"answerHtml":2240},"what-this-website-is-site-types","What does the What this website is setting do?","\u003Cp>Every website has a What this website is section in Site Settings, with four choices: Podcast, Social Media, Artist, and Filmmaker. Each choice adds the pages and blocks that kind of site starts with, and more than one can be on. Turning a choice on adds its pages; nothing you already have is removed.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>A site made before this setting existed shows its current behavior pre-checked, with a note saying so. Nothing on the live site changes until you save. Saving a type the site already had only records it; new pages are created only when you newly turn a type on.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2242,"question":2243,"answerHtml":2244},"how-is-my-data-used-with-ai","How does Podspun use my data with AI?","\u003Cp>Podspun uses your data only to power AI questions in that session, and does not store the results.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2246,"question":2247,"answerHtml":2248},"will-my-youtube-ads-run","Will my YouTube video ads run on Podspun?","\u003Cp>Only when your source is YouTube, and only when the channel is set to Ads play. Each YouTube channel has a How videos play setting (in Podspun.com Setup) with three modes.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Normal play uses our interactive player with the live synced transcript; YouTube does not run ads on that kind of player. Ads play uses YouTube's standard click-to-play player, which is the kind YouTube can run ads on, so pick this if ad revenue matters (the trade-off is the transcript no longer highlights live). Link out to YouTube sends viewers to YouTube to watch.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>When ads do run, the revenue goes to YouTube and the video owner. Podspun does not add, control, sell, or take a share. Even on Ads play, YouTube decides ad availability play by play, so no single play is guaranteed an ad, and your video needs to be monetized in YouTube Studio.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2250,"question":2251,"answerHtml":2252},"if-i-leave-do-i-lose-anything","If I leave Podspun, do I lose anything?","\u003Cp>Your published episodes stay where they already live on YouTube, Apple, or your RSS host. Podspun reads from them, it does not hold them. Cancel a website or an API key any time and the underlying shows are still yours.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2254,"question":2255,"answerHtml":2256},"delete-my-account","How do I delete my account?","\u003Cp>You can deactivate channels within your account login. Or email us at \u003Ca href=\"mailto:hello@podspun.com\">hello@podspun.com\u003C\u002Fa> and we'll take care of it.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2258,"question":2259,"answerHtml":2260},"contact-for-billing-or-tech-issues","Who do I contact for billing or tech issues?","\u003Cp>Send a message to \u003Ca href=\"mailto:hello@podspun.com\">hello@podspun.com\u003C\u002Fa> and we'll help you out.\u003C\u002Fp>",[],{"slug":2263,"title":2264,"lead":2265,"entries":2266,"groups":2271},"about","About Podspun","Who is behind Podspun and where it came from.",[2267],{"slug":2268,"question":2269,"answerHtml":2270},"who-built-podspun","Who built Podspun?","\u003Cp>Your friends at \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fpodspun.com\u002Fabout-us\">Heroic\u003C\u002Fa>. It began as a personal passion project built with great love. Podspun is a two-time Webby honoree, recognized at the 30th Annual Webby Awards for the innovations we build for creators.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>Read more \u003Ca href=\"https:\u002F\u002Fpodspun.com\u002Fabout-us\">about Podspun\u003C\u002Fa>.\u003C\u002Fp>",[],{"slug":2273,"title":2274,"lead":2275,"entries":2276,"groups":2299},"creators","Creators and influencers","Your social channels, personal brand, and website.",[2277,2279,2283,2287,2291,2295],{"slug":932,"question":933,"answerHtml":2278},"\u003Cp>Yes. Open Site Editor Chat in your website editor and ask for article ideas. It reads your Instagram and TikTok posts, the places and topics they cover, the articles already on your site, and what visitors searched for. Pick an idea and it writes a full article from those posts, with your photos placed where they fit, a search title, and a description. It saves as a draft until you publish it.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2280,"question":2281,"answerHtml":2282},"why-do-i-need-a-website-if-i-post-on-social","Why do I need a website if I post on social?","\u003Cp>A post inside an app is hard to find from outside it. It does not rank in Google, it is awkward to link to, and an AI answer engine cannot read it. A page on your own domain does all three, and it stays yours if an account goes down.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2284,"question":2285,"answerHtml":2286},"does-it-keep-importing-as-i-post","Does it keep importing as I post?","\u003Cp>Yes. New posts appear on the site on their own, with their page and their words in the search index.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2288,"question":2289,"answerHtml":2290},"can-i-keep-some-posts-off-the-site","Can I keep some posts off the site?","\u003Cp>Yes. Import everything and filter what the site displays, so you decide what shows without losing the record.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2292,"question":2293,"answerHtml":2294},"can-i-connect-a-podcast-too","Can I connect a podcast too?","\u003Cp>Yes. Social accounts and a podcast feed share one catalog and one website, so an episode and a reel sit on the same site and the same search index.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2296,"question":2297,"answerHtml":2298},"what-about-my-older-episodes-and-posts","What about my older episodes and posts?","\u003Cp>The whole account comes in. Yearly billing includes 1,600 items across every channel for $313.20 per year. Each additional 100-item yearly band costs $16.20 for a full year and is prorated through renewal when added mid-term. Monthly billing is $29 per month with 800 items included, then $1.50 per 100 items when imported and each month afterward.\u003C\u002Fp>",[2300],{"slug":2273,"title":799,"entries":2301},[2302,2303,2304,2305,2306,2307],{"slug":932,"question":933,"answerHtml":2278},{"slug":2280,"question":2281,"answerHtml":2282},{"slug":2284,"question":2285,"answerHtml":2286},{"slug":2288,"question":2289,"answerHtml":2290},{"slug":2292,"question":2293,"answerHtml":2294},{"slug":2296,"question":2297,"answerHtml":2298},{"slug":2309,"title":2310,"lead":2311,"entries":2312,"groups":2337},"podcasters","Podcasters","Connecting your show and building your podcast website.",[2313,2317,2321,2325,2329,2333],{"slug":2314,"question":2315,"answerHtml":2316},"can-podspun-write-seo-pages-from-my-episodes","Can Podspun write SEO pages from my episodes?","\u003Cp>Yes. Open Site Editor Chat in your website editor and ask for page ideas. It reads your episodes, the articles already on your site, and what visitors searched for, then suggests pages you have not written yet. Pick one and it writes the page from what you said, with a search title, a description, and common questions. Everything it writes is a draft until you publish it.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2318,"question":2319,"answerHtml":2320},"do-i-have-to-move-my-hosting","Do I have to move my hosting?","\u003Cp>No. Keep publishing wherever you publish now. Podspun reads your feed and builds the website from it, so nothing about how you release an episode changes.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2322,"question":2323,"answerHtml":2324},"does-it-import-all-my-published-episodes","Does it import all my published episodes?","\u003Cp>Yes, the whole feed comes in. Yearly billing includes 1,600 items across every channel for $313.20 per year. Each additional 100-item yearly band costs $16.20 for a full year and is prorated through renewal when added mid-term. Monthly billing is $29 per month with 800 items included, then $1.50 per 100 items when imported and each month afterward.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2326,"question":2327,"answerHtml":2328},"who-writes-the-transcripts","Who writes the transcripts?","\u003Cp>Podspun transcribes every episode as part of the import. You do not upload them and you do not pay a separate transcription service.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2330,"question":2331,"answerHtml":2332},"what-happens-when-i-publish-a-new-episode","What happens when I publish a new episode?","\u003Cp>It appears on the site on its own, with its page, its transcript, and its words in the search index.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2334,"question":2335,"answerHtml":2336},"can-i-still-design-the-site-myself","Can I still design the site myself?","\u003Cp>Yes. It is a full builder with themes, pages, and drag-and-drop blocks. The difference is that it opens already filled with your show rather than a placeholder.\u003C\u002Fp>",[2338],{"slug":2309,"title":2339,"entries":2340},"Podcast website questions",[2341,2342,2343,2344,2345,2346],{"slug":2314,"question":2315,"answerHtml":2316},{"slug":2318,"question":2319,"answerHtml":2320},{"slug":2322,"question":2323,"answerHtml":2324},{"slug":2326,"question":2327,"answerHtml":2328},{"slug":2330,"question":2331,"answerHtml":2332},{"slug":2334,"question":2335,"answerHtml":2336},{"slug":2348,"title":2349,"lead":2350,"entries":2351,"groups":2482},"comparisons","Comparing website builders","How Podspun compares with other website builders.",[2352,2356,2360,2364,2368,2372,2376,2380,2384,2388,2392,2396,2400,2404,2408,2412,2416,2420,2424,2428,2432,2436,2440,2444,2448,2452,2456,2459,2463,2467,2471,2474,2478],{"slug":2353,"question":2354,"answerHtml":2355},"is-podspun-a-good-linktree-alternative","Is Podspun a good Linktree alternative?","\u003Cp>If the link page has started to feel thin, yes. Podspun builds a full website from your podcast and social channels, with a page for every episode and post, transcripts, search, and clips. Your bio link points at a site you own instead of a list of doors to other platforms.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2357,"question":2358,"answerHtml":2359},"what-is-the-difference-between-a-link-in-bio-page-and-a-website","What is the difference between a link in bio page and a website?","\u003Cp>A link page is a menu: names and buttons that send people elsewhere. A website is the work itself: pages people can read, watch, search, and share, that Google can rank, on a domain you own. Sponsors and press take one more seriously than the other.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2361,"question":2362,"answerHtml":2363},"is-a-real-website-more-work-to-keep-up-than-linktree","Is a real website more work to keep up than Linktree?","\u003Cp>Not with Podspun. Connect your channels once and the site builds itself from what you publish, then stays current on its own. There is no page-per-episode to maintain by hand, which is the work a link page was helping you avoid.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2365,"question":2366,"answerHtml":2367},"how-much-does-podspun-cost-compared-to-linktree","How much does Podspun cost compared to Linktree?","\u003Cp>Podspun is $529.20 per year for the Dataweaver and 1 website, with 1,600 catalog items included. Monthly billing is $49 with 800 items included. Linktree prices its plans separately; check their site for current numbers.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2369,"question":2370,"answerHtml":2371},"is-podspun-a-good-podpage-alternative","Is Podspun a good Podpage alternative?","\u003Cp>If you want more than a podcast-only site, yes. Both build the site from your feed automatically. Podspun also imports your Instagram, TikTok, and YouTube posts as pages, transcribes the whole catalog, and adds word-level search, captioned clips, and an AI that answers from your episodes.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2373,"question":2374,"answerHtml":2375},"what-does-podspun-do-that-podpage-does-not","What does Podspun do that Podpage does not?","\u003Cp>Podspun treats your social channels as part of the site, not a row of icons: posts import as their own pages. It also transcribes and indexes everything, which is what makes search to the exact second, captioned clips, and catalog AI answers possible. And the Visual AI Editor changes your pages when you ask in plain words.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2377,"question":2378,"answerHtml":2379},"can-i-move-my-podcast-site-from-podpage-to-podspun","Can I move my podcast site from Podpage to Podspun?","\u003Cp>Yes. Podspun builds from your public feeds, not your old pages: connect your YouTube channel, Apple Podcasts feed, RSS, Instagram, or TikTok and it imports everything you have published. You preview the whole site free behind a password, then point your domain when it looks right.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2381,"question":2382,"answerHtml":2383},"how-much-does-podspun-cost-compared-to-podpage","How much does Podspun cost compared to Podpage?","\u003Cp>Podspun is $529.20 per year for the Dataweaver and 1 website, with 1,600 catalog items included. Monthly billing is $49 with 800 items included. Podpage prices its plans separately; check their site for current numbers.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2385,"question":2386,"answerHtml":2387},"is-squarespace-good-for-a-podcast-website","Is Squarespace good for a podcast website?","\u003Cp>It can host one, and it looks good. But Squarespace is a general builder: it has no transcripts, no episode search, and no clip tools, and you add every episode page by hand. If the podcast is the point of the site, a podcast-specific builder like Podspun does that work for you.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2389,"question":2390,"answerHtml":2391},"what-does-podspun-do-that-squarespace-cannot","What does Podspun do that Squarespace cannot?","\u003Cp>Podspun builds the site from your episodes and posts: every episode gets its own page with the full transcript, search to the exact second, key moments, and clean markup for Google and AI answer engines. It also cuts captioned clips from the transcript and keeps the site current as you publish. Squarespace has none of that in the box.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2393,"question":2394,"answerHtml":2395},"can-i-move-my-podcast-site-from-squarespace-to-podspun","Can I move my podcast site from Squarespace to Podspun?","\u003Cp>Yes. Podspun builds from your public feeds, not from your old site: connect your YouTube channel, Apple Podcasts feed, RSS, Instagram, or TikTok and it imports everything you have published. You preview the whole site free behind a password, then point your domain when you are ready.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2397,"question":2398,"answerHtml":2399},"how-much-does-a-podspun-website-cost-compared-to-squarespace","How much does a Podspun website cost compared to Squarespace?","\u003Cp>Podspun is $529.20 per year for the Dataweaver and 1 website, with 1,600 catalog items included. Monthly billing is $49 with 800 items included. Squarespace prices its plans separately; check their site for current numbers.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2401,"question":2402,"answerHtml":2403},"do-i-keep-design-control-on-podspun","Do I keep design control on Podspun?","\u003Cp>Yes. You set colors, fonts, and layout, edit right on the page, or ask the built-in Visual AI Editor to make changes in plain words. The difference from Squarespace is that you start from your finished catalog instead of a blank template.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2405,"question":2406,"answerHtml":2407},"is-substack-good-for-podcasters","Is Substack good for podcasters?","\u003Cp>Substack can host a podcast and attach it to a newsletter, and its network helps writers get discovered. What it doesn't do is treat the show as the center: there are no episode pages built from your catalog, no transcripts you can search to the second, and no help writing posts from what was said on air.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2409,"question":2410,"answerHtml":2411},"what-does-podspun-do-that-substack-cannot","What does Podspun do that Substack cannot?","\u003Cp>Podspun's newsletter lives on your own podcast website, next to every episode, its transcript, and word-level search. It drafts companion posts from each new episode's transcript, suggests topics from what your visitors actually search, and links readers to the exact moment of the episode being quoted.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2413,"question":2414,"answerHtml":2415},"how-do-the-fees-compare","How do the fees compare?","\u003Cp>Podspun takes 1.5% of each paid subscription and charges no monthly fee for Off Mic (Posts). Substack also takes a share of paid subscriptions; they publish the current number on their site. Stripe's card processing applies on both.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2417,"question":2418,"answerHtml":2419},"can-i-move-my-substack-to-podspun","Can I move my Substack to Podspun?","\u003Cp>Your posts can be recreated as Off Mic (Posts) on your site, and your free subscriber list can be imported into Podspun's email contacts. Paid subscribers are Stripe subscriptions on your own Stripe account, so they re-subscribe once at your new home; the join card on any paid post walks them through it.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2421,"question":2422,"answerHtml":2423},"can-i-use-podspun-and-keep-my-substack","Can I use Podspun and keep my Substack?","\u003Cp>Yes. Add your Substack as a channel in your Podspun account. Podspun imports the posts you have published, uses them in your website's search and article ideas, and can list them in your site's News with links back to Substack. Your readers and sign-ups stay on Substack.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2425,"question":2426,"answerHtml":2427},"do-i-need-both-substack-and-podspun","Do I need both Substack and Podspun?","\u003Cp>No. If you are starting a newsletter, Podspun's own posts and memberships do the same job on your website: free and paid members, posts on the web and by email, and payments through your own Stripe account. One platform covers the website and the newsletter.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2429,"question":2430,"answerHtml":2431},"do-my-readers-need-a-podspun-account","Do my readers need a Podspun account?","\u003Cp>No. Readers get an account on your website: they join with an email link, a password, or Google, and manage their plan through Stripe's own billing portal.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2433,"question":2434,"answerHtml":2435},"is-webflow-good-for-a-podcast-website","Is Webflow good for a podcast website?","\u003Cp>Webflow is excellent for custom design, and a skilled builder can model episodes in its CMS. What it does not do is the podcast work: no transcription, no word-level search, no clips, and no automatic episode pages. Podspun provides all of that from the show itself.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2437,"question":2438,"answerHtml":2439},"what-does-podspun-do-that-webflow-cannot","What does Podspun do that Webflow cannot?","\u003Cp>Podspun transcribes and indexes every episode, gives each its own page with the full transcript and clean markup for Google and AI answer engines, makes the catalog searchable to the exact second, and cuts captioned clips from the transcript. It also updates the site on its own when you publish, with no CMS entry and no automation to maintain.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2441,"question":2442,"answerHtml":2443},"can-i-move-my-podcast-site-from-webflow-to-podspun","Can I move my podcast site from Webflow to Podspun?","\u003Cp>Yes. Podspun builds from your public feeds rather than your old site: connect your YouTube channel, Apple Podcasts feed, RSS, Instagram, or TikTok and everything you have published is imported and given its own page. You preview the full site free behind a password before pointing your domain.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2445,"question":2446,"answerHtml":2447},"how-much-does-podspun-cost-compared-to-webflow","How much does Podspun cost compared to Webflow?","\u003Cp>Podspun is $529.20 per year for the Dataweaver and 1 website, with 1,600 catalog items included. Monthly billing is $49 with 800 items included. Hosting and the certificate are included. Webflow prices its site plans separately, and a custom build may add designer or agency time; check their site for current numbers.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2449,"question":2450,"answerHtml":2451},"is-wix-good-for-a-podcast-website","Is Wix good for a podcast website?","\u003Cp>Wix is easy to start and fine for a general site. For a podcast it stays manual: you embed a player, build episode pages yourself, and there are no transcripts, no word-level search, and no clips. Podspun builds those in from your episodes and posts.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2453,"question":2454,"answerHtml":2455},"what-does-podspun-do-that-wix-cannot","What does Podspun do that Wix cannot?","\u003Cp>Podspun turns each episode into its own page with a full transcript, key moments, and markup Google and AI answer engines can read, makes every word of the catalog searchable to the exact second, and cuts captioned clips from the transcript. It also keeps the site current as you publish. None of that is in Wix.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2457,"question":2458,"answerHtml":2379},"can-i-move-my-podcast-site-from-wix-to-podspun","Can I move my podcast site from Wix to Podspun?",{"slug":2460,"question":2461,"answerHtml":2462},"how-much-does-a-podspun-website-cost-compared-to-wix","How much does a Podspun website cost compared to Wix?","\u003Cp>Podspun is $529.20 per year for the Dataweaver and 1 website, with 1,600 catalog items included. Monthly billing is $49 with 800 items included. Wix prices its plans separately; check their site for current numbers.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2464,"question":2465,"answerHtml":2466},"is-wordpress-good-for-a-podcast-website","Is WordPress good for a podcast website?","\u003Cp>It can be, if someone maintains it. WordPress needs hosting, a theme, podcast plugins, and ongoing updates, security, and backups. The podcast plugins add a player and a feed, not transcripts, search, or clips. Podspun provides those built in, with the hosting and maintenance handled.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2468,"question":2469,"answerHtml":2470},"what-does-podspun-do-that-wordpress-plugins-do-not","What does Podspun do that WordPress plugins do not?","\u003Cp>Podspun transcribes and indexes every episode, gives each one its own page with the full transcript, makes the whole catalog searchable to the exact second, cuts captioned clips from the transcript, and answers visitor questions with AI. That set does not exist as a WordPress plugin stack, and on Podspun it runs from one catalog with nothing to maintain.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2472,"question":2473,"answerHtml":2443},"can-i-move-my-podcast-site-from-wordpress-to-podspun","Can I move my podcast site from WordPress to Podspun?",{"slug":2475,"question":2476,"answerHtml":2477},"how-much-does-podspun-cost-compared-to-running-wordpress","How much does Podspun cost compared to running WordPress?","\u003Cp>Podspun is $529.20 per year for the Dataweaver and 1 website, with 1,600 catalog items included. Monthly billing is $49 with 800 items included. Hosting, the certificate, and updates are included. A WordPress build prices out as hosting plus a theme, plugins, and maintenance time.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2479,"question":2480,"answerHtml":2481},"who-handles-security-and-updates-on-podspun","Who handles security and updates on Podspun?","\u003Cp>We do. There is no plugin stack to patch and no server to watch. You publish episodes the way you already do, and the site stays current and online.\u003C\u002Fp>",[2483,2491,2499,2508,2519,2527,2535],{"slug":2484,"title":2485,"entries":2486},"linktree","Podspun vs Linktree questions",[2487,2488,2489,2490],{"slug":2353,"question":2354,"answerHtml":2355},{"slug":2357,"question":2358,"answerHtml":2359},{"slug":2361,"question":2362,"answerHtml":2363},{"slug":2365,"question":2366,"answerHtml":2367},{"slug":2492,"title":2493,"entries":2494},"podpage","Podspun vs Podpage questions",[2495,2496,2497,2498],{"slug":2369,"question":2370,"answerHtml":2371},{"slug":2373,"question":2374,"answerHtml":2375},{"slug":2377,"question":2378,"answerHtml":2379},{"slug":2381,"question":2382,"answerHtml":2383},{"slug":2500,"title":2501,"entries":2502},"squarespace","Podspun vs Squarespace questions",[2503,2504,2505,2506,2507],{"slug":2385,"question":2386,"answerHtml":2387},{"slug":2389,"question":2390,"answerHtml":2391},{"slug":2393,"question":2394,"answerHtml":2395},{"slug":2397,"question":2398,"answerHtml":2399},{"slug":2401,"question":2402,"answerHtml":2403},{"slug":2509,"title":2510,"entries":2511},"substack","Podspun vs Substack questions",[2512,2513,2514,2515,2516,2517,2518],{"slug":2405,"question":2406,"answerHtml":2407},{"slug":2409,"question":2410,"answerHtml":2411},{"slug":2413,"question":2414,"answerHtml":2415},{"slug":2417,"question":2418,"answerHtml":2419},{"slug":2421,"question":2422,"answerHtml":2423},{"slug":2425,"question":2426,"answerHtml":2427},{"slug":2429,"question":2430,"answerHtml":2431},{"slug":2520,"title":2521,"entries":2522},"webflow","Podspun vs Webflow questions",[2523,2524,2525,2526],{"slug":2433,"question":2434,"answerHtml":2435},{"slug":2437,"question":2438,"answerHtml":2439},{"slug":2441,"question":2442,"answerHtml":2443},{"slug":2445,"question":2446,"answerHtml":2447},{"slug":2528,"title":2529,"entries":2530},"wix","Podspun vs Wix questions",[2531,2532,2533,2534],{"slug":2449,"question":2450,"answerHtml":2451},{"slug":2453,"question":2454,"answerHtml":2455},{"slug":2457,"question":2458,"answerHtml":2379},{"slug":2460,"question":2461,"answerHtml":2462},{"slug":2536,"title":2537,"entries":2538},"wordpress","Podspun vs WordPress questions",[2539,2540,2541,2542,2543],{"slug":2464,"question":2465,"answerHtml":2466},{"slug":2468,"question":2469,"answerHtml":2470},{"slug":2472,"question":2473,"answerHtml":2443},{"slug":2475,"question":2476,"answerHtml":2477},{"slug":2479,"question":2480,"answerHtml":2481},{"slug":2545,"title":2546,"lead":2547,"entries":2548,"groups":2970},"guides","Guides and advice","Answers about publishing, audience growth, and discovery.",[2549,2553,2557,2561,2565,2569,2573,2577,2581,2585,2589,2593,2597,2601,2605,2609,2613,2617,2621,2625,2629,2633,2637,2641,2645,2649,2653,2657,2661,2665,2669,2673,2677,2681,2685,2689,2693,2697,2701,2705,2709,2713,2717,2721,2725,2729,2733,2737,2741,2745,2749,2753,2757,2761,2765,2767,2771,2775,2779,2783,2787,2791,2795,2799,2803,2807,2811,2815,2819,2823,2827,2831,2835,2838,2842,2846,2850,2854,2858,2862,2866,2870,2874,2878,2882,2886,2890,2894,2898,2902,2906,2910,2914,2918,2922,2926,2930,2934,2938,2942,2946,2950,2954,2958,2962,2966],{"slug":2550,"question":2551,"answerHtml":2552},"how-do-ai-search-engines-find-podcast-content","How do AI search engines find podcast content?","\u003Cp>They read web pages, not audio. An engine finds a podcast when the episode has a public page with a full transcript, a clear title and description, and structured data it can parse. If the ideas in the episode were only ever spoken, the retrieval system has nothing to match a question against and the episode never enters the candidate set.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fpodcast-discoverability-in-ai-search\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2554,"question":2555,"answerHtml":2556},"why-is-a-podcast-invisible-to-chatgpt-or-perplexity-by-default","Why is a podcast invisible to ChatGPT or Perplexity by default?","\u003Cp>Because the default artifact is an MP3 and a short blurb. A transcript is the text version of the speech needed to understand the content; without it, 40 minutes of argument reduces to a one-line description. Answer engines retrieve and quote text, so an episode with no transcript has almost nothing for them to retrieve or quote.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fpodcast-discoverability-in-ai-search\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2558,"question":2559,"answerHtml":2560},"what-makes-a-podcast-quotable-by-an-answer-engine","What makes a podcast quotable by an answer engine?","\u003Cp>A plain, self-contained claim near the top, backed by something specific. Generative engines lift passages that answer the question directly without needing the surrounding paragraphs. A clear question-and-answer block is the easiest of all, which is why FAQ page structured data still matters for AI even after Google retired FAQ rich results in regular search.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fpodcast-discoverability-in-ai-search\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2562,"question":2563,"answerHtml":2564},"does-structured-data-help-with-ai-search","Does structured data help with AI search?","\u003Cp>Yes. Structured data is how Google describes the content of a page to a machine, and answer engines use the same labels to decide what a page reliably asserts. Marking an episode as a PodcastEpisode and its Q&A as a FAQ page hands the engine an unambiguous reading instead of making it infer one.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fpodcast-discoverability-in-ai-search\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2566,"question":2567,"answerHtml":2568},"what-is-geo-and-how-is-it-different-from-seo","What is GEO and how is it different from SEO?","\u003Cp>GEO, generative engine optimization, is the work of getting cited inside an AI-written answer; SEO is the work of ranking in the list of links. They share a foundation: transcript, clean metadata, fast pages, and structured data serve both. GEO leans harder on question-and-answer formatting and direct, self-contained passages, because that is what an engine can lift cleanly.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fpodcast-discoverability-in-ai-search\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2570,"question":2571,"answerHtml":2572},"what-are-the-core-elements-of-podcast-seo","What are the core elements of podcast SEO?","\u003Cp>A transcript on every episode page, one crawlable URL per episode with its own title and description, internal links between related episodes, and PodcastEpisode structured data that names the episode and its parent series. Each element hands the engine a different signal: the transcript gives it words to match, the unique URL gives it something to rank, the links give it context, and the schema tells it what kind of thing the page is.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fpodcast-seo-guide\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2574,"question":2575,"answerHtml":2576},"do-podcast-transcripts-actually-help-with-google-rankings","Do podcast transcripts actually help with Google rankings?","\u003Cp>Yes, because the transcript is the only part of an episode a crawler can read. A transcript turns 40 minutes of speech into indexable text that can match a query and supply a snippet. It is also an accessibility requirement, not a bonus: a transcript is the text version of the speech and non-speech audio needed to understand the content, used by people who are deaf or hard of hearing. The same text serves both audiences at once.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fpodcast-seo-guide\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2578,"question":2579,"answerHtml":2580},"should-each-episode-have-its-own-web-page","Should each episode have its own web page?","\u003Cp>Each episode needs its own URL, its own title and description, and a canonical link pointing at itself, so Google knows which version to rank when the same episode appears on several platforms. Without a self-referencing canonical, syndicated copies compete with the original and split the ranking signal.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fpodcast-seo-guide\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2582,"question":2583,"answerHtml":2584},"what-schema-markup-is-right-for-a-podcast","What schema markup is right for a podcast?","\u003Cp>PodcastEpisode is the most specific type. Schema.org defines it plainly as 'a single episode of a podcast series,' with properties for the parent series, duration, and publish date. FAQ page schema can sit on top of any Q&A in the transcript. Google stopped showing FAQ rich results in search in 2026, but the markup still feeds AI answer engines that read structured data to assemble summaries.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fpodcast-seo-guide\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2586,"question":2587,"answerHtml":2588},"how-long-does-podcast-seo-take-to-work","How long does podcast SEO take to work?","\u003Cp>Indexing a new page can happen within days; ranking for a competitive query usually takes weeks to months as Google accumulates evidence that the site is a credible source on the topic. The fastest wins are long-tail questions, the specific phrasings where there is little competing content and a transcript can answer the query almost verbatim.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fpodcast-seo-guide\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2590,"question":2591,"answerHtml":2592},"what-does-it-mean-for-a-podcast-to-be-searchable","What does it mean for a podcast to be searchable?","\u003Cp>It means the show is indexed at the moment level, not the episode level. A listener searches a phrase, a topic, or a paraphrased idea and lands on the specific timestamp where it appears, rather than a list of episodes they then have to scrub through by hand.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-make-a-podcast-searchable\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2594,"question":2595,"answerHtml":2596},"how-does-semantic-search-find-a-moment-inside-an-episode","How does semantic search find a moment inside an episode?","\u003Cp>It compares meaning instead of spelling. Each segment of the transcript is turned into a vector, a string of numbers that captures what the passage is about. The listener's question becomes the same kind of vector, and the system returns the segments whose vectors sit closest to it, each with a timestamp. This is why a loose description can still find the right moment.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-make-a-podcast-searchable\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2598,"question":2599,"answerHtml":2600},"can-listeners-find-a-moment-even-if-they-don-t-remember-the-exact-words","Can listeners find a moment even if they don't remember the exact words?","\u003Cp>Yes, and that is the whole point. Keyword search needs the listener to guess the words that were actually said. Semantic search matches the idea, so 'the part about raising prices without losing customers' can find a passage that never used those words. Meaning, not literal overlap, decides the match.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-make-a-podcast-searchable\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2602,"question":2603,"answerHtml":2604},"what-has-to-exist-before-a-podcast-can-be-searched-this-way","What has to exist before a podcast can be searched this way?","\u003Cp>A transcript. A transcript is the text version of the speech and non-speech audio needed to understand a recording, and it is the substrate everything else is built on. Without it there is no text to segment, no segment to turn into a vector, and nothing to point a timestamp at. The transcript comes first; search is a layer on top of it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-make-a-podcast-searchable\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2606,"question":2607,"answerHtml":2608},"does-making-a-podcast-searchable-help-with-seo","Does making a podcast searchable help with SEO?","\u003Cp>Indirectly but reliably. The transcript that powers search is also crawlable text, and the moment pages it generates are internally linkable and can carry PodcastEpisode structured data. Listeners use the semantic search layer; Google and AI answer engines read the transcript layer underneath it. One body of text serves both.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-make-a-podcast-searchable\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2610,"question":2611,"answerHtml":2612},"how-do-i-transcribe-a-podcast","How do I transcribe a podcast?","\u003Cp>Three routes. You can type it out by hand, which is accurate and slow; use an AI transcription service that returns text in minutes; or use a platform that transcribes every episode automatically as part of building a page for it. The right choice depends on how many episodes you have and whether you want a file or a finished, searchable page.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-transcribe-a-podcast\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2614,"question":2615,"answerHtml":2616},"why-should-i-transcribe-my-podcast","Why should I transcribe my podcast?","\u003Cp>Because the transcript is the only part of an episode a search engine can read. It turns 40 minutes of speech into indexable text that can match a query and supply a snippet. It is also an accessibility requirement: a transcript is the text version of the speech and non-speech audio needed to understand a recording, used by people who are deaf or hard of hearing. The same text serves search, AI answer engines, and accessibility at once.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-transcribe-a-podcast\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2618,"question":2619,"answerHtml":2620},"is-manual-or-ai-transcription-better","Is manual or AI transcription better?","\u003Cp>AI transcription is fast enough to do every episode, which is what discoverability actually requires, and modern models handle clear audio well. Manual transcription is more accurate on messy audio, heavy accents, or technical jargon, but it does not scale to a whole channel. Most shows use AI and lightly review the result.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-transcribe-a-podcast\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2622,"question":2623,"answerHtml":2624},"where-should-the-transcript-go","Where should the transcript go?","\u003Cp>On a page for that episode, on your own site, marked up as a PodcastEpisode. A transcript sitting in a document nobody links to does nothing for discovery. On a crawlable page it becomes indexable text, the basis for on-site search, and something AI engines can read and cite.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-transcribe-a-podcast\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2626,"question":2627,"answerHtml":2628},"does-transcript-accuracy-matter-for-ranking","Does transcript accuracy matter for ranking?","\u003Cp>Accuracy matters for trust and for matching the right queries, but structure matters just as much. A clean transcript broken into coherent, timestamped passages is far more useful to a reader, a search engine, and an answer engine than one accurate wall of text with no segmentation.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-transcribe-a-podcast\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2630,"question":2631,"answerHtml":2632},"what-happened-to-google-podcasts","What happened to Google Podcasts?","\u003Cp>Google discontinued the Google Podcasts app in 2024 and migrated listeners to YouTube Music, offering a tool to move subscriptions or export them as a file. The dedicated app no longer exists, and Google folded podcast listening into YouTube and YouTube Music instead.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fwhat-happened-to-google-podcasts\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2634,"question":2635,"answerHtml":2636},"where-did-google-podcasts-go-and-what-replaced-it","Where did Google Podcasts go, and what replaced it?","\u003Cp>Listening moved to YouTube Music and YouTube. That shift mirrors how people already behave: YouTube is now the service Americans use most often for podcasts, ahead of Spotify and Apple Podcasts. There is no direct one-to-one replacement app from Google, the function was absorbed into its video products.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fwhat-happened-to-google-podcasts\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2638,"question":2639,"answerHtml":2640},"can-my-podcast-still-show-up-on-google","Can my podcast still show up on Google?","\u003Cp>Yes, through ordinary web search. Google ranks pages, so an episode with its own page, a transcript, and PodcastEpisode structured data can still appear in results and feed AI summaries. What is gone is a separate podcast directory inside Google; what remains is the open web, which you can actually control.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fwhat-happened-to-google-podcasts\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2642,"question":2643,"answerHtml":2644},"is-there-a-google-podcasts-alternative","Is there a Google Podcasts alternative?","\u003Cp>For listening, YouTube Music, Apple Podcasts, Spotify, and Pocket Casts all serve the role. For discovery, the more useful question is less which app replaces it and more how people find shows now, which is increasingly through search and AI answers rather than browsing a directory at all.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fwhat-happened-to-google-podcasts\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2646,"question":2647,"answerHtml":2648},"what-should-podcasters-do-now","What should podcasters do now?","\u003Cp>Stop optimizing for any single app and make the show legible everywhere. A searchable, indexed set of episode pages on your own domain is readable by Google, by YouTube, and by AI answer engines alike, so it survives the next platform change instead of depending on one app's survival.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fwhat-happened-to-google-podcasts\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2650,"question":2651,"answerHtml":2652},"what-does-podspun-actually-do-for-my-podcast","What does Podspun actually do for my podcast?","\u003Cp>It turns your show into a searchable, indexed website. Every episode gets its own page with a full transcript, an AI summary, semantic search, quizzes, and structured data, so the same episode that was invisible as an audio file becomes something Google ranks, AI engines cite, and your fans can actually search. It is your whole channel, finally working for you, including every good episode you've already published.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fwhat-podspun-does-for-your-podcast\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2654,"question":2655,"answerHtml":2656},"will-this-help-people-find-my-show-on-google","Will this help people find my show on Google?","\u003Cp>Yes, and it is the core of what Podspun does. Search engines rank pages rather than audio, so an episode with no page and no transcript is competing on its title alone. Podspun gives every episode a real page with the text, metadata, and PodcastEpisode markup Google needs to understand and rank it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fwhat-podspun-does-for-your-podcast\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2658,"question":2659,"answerHtml":2660},"does-this-help-me-show-up-in-chatgpt-and-ai-answers","Does this help me show up in ChatGPT and AI answers?","\u003Cp>It does. Answer engines like ChatGPT, Perplexity, and Google's AI Overviews retrieve text and cite a few sources, and audio is invisible to them. Podspun's transcripts and summaries give these engines something to quote, and the question-and-answer structure gives them clean passages to lift, so your show can be the source an AI points to.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fwhat-podspun-does-for-your-podcast\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2662,"question":2663,"answerHtml":2664},"what-do-my-listeners-actually-get-out-of-it","What do my listeners actually get out of it?","\u003Cp>A show they can search instead of scrub. Fans type a half-remembered idea and jump to the exact moment, surface moments they missed, and read a summary instead of sitting through two hours. Your episodes stop being a pile of audio and become something people can actually use.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fwhat-podspun-does-for-your-podcast\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2666,"question":2667,"answerHtml":2668},"does-it-work-if-my-podcast-is-audio-not-video","Does it work if my podcast is audio, not video?","\u003Cp>Yes. Podspun started with YouTube and now supports audio podcasts too, so any audio show converts into the same dynamic, searchable, indexed site. Whether you publish to YouTube, to audio apps, or both, every episode gets the same treatment.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fwhat-podspun-does-for-your-podcast\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2670,"question":2671,"answerHtml":2672},"how-is-this-different-from-my-podcast-host","How is this different from my podcast host?","\u003Cp>Your host distributes the audio and counts downloads. Podspun builds the searchable website around your channel: transcripts, summaries, search, schema, and AI-ready pages on your own site. They do different jobs, and Podspun sits on top of whatever host you already use without changing your workflow.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fwhat-podspun-does-for-your-podcast\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2674,"question":2675,"answerHtml":2676},"what-is-the-fastest-way-to-grow-a-podcast-audience","What is the fastest way to grow a podcast audience?","\u003Cp>Make each episode easier to find after it airs. Launch-day promotion produces a spike that decays; episodes that keep surfacing through search, AI citations, and shared clips add listeners every week without new effort. The fast path and the durable path are the same path: post-release discoverability.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-grow-a-podcast\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2678,"question":2679,"answerHtml":2680},"how-important-are-your-older-episodes-for-growth","How important are your older episodes for growth?","\u003Cp>They are usually the largest growth asset a show has. New listeners almost never start at episode one; they arrive at a specific episode, often an older one, because it answered a question they searched. If your channel is searchable and citable, every past episode is a live entry point rather than something buried in the feed.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-grow-a-podcast\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2682,"question":2683,"answerHtml":2684},"where-are-podcast-listeners-actually-discovering-shows-now","Where are podcast listeners actually discovering shows now?","\u003Cp>Increasingly inside large platforms and search, not a single podcast directory. YouTube is now the service used most often for podcasts in the U.S., ahead of Spotify and Apple Podcasts, and a third of U.S. adults say they get news from podcasts. Growth means being legible across those surfaces, not optimizing for one app.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-grow-a-podcast\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2686,"question":2687,"answerHtml":2688},"what-retention-tactics-keep-listeners-coming-back","What retention tactics keep listeners coming back?","\u003Cp>A consistent cadence, clear episode structure, and ways to participate rather than only consume. Interactive elements like quizzes and shareable quotes give a listener something to do with an episode, and listeners who act on a show return more reliably than ones who passively press play and drift.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-grow-a-podcast\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2690,"question":2691,"answerHtml":2692},"how-does-a-searchable-channel-compound-growth","How does a searchable channel compound growth?","\u003Cp>It turns every episode into a permanent door. A transcript makes the episode findable, internal links carry a new visitor from one episode to the next, and shareable moments push it through listener networks. Each new episode adds to the surface area instead of replacing the last one's attention.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-grow-a-podcast\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2694,"question":2695,"answerHtml":2696},"where-do-new-podcast-listeners-come-from","Where do new podcast listeners come from?","\u003Cp>Three sources, and you want all three working at once: search, where someone looks up a topic you cover; social, where someone shares a clip or quote; and recommendations, where a friend or another creator points at an episode. A show that only feeds one of the three caps its own growth at that channel's ceiling.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-get-more-podcast-listeners\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2698,"question":2699,"answerHtml":2700},"does-repurposing-podcast-content-bring-in-new-listeners","Does repurposing podcast content bring in new listeners?","\u003Cp>Yes, because it multiplies entry points without multiplying recording time. One 40-minute episode contains a dozen clips, several quotable lines, and a transcript full of searchable phrases. Each of those can be found through a different channel, so repurposing converts one piece of audio into many independent ways to be discovered.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-get-more-podcast-listeners\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2702,"question":2703,"answerHtml":2704},"how-do-internal-links-between-episodes-help","How do internal links between episodes help?","\u003Cp>They keep a new visitor moving and tell search engines the site has depth. A listener who lands on one episode and sees links to related ones often listens to a second in the same visit, which raises listening time and signals topical authority. Consolidating that signal cleanly is also why each episode needs a self-referencing canonical URL.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-get-more-podcast-listeners\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2706,"question":2707,"answerHtml":2708},"is-it-better-to-chase-one-platform-or-spread-across-many","Is it better to chase one platform or spread across many?","\u003Cp>Be legible everywhere from one place. The listening surface is split, YouTube leads, Spotify and Apple follow, and search and AI feed in alongside them, so betting on a single app leaves most of the audience unreachable. The efficient move is one well-built episode page that every surface can read, not separate hand-built presences.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-get-more-podcast-listeners\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2710,"question":2711,"answerHtml":2712},"what-should-i-fix-first","What should I fix first?","\u003Cp>Discoverability of the episodes you've already published. Most shows pour effort into promoting the newest episode while older episodes get buried in the feed the day after they go up. Making your whole channel searchable and linkable turns those buried episodes into active recruiters, which usually moves the listener number more than another launch-day push.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-get-more-podcast-listeners\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2714,"question":2715,"answerHtml":2716},"which-channels-are-worth-promoting-a-podcast-on","Which channels are worth promoting a podcast on?","\u003Cp>The ones where an asset keeps working after the initial post: YouTube, search engines, short-form video, and newsletters. YouTube matters most because it is now the service Americans use most often for podcasts, ahead of Spotify and Apple. Promotion inside closed feeds where posts vanish in hours produces a spike and little lasting traffic.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-promote-a-podcast\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2718,"question":2719,"answerHtml":2720},"what-podcast-assets-travel-best-on-social","What podcast assets travel best on social?","\u003Cp>Short video clips of a genuinely good moment, and quote cards built around a single sharp line. They travel because a viewer can consume and share them in seconds without first committing to a 40-minute episode. The clip does the convincing; the episode is the destination it points to.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-promote-a-podcast\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2722,"question":2723,"answerHtml":2724},"how-often-should-a-creator-promote-the-same-episode","How often should a creator promote the same episode?","\u003Cp>For months, as long as the angle changes. One episode can be posted as a quote, then as a clip, then as the answer to a specific question it happens to cover. Rotating the angle works; reposting the identical episode link does not, because it gives the same audience no new reason to look twice.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-promote-a-podcast\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2726,"question":2727,"answerHtml":2728},"why-does-video-matter-so-much-for-podcast-promotion-now","Why does video matter so much for podcast promotion now?","\u003Cp>Because the audience moved to it. Listeners increasingly choose podcasts on YouTube over audio-only apps, which means a show with no video presence is absent from the largest promotion surface available. Even a basic visual treatment of an audio episode buys access to a channel that audio-only shows cannot reach.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-promote-a-podcast\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2730,"question":2731,"answerHtml":2732},"how-do-you-promote-without-burning-out","How do you promote without burning out?","\u003Cp>Stop making promotion depend on fresh effort each time. If the clips, quotes, and topic summaries are extracted once and sit ready, promoting an episode becomes choosing an angle, not re-listening to find one. Sustainable promotion is an inventory problem, not a willpower problem.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-promote-a-podcast\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2734,"question":2735,"answerHtml":2736},"what-are-podcast-show-notes","What are podcast show notes?","\u003Cp>The text published alongside an episode: a short summary of what it covers, the main points or segments, links to anything mentioned, and the names of guests. They give a listener a reason to press play and give a search engine the words it needs to understand the episode.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-write-podcast-show-notes\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2738,"question":2739,"answerHtml":2740},"why-do-show-notes-matter-for-seo","Why do show notes matter for SEO?","\u003Cp>Because they are the body copy of the episode page, and body copy is what ranks. A crawler cannot hear the audio, so the show notes plus the transcript are most of what it has to read, and structured data is how that text gets understood. Thin show notes leave the page nearly empty in the eyes of search.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-write-podcast-show-notes\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2742,"question":2743,"answerHtml":2744},"what-should-i-include-in-show-notes","What should I include in show notes?","\u003Cp>Lead with a two or three sentence summary that answers what the episode is about in plain language. Then the key points or a segment list, the guest and their background, links to anything referenced, and a few real questions the episode answers. Specific names and terms matter, because those are what people search.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-write-podcast-show-notes\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2746,"question":2747,"answerHtml":2748},"how-long-should-podcast-show-notes-be","How long should podcast show notes be?","\u003Cp>Long enough to represent the episode, not padded for its own sake. A few substantive paragraphs plus a structured list beats both a single line and a wall of filler. The goal is to cover the real topics in the words a searcher would use, which a full transcript then backs up underneath.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-write-podcast-show-notes\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2750,"question":2751,"answerHtml":2752},"can-i-generate-show-notes-automatically","Can I generate show notes automatically?","\u003Cp>Yes, and for a regular show that is the only way it stays sustainable. An AI summary written from the transcript produces publish-ready show notes for every episode, which you can review and post, instead of drafting each one by hand and quietly giving up after a month.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-write-podcast-show-notes\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2754,"question":2755,"answerHtml":2756},"what-is-the-best-website-builder-for-a-podcast","What is the best website builder for a podcast?","\u003Cp>The best one gives you full design control and also handles the podcast-specific work. Squarespace and Wix give you the design control but open empty and have no podcast features, so you would paste every episode by hand and still have no transcripts, search, or clips. Podspun's website builder is in the same class, with themes, your own fonts and domain, and drag-and-drop blocks, and it adds the podcast modules and loads your whole catalog for you.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fpodcast-website-builder\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2758,"question":2759,"answerHtml":2760},"is-this-a-real-website-builder-or-just-a-podcast-page","Is this a real website builder, or just a podcast page?","\u003Cp>Yes, it is a real website builder. You pick a theme and color palette, set your logo and fonts, and arrange blocks on a flexible grid with drafts, revisions, and live preview, on your own custom domain. Everything you can do in Squarespace or Wix you can do here. The difference is that it opens with your episodes already in it and includes podcast blocks those builders do not have.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fpodcast-website-builder\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2762,"question":2763,"answerHtml":2764},"how-is-podspun-different-from-squarespace-or-wix","How is Podspun different from Squarespace or Wix?","\u003Cp>Squarespace and Wix are general builders. They open to an empty shell, have no podcast features, and only show what you remembered to add. Podspun gives you the same design freedom but opens already filled from your feed and includes podcast blocks: an episode archive, per-episode pages, transcripts, on-site search, an AI ask box, and clips. You still design and arrange every block; you just do not start empty or wire up the podcast parts yourself.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fpodcast-website-builder\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":558,"question":559,"answerHtml":2766},"\u003Cp>Yes, on its own. Podspun connects to your YouTube channel, Apple Podcasts, or RSS feed and syncs nightly, so a new episode shows up with its own page, transcript, and searchable text without you touching the editor. On a general builder you would add each new episode by hand every time.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fpodcast-website-builder\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2768,"question":2769,"answerHtml":2770},"do-i-get-my-own-domain-and-full-control-of-the-look","Do I get my own domain and full control of the look?","\u003Cp>Yes to both. Your Podspun site runs on your own domain, so it is your website, not a profile on someone else's platform. You control the theme, palette, fonts, logo, and the layout of every block, and the episode pages, transcripts, and search all live under your address, which is what lets the content rank in Google and be cited by AI answer engines.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fpodcast-website-builder\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2772,"question":2773,"answerHtml":2774},"what-is-the-easiest-way-to-build-a-podcast-website","What is the easiest way to build a podcast website?","\u003Cp>Use a builder made for podcasters that reads the feed you already publish to (YouTube, Apple Podcasts, RSS, Instagram, or TikTok) and arrives with your episodes already in it. You still pick the theme, color palette, logo, and fonts and arrange the pages, but the episode pages, your whole channel, transcripts, and search are built for you instead of pasted in one at a time. A general builder like Squarespace or Wix can make a beautiful site too, you just start from an empty shell and fill every episode yourself.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-build-a-podcast-website\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2776,"question":2777,"answerHtml":2778},"should-i-use-squarespace-or-wix-for-a-podcast-website","Should I use Squarespace or Wix for a podcast website?","\u003Cp>You can, and they are good general builders with lots of design freedom. The catch for a podcast is that they open empty and have no podcast features built in. Every episode is a page you create, lay out, and link by hand, and to get transcripts, a per-episode page, on-site search, or clips you add a separate plugin or service on top. The design tools are great; the podcast plumbing is on you.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-build-a-podcast-website\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2780,"question":2781,"answerHtml":2782},"do-i-need-a-website-if-i-already-have-spotify-and-apple-podcasts","Do I need a website if I already have Spotify and Apple Podcasts?","\u003Cp>A website is the one place you own and can make findable in search. Directory listings live inside an app and rank poorly in Google, while a real page with a transcript carries text that can rank and be cited by AI answer engines. It is also where clips, search, and every episode you have published can live together under your own domain instead of scattered across apps.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-build-a-podcast-website\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2784,"question":2785,"answerHtml":2786},"how-do-i-keep-a-podcast-website-up-to-date-after-launch","How do I keep a podcast website up to date after launch?","\u003Cp>On a general builder you update it yourself every release: new episode page, show notes, links, embeds. A podcaster builder like Podspun Cloud syncs from your source on its own (nightly), so new episodes appear without you touching the site. The maintenance question is the one most people underestimate when they pick a tool.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-build-a-podcast-website\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2788,"question":2789,"answerHtml":2790},"can-you-turn-an-instagram-account-into-a-website","Can you turn an Instagram account into a website?","\u003Cp>Yes. The work is deciding what carries over and how it stays current. On a general builder you re-create the posts you want by hand, image by image and caption by caption. On Podspun Cloud you connect the account and every public post and reel comes across with its caption and media, each on its own page, and new posts join the site as you publish them.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-turn-instagram-into-a-website\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2792,"question":2793,"answerHtml":2794},"is-a-link-in-bio-page-the-same-thing","Is a link in bio page the same thing?","\u003Cp>No. A link in bio page is one page of buttons pointing somewhere else. It gives you no page per post, nothing for Google to index beyond the buttons, and no search. A website holds the work itself, at your own domain, and the link in your bio can point at it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-turn-instagram-into-a-website\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2796,"question":2797,"answerHtml":2798},"why-put-instagram-posts-on-a-website-at-all","Why put Instagram posts on a website at all?","\u003Cp>Because a profile is rented space. You do not own the URL, you cannot change how the app surfaces you, and none of it ranks in Google the way a real page does. Posts on your own site keep working for you: they can be found in search, linked to, quoted by AI answer engines, and read years later.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-turn-instagram-into-a-website\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2800,"question":2801,"answerHtml":2802},"what-happens-to-posts-i-publish-after-the-site-is-live","What happens to posts I publish after the site is live?","\u003Cp>On a hand-built site, nothing, until you add them yourself, which is the point most social sites go stale. A builder that reads the account keeps up on its own: Podspun Cloud imports new posts and reels and gives each one its own page without you touching the site.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-turn-instagram-into-a-website\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2804,"question":2805,"answerHtml":2806},"can-you-turn-a-tiktok-account-into-a-website","Can you turn a TikTok account into a website?","\u003Cp>Yes. On a general builder you rebuild it by hand, embedding videos one at a time and writing the surrounding page yourself. On Podspun Cloud you connect the account and every public video comes across with its caption and media, each on its own page, and new videos join the site as you post them.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-turn-tiktok-into-a-website\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2808,"question":2809,"answerHtml":2810},"what-happens-to-the-words-spoken-in-my-videos","What happens to the words spoken in my videos?","\u003Cp>Podspun transcribes the audio of every video and indexes it with the captions, so a visitor can search for something you said and land on the video you said it in. On a hand-built site those words stay locked in the audio, where no search engine can read them.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-turn-tiktok-into-a-website\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2812,"question":2813,"answerHtml":2814},"is-this-just-a-link-in-bio-page","Is this just a link in bio page?","\u003Cp>No. A link in bio page is one page of buttons. This is a full website on your own domain with a page per video, search, AI answers, and the rest of a website builder around it. The link in your bio can point at that site.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-turn-tiktok-into-a-website\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2816,"question":2817,"answerHtml":2818},"why-does-a-website-matter-if-the-videos-live-on-tiktok","Why does a website matter if the videos live on TikTok?","\u003Cp>Because the profile is rented space and it does not rank in Google the way a real page does. Pages you own can be found in search, linked to, and quoted by AI answer engines, and they survive whatever the app decides to do next.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-turn-tiktok-into-a-website\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2820,"question":2821,"answerHtml":2822},"does-a-podcast-really-need-its-own-website","Does a podcast really need its own website?","\u003Cp>Yes, if you want anything you can control or that ranks. Your show inside Spotify or Apple is a profile on rented land: you do not own the URL, the audience data, or the page, and you cannot change how those apps surface you. A website on your own domain is the only home where the catalog is yours and where search engines and AI can actually find it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fpodcast-website-on-your-own-domain\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2824,"question":2825,"answerHtml":2826},"isn-t-my-spotify-or-apple-podcasts-page-enough","Isn't my Spotify or Apple Podcasts page enough?","\u003Cp>It is enough to host the audio, not to get found. Those pages live inside walled apps, so a Google search for what you discussed rarely surfaces them, and an AI answer engine has no text to quote. They also point listeners back into the platform's own recommendations, not yours. Useful as distribution, but they are not a home you own.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fpodcast-website-on-your-own-domain\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2828,"question":2829,"answerHtml":2830},"why-does-the-domain-matter-so-much","Why does the domain matter so much?","\u003Cp>Because the domain is the part you keep. Platforms change terms, bury shows, and shut down: Google Podcasts closed in 2024 and took its discovery surface with it. A custom domain is an asset you own outright, so your links never break, your audience can always find you at one stable address, and the SEO you build accrues to you rather than to a platform.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fpodcast-website-on-your-own-domain\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2832,"question":2833,"answerHtml":2834},"where-do-people-actually-discover-podcasts-now","Where do people actually discover podcasts now?","\u003Cp>Increasingly through search, YouTube, and AI answers, not by browsing a single podcast directory. YouTube is now the service used most often for podcasts in the U.S., ahead of Spotify and Apple Podcasts. A site on your own domain, full of indexed text, is what shows up in those places. A profile locked inside an app does not.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fpodcast-website-on-your-own-domain\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2836,"question":141,"answerHtml":2837},"do-i-have-to-build-the-website-myself","\u003Cp>You get a full website builder, the same kind of design control Squarespace or Wix gives you, so you can build and arrange pages with drag-and-drop blocks, pick themes and colors, and add your own logo and fonts. The difference is that it opens already filled with your catalog. Podspun Cloud connects to YouTube, Apple Podcasts, an RSS feed, Instagram, or TikTok and assembles the episode pages, your whole channel, on-site search, and clips for you, then keeps them current as you publish. You design as much as you want without starting from an empty shell. Podspun is the #1 website builder for the age of podcasts, social, art and films, and the only one that builds your site from the work you already publish. Nothing else compares, and once your channels are connected it is the only builder you will need.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fpodcast-website-on-your-own-domain\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2839,"question":2840,"answerHtml":2841},"what-does-it-mean-to-repurpose-podcast-content","What does it mean to repurpose podcast content?","\u003Cp>Taking one episode and breaking it into pieces that stand alone: a transcript, a written summary, short video clips, quote cards, a quiz, and searchable moments. Each piece can be found through a different channel, so one recording turns into many independent ways to be discovered.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-repurpose-podcast-content\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2843,"question":2844,"answerHtml":2845},"why-repurpose-instead-of-just-publishing-the-episode","Why repurpose instead of just publishing the episode?","\u003Cp>Because an episode link asks for a big commitment before it gives anything, so it rarely travels. A clip or a quote delivers value in seconds and can be shared without headphones. Repurposing multiplies the surface area of a show without adding recording time, which is the closest thing to free reach a creator has.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-repurpose-podcast-content\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2847,"question":2848,"answerHtml":2849},"what-can-one-episode-be-turned-into","What can one episode be turned into?","\u003Cp>A transcript, an indexable summary, several short clips, a handful of quote cards, a quiz, timestamped moments people can jump to, and a topic page. The raw material for all of it is the transcript, which is why transcription comes first and everything else follows from it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-repurpose-podcast-content\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2851,"question":2852,"answerHtml":2853},"which-repurposed-assets-bring-in-new-listeners","Which repurposed assets bring in new listeners?","\u003Cp>Short video clips and quote cards travel furthest on social because they cost nothing to consume, and video matters more than ever now that YouTube is the service Americans use most often for podcasts. Searchable moments and summaries work on the discovery side, surfacing in search and AI answers long after the post fades.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-repurpose-podcast-content\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2855,"question":2856,"answerHtml":2857},"how-do-i-repurpose-without-it-taking-forever","How do I repurpose without it taking forever?","\u003Cp>Batch it, and work from the transcript. Pull the clips, quotes, key moments, and quiz material in a single pass right after you publish, instead of re-listening for each asset. Reusing fixed formats for clips and quote cards, so you fill a template rather than design one each time, is what keeps repurposing from eating your week.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-repurpose-podcast-content\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2859,"question":2860,"answerHtml":2861},"how-do-you-make-podcast-clips-without-a-video-editor","How do you make podcast clips without a video editor?","\u003Cp>You pick the moment from an episode you already published and the tool does the cutting and captioning for you. With Podspun you select a moment, confirm, and get a captioned, branded clip in about two clicks. There is no separate video app to learn and no timeline to scrub through by hand.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-make-podcast-clips\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2863,"question":2864,"answerHtml":2865},"can-you-make-clips-from-an-audio-only-podcast","Can you make clips from an audio-only podcast?","\u003Cp>Yes. Audio-only shows get an audiogram, which is a clip with the audio, animated captions, and your branding on a still or simple animated background. Video shows get a real video clip instead. Either way you can also export the segment as a plain mp3 if you just want the audio file.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-make-podcast-clips\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2867,"question":2868,"answerHtml":2869},"how-long-does-it-take-to-make-a-podcast-clip","How long does it take to make a podcast clip?","\u003Cp>About two clicks once you know the moment you want. You are not building anything from scratch: the episode is already transcribed and indexed, so you find the line, set the bounds, and the clip is generated. Compare that to opening a separate editor, importing the file, and adding captions one frame at a time.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-make-podcast-clips\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2871,"question":2872,"answerHtml":2873},"do-podcast-clips-link-back-to-the-full-episode","Do podcast clips link back to the full episode?","\u003Cp>With Podspun they do. Each clip points back to the exact timestamp on your own site, so a viewer who wants the rest can jump straight to that moment in the full episode. The clip works as a trailer for the episode rather than a dead end on someone else's platform.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-make-podcast-clips\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2875,"question":2876,"answerHtml":2877},"what-is-an-interactive-podcast-quiz","What is an interactive podcast quiz?","\u003Cp>A short set of questions tied to a specific episode, answered during or after listening, with immediate feedback on how the listener did. The questions are drawn from what was actually discussed, so they reinforce the episode rather than testing trivia around it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Finteractive-podcast-quizzes\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2879,"question":2880,"answerHtml":2881},"why-do-quizzes-improve-engagement-and-memory","Why do quizzes improve engagement and memory?","\u003Cp>Because retrieving an answer strengthens memory more than re-exposure does. Roediger and Karpicke found that prior testing produced greater long-term retention than restudying, even though restudying made people feel more confident. A listener who answers even one question about an episode remembers more of it and has a reason to come back, which is engagement and retention from the same act.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Finteractive-podcast-quizzes\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2883,"question":2884,"answerHtml":2885},"do-podcast-quizzes-help-with-discoverability","Do podcast quizzes help with discoverability?","\u003Cp>Yes, in two ways. A quiz is additional indexable text on the page, which gives search engines more of the episode's substance to read, and structured data is how Google understands what that content is. It is also a participatory asset that tends to travel further than a passive clip, because it invites people to do something rather than just watch.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Finteractive-podcast-quizzes\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2887,"question":2888,"answerHtml":2889},"doesn-t-making-a-quiz-for-every-episode-take-too-long","Doesn't making a quiz for every episode take too long?","\u003Cp>It can. The shortcut is to write the quiz from the transcript rather than from memory: the questions come straight out of what was actually said, so you are checking and trimming them instead of composing from a blank page. That is what makes quizzing every episode realistic rather than a one-off for the big ones.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Finteractive-podcast-quizzes\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2891,"question":2892,"answerHtml":2893},"why-do-podcast-quotes-get-shared-more-than-clips","Why do podcast quotes get shared more than clips?","\u003Cp>Because they ask for nothing. A quote is read instantly, with no headphones, no audio, and no platform visit, so the cost of sharing it is near zero. A clip asks for attention and usually a trip to another app first. The lower the cost to consume, the further a thing travels, and text is the lowest-cost format there is.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-share-podcast-quotes\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2895,"question":2896,"answerHtml":2897},"what-makes-a-good-podcast-quote","What makes a good podcast quote?","\u003Cp>Short, self-contained, and specific. It has to make sense without the surrounding conversation, because it will be read with no context, and it has to say something sharp enough to be worth passing on. One pointed sentence almost always travels further than a paragraph of careful nuance.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-share-podcast-quotes\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2899,"question":2900,"answerHtml":2901},"how-do-quote-cards-bring-new-listeners-to-a-podcast","How do quote cards bring new listeners to a podcast?","\u003Cp>A quote card carries the show's name, the episode, and the host's attribution wherever it goes. A stranger who agrees clicks through to hear more; a stranger who disagrees often clicks through to argue. Either reaction lands on the episode, so the quote works as a recruiting link that happens to look like a screenshot.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-share-podcast-quotes\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2903,"question":2904,"answerHtml":2905},"why-don-t-more-podcasts-do-this-already","Why don't more podcasts do this already?","\u003Cp>Because finding the quotable moments by hand is the bottleneck. Pulling the best lines out of every episode means re-listening with a notepad, which does not survive a real publishing schedule. The fix is to mark quotable lines while you record or edit, when the material is already in front of you, so you collect them as you go instead of hunting for them afterward.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-share-podcast-quotes\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2907,"question":2908,"answerHtml":2909},"how-can-a-listener-find-a-specific-moment-in-a-podcast","How can a listener find a specific moment in a podcast?","\u003Cp>Search the transcript, not the audio. Text is scannable and time-stamped, so a listener who can type a phrase or a topic gets back the exact moment in seconds. A transcript is the text version of the speech needed to understand a recording, which is precisely what makes the content searchable in the first place.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-find-a-moment-in-a-podcast\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2911,"question":2912,"answerHtml":2913},"what-if-the-listener-doesn-t-remember-the-exact-words","What if the listener doesn't remember the exact words?","\u003Cp>Semantic search matches meaning rather than spelling. A listener can type 'the part where the host talked about burnout' and land on the right moment even if those exact words were never said. It compares the idea behind the query with the idea in each passage, so an approximate memory is enough.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-find-a-moment-in-a-podcast\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2915,"question":2916,"answerHtml":2917},"does-this-work-on-an-episode-that-is-hours-long","Does this work on an episode that is hours long?","\u003Cp>Yes, and length stops mattering. Search runs against the transcript index, not the raw audio, so finding a moment in a three-hour episode is as fast as finding one in a ten-minute clip. The index removes the penalty that long episodes normally carry.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-find-a-moment-in-a-podcast\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2919,"question":2920,"answerHtml":2921},"why-does-this-keep-listeners-engaged-with-your-older-episodes","Why does this keep listeners engaged with your older episodes?","\u003Cp>Because it makes the episodes you've already published findable instead of buried in the feed. With monthly U.S. podcast listening at 47 percent of people 12 and up and still rising, there is a large audience arriving at channels whose older episodes they currently cannot navigate. A searchable channel lets a listener act on a recommendation to 'go hear the part about X' rather than abandon it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fhow-to-find-a-moment-in-a-podcast\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2923,"question":2924,"answerHtml":2925},"can-one-podspun-account-cover-every-podcast-an-agency-produces","Can one Podspun account cover every podcast an agency produces?","\u003Cp>Yes. An agency onboards every client podcast under a single account and manages them from one dashboard. New shows are added to the same account as clients sign, which keeps setup time low and gives the agency one place to monitor performance across the roster.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fonboard-multiple-podcasts-as-an-agency\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2927,"question":2928,"answerHtml":2929},"does-podspun-offer-enterprise-pricing-for-agencies","Does Podspun offer enterprise pricing for agencies?","\u003Cp>Agencies with multiple shows can arrange enterprise pricing that covers the full roster rather than paying per show. This is usually the right fit for agencies producing more than a handful of podcasts or planning to grow quickly, because per-show billing punishes exactly the scale an agency is built on.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fonboard-multiple-podcasts-as-an-agency\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2931,"question":2932,"answerHtml":2933},"how-long-does-it-take-to-onboard-an-agency-s-full-catalog","How long does it take to onboard an agency's full catalog?","\u003Cp>Bulk onboarding processes many shows in parallel rather than in sequence. Agencies go from a list of client feeds to a transcribed, searchable catalog without setting each show up by hand, which is the difference between a one-afternoon rollout and a multi-week project.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fonboard-multiple-podcasts-as-an-agency\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2935,"question":2936,"answerHtml":2937},"who-at-the-agency-manages-the-podspun-account","Who at the agency manages the Podspun account?","\u003Cp>Most agencies hand it to the production or operations team, since the value is largely automatic once shows are onboarded. Client-facing producers usually only review extracted quotes and quizzes before publishing, so the per-show human time stays small even as the roster grows.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fonboard-multiple-podcasts-as-an-agency\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2939,"question":2940,"answerHtml":2941},"what-is-a-podspun-agency-showcase-page","What is a Podspun agency showcase page?","\u003Cp>A public page on Podspun that lists every client podcast an agency produces, with the agency's logo and branding in the primary position. A listener who arrived through any one show can see the whole roster and jump between shows from a single place.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fpodcast-agency-showcase-page\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2943,"question":2944,"answerHtml":2945},"how-does-a-showcase-page-help-win-new-clients","How does a showcase page help win new clients?","\u003Cp>It works as a portfolio that is always current, because it is generated from the agency's actual roster rather than maintained by hand. A prospect who sees several recognizable shows produced by one agency has most of the trust question answered before the first call, which is exactly when a portfolio earns its keep.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fpodcast-agency-showcase-page\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2947,"question":2948,"answerHtml":2949},"does-the-showcase-page-include-the-agency-s-own-branding","Does the showcase page include the agency's own branding?","\u003Cp>Yes. The agency's logo and name sit in the primary position, and each podcast card ties back to the agency's identity rather than a Podspun badge. The point is to make the agency visible to listeners directly, which is the one thing the normal show-follows-host relationship never does.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fpodcast-agency-showcase-page\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2951,"question":2952,"answerHtml":2953},"how-do-listeners-and-search-engines-find-the-page","How do listeners and search engines find the page?","\u003Cp>Each individual show's Podspun profile links to the showcase page, so any listener exploring one show can reach the roster in a click. The page is also crawlable, which lets search engines index the agency and its shows as one connected entity instead of disconnected pages.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fpodcast-agency-showcase-page\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2955,"question":2956,"answerHtml":2957},"what-does-podspun-deliver-that-an-agency-can-show-a-client","What does Podspun deliver that an agency can show a client?","\u003Cp>A transcribed, searchable page for every episode, a set of shareable quotes and moments per episode, and discoverability in AI answer engines. Each is visible to the client and easy to demonstrate on a renewal call, which is the difference between claiming growth and showing an artifact that produces it.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fseo-tool-for-podcast-agency-clients\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2959,"question":2960,"answerHtml":2961},"how-does-this-help-an-agency-retain-clients","How does this help an agency retain clients?","\u003Cp>Agencies that deliver only production tend to compete on the going rate for editing, and price competition has no floor. A measurable discoverability layer gives the client a reason to stay beyond the editing rate, and it gives the agency something new to report every month instead of an invoice for the same service.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fseo-tool-for-podcast-agency-clients\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2963,"question":2964,"answerHtml":2965},"can-the-agency-brand-the-output-clients-see","Can the agency brand the output clients see?","\u003Cp>Yes. The agency's showcase page and its production role are both surfaced on Podspun, so the client sees discoverability as part of what the agency delivers rather than a separate vendor they could cut out. The credit for the work stays with the agency.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fseo-tool-for-podcast-agency-clients\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":2967,"question":2968,"answerHtml":2969},"does-adding-podspun-replace-any-part-of-the-workflow","Does adding Podspun replace any part of the workflow?","\u003Cp>No, it is additive. It slots in after production and publishing to handle transcription, indexing, and moment extraction. Existing editing, scheduling, and publishing do not change, so adoption is a bolt-on rather than a migration.\u003C\u002Fp>\u003Cp>\u003Ca href=\"\u002Flearn\u002Fseo-tool-for-podcast-agency-clients\">Read the full guide and sources\u003C\u002Fa>\u003C\u002Fp>",[2971,2980,2989,2998,3007,3015,3025,3034,3043,3052,3061,3069,3077,3085,3093,3102,3111,3119,3127,3135,3143,3151,3159],{"slug":2972,"title":2973,"entries":2974},"podcast-discoverability-in-ai-search","How to Make a Podcast Discoverable in AI Search",[2975,2976,2977,2978,2979],{"slug":2550,"question":2551,"answerHtml":2552},{"slug":2554,"question":2555,"answerHtml":2556},{"slug":2558,"question":2559,"answerHtml":2560},{"slug":2562,"question":2563,"answerHtml":2564},{"slug":2566,"question":2567,"answerHtml":2568},{"slug":2981,"title":2982,"entries":2983},"podcast-seo-guide","Podcast SEO: A Complete Guide",[2984,2985,2986,2987,2988],{"slug":2570,"question":2571,"answerHtml":2572},{"slug":2574,"question":2575,"answerHtml":2576},{"slug":2578,"question":2579,"answerHtml":2580},{"slug":2582,"question":2583,"answerHtml":2584},{"slug":2586,"question":2587,"answerHtml":2588},{"slug":2990,"title":2991,"entries":2992},"how-to-make-a-podcast-searchable","How to Make a Podcast Searchable",[2993,2994,2995,2996,2997],{"slug":2590,"question":2591,"answerHtml":2592},{"slug":2594,"question":2595,"answerHtml":2596},{"slug":2598,"question":2599,"answerHtml":2600},{"slug":2602,"question":2603,"answerHtml":2604},{"slug":2606,"question":2607,"answerHtml":2608},{"slug":2999,"title":3000,"entries":3001},"how-to-transcribe-a-podcast","How to Transcribe a Podcast",[3002,3003,3004,3005,3006],{"slug":2610,"question":2611,"answerHtml":2612},{"slug":2614,"question":2615,"answerHtml":2616},{"slug":2618,"question":2619,"answerHtml":2620},{"slug":2622,"question":2623,"answerHtml":2624},{"slug":2626,"question":2627,"answerHtml":2628},{"slug":2630,"title":3008,"entries":3009},"What Happened to Google Podcasts?",[3010,3011,3012,3013,3014],{"slug":2630,"question":2631,"answerHtml":2632},{"slug":2634,"question":2635,"answerHtml":2636},{"slug":2638,"question":2639,"answerHtml":2640},{"slug":2642,"question":2643,"answerHtml":2644},{"slug":2646,"question":2647,"answerHtml":2648},{"slug":3016,"title":3017,"entries":3018},"what-podspun-does-for-your-podcast","What Podspun Does for Your Podcast",[3019,3020,3021,3022,3023,3024],{"slug":2650,"question":2651,"answerHtml":2652},{"slug":2654,"question":2655,"answerHtml":2656},{"slug":2658,"question":2659,"answerHtml":2660},{"slug":2662,"question":2663,"answerHtml":2664},{"slug":2666,"question":2667,"answerHtml":2668},{"slug":2670,"question":2671,"answerHtml":2672},{"slug":3026,"title":3027,"entries":3028},"how-to-grow-a-podcast","How to Grow a Podcast",[3029,3030,3031,3032,3033],{"slug":2674,"question":2675,"answerHtml":2676},{"slug":2678,"question":2679,"answerHtml":2680},{"slug":2682,"question":2683,"answerHtml":2684},{"slug":2686,"question":2687,"answerHtml":2688},{"slug":2690,"question":2691,"answerHtml":2692},{"slug":3035,"title":3036,"entries":3037},"how-to-get-more-podcast-listeners","How to Get More Podcast Listeners",[3038,3039,3040,3041,3042],{"slug":2694,"question":2695,"answerHtml":2696},{"slug":2698,"question":2699,"answerHtml":2700},{"slug":2702,"question":2703,"answerHtml":2704},{"slug":2706,"question":2707,"answerHtml":2708},{"slug":2710,"question":2711,"answerHtml":2712},{"slug":3044,"title":3045,"entries":3046},"how-to-promote-a-podcast","How to Promote a Podcast",[3047,3048,3049,3050,3051],{"slug":2714,"question":2715,"answerHtml":2716},{"slug":2718,"question":2719,"answerHtml":2720},{"slug":2722,"question":2723,"answerHtml":2724},{"slug":2726,"question":2727,"answerHtml":2728},{"slug":2730,"question":2731,"answerHtml":2732},{"slug":3053,"title":3054,"entries":3055},"how-to-write-podcast-show-notes","How to Write Podcast Show Notes",[3056,3057,3058,3059,3060],{"slug":2734,"question":2735,"answerHtml":2736},{"slug":2738,"question":2739,"answerHtml":2740},{"slug":2742,"question":2743,"answerHtml":2744},{"slug":2746,"question":2747,"answerHtml":2748},{"slug":2750,"question":2751,"answerHtml":2752},{"slug":775,"title":3062,"entries":3063},"Podcast Website Builder",[3064,3065,3066,3067,3068],{"slug":2754,"question":2755,"answerHtml":2756},{"slug":2758,"question":2759,"answerHtml":2760},{"slug":2762,"question":2763,"answerHtml":2764},{"slug":558,"question":559,"answerHtml":2766},{"slug":2768,"question":2769,"answerHtml":2770},{"slug":3070,"title":3071,"entries":3072},"how-to-build-a-podcast-website","How to Build a Podcast Website",[3073,3074,3075,3076],{"slug":2772,"question":2773,"answerHtml":2774},{"slug":2776,"question":2777,"answerHtml":2778},{"slug":2780,"question":2781,"answerHtml":2782},{"slug":2784,"question":2785,"answerHtml":2786},{"slug":3078,"title":3079,"entries":3080},"how-to-turn-instagram-into-a-website","How to Turn Your Instagram into a Website",[3081,3082,3083,3084],{"slug":2788,"question":2789,"answerHtml":2790},{"slug":2792,"question":2793,"answerHtml":2794},{"slug":2796,"question":2797,"answerHtml":2798},{"slug":2800,"question":2801,"answerHtml":2802},{"slug":3086,"title":3087,"entries":3088},"how-to-turn-tiktok-into-a-website","How to Turn Your TikTok into a Website",[3089,3090,3091,3092],{"slug":2804,"question":2805,"answerHtml":2806},{"slug":2808,"question":2809,"answerHtml":2810},{"slug":2812,"question":2813,"answerHtml":2814},{"slug":2816,"question":2817,"answerHtml":2818},{"slug":3094,"title":3095,"entries":3096},"podcast-website-on-your-own-domain","Why Your Podcast Needs a Website on Your Own Domain",[3097,3098,3099,3100,3101],{"slug":2820,"question":2821,"answerHtml":2822},{"slug":2824,"question":2825,"answerHtml":2826},{"slug":2828,"question":2829,"answerHtml":2830},{"slug":2832,"question":2833,"answerHtml":2834},{"slug":2836,"question":141,"answerHtml":2837},{"slug":3103,"title":3104,"entries":3105},"how-to-repurpose-podcast-content","How to Repurpose Podcast Content",[3106,3107,3108,3109,3110],{"slug":2839,"question":2840,"answerHtml":2841},{"slug":2843,"question":2844,"answerHtml":2845},{"slug":2847,"question":2848,"answerHtml":2849},{"slug":2851,"question":2852,"answerHtml":2853},{"slug":2855,"question":2856,"answerHtml":2857},{"slug":3112,"title":3113,"entries":3114},"how-to-make-podcast-clips","How to Make Podcast Clips Without a Video Editor",[3115,3116,3117,3118],{"slug":2859,"question":2860,"answerHtml":2861},{"slug":2863,"question":2864,"answerHtml":2865},{"slug":2867,"question":2868,"answerHtml":2869},{"slug":2871,"question":2872,"answerHtml":2873},{"slug":3120,"title":3121,"entries":3122},"interactive-podcast-quizzes","Interactive Podcast Quizzes",[3123,3124,3125,3126],{"slug":2875,"question":2876,"answerHtml":2877},{"slug":2879,"question":2880,"answerHtml":2881},{"slug":2883,"question":2884,"answerHtml":2885},{"slug":2887,"question":2888,"answerHtml":2889},{"slug":3128,"title":3129,"entries":3130},"how-to-share-podcast-quotes","How to Share Podcast Quotes",[3131,3132,3133,3134],{"slug":2891,"question":2892,"answerHtml":2893},{"slug":2895,"question":2896,"answerHtml":2897},{"slug":2899,"question":2900,"answerHtml":2901},{"slug":2903,"question":2904,"answerHtml":2905},{"slug":3136,"title":3137,"entries":3138},"how-to-find-a-moment-in-a-podcast","How to Find a Moment in a Podcast",[3139,3140,3141,3142],{"slug":2907,"question":2908,"answerHtml":2909},{"slug":2911,"question":2912,"answerHtml":2913},{"slug":2915,"question":2916,"answerHtml":2917},{"slug":2919,"question":2920,"answerHtml":2921},{"slug":3144,"title":3145,"entries":3146},"onboard-multiple-podcasts-as-an-agency","How to Onboard Multiple Podcasts as an Agency",[3147,3148,3149,3150],{"slug":2923,"question":2924,"answerHtml":2925},{"slug":2927,"question":2928,"answerHtml":2929},{"slug":2931,"question":2932,"answerHtml":2933},{"slug":2935,"question":2936,"answerHtml":2937},{"slug":3152,"title":3153,"entries":3154},"podcast-agency-showcase-page","Podcast Agency Showcase Page",[3155,3156,3157,3158],{"slug":2939,"question":2940,"answerHtml":2941},{"slug":2943,"question":2944,"answerHtml":2945},{"slug":2947,"question":2948,"answerHtml":2949},{"slug":2951,"question":2952,"answerHtml":2953},{"slug":3160,"title":3161,"entries":3162},"seo-tool-for-podcast-agency-clients","An SEO Tool Podcast Agencies Can Give Their Clients",[3163,3164,3165,3166],{"slug":2955,"question":2956,"answerHtml":2957},{"slug":2959,"question":2960,"answerHtml":2961},{"slug":2963,"question":2964,"answerHtml":2965},{"slug":2967,"question":2968,"answerHtml":2969},{"slug":3168,"title":3169,"lead":3170,"entries":3171,"groups":3196},"affiliates","Affiliate program","Referrals, commissions, and payouts.",[3172,3176,3180,3184,3188,3192],{"slug":3173,"question":3174,"answerHtml":3175},"how-much-does-the-podspun-affiliate-program-pay","How much does the Podspun affiliate program pay?","\u003Cp>30% of every payment your referred customer makes during their first 2 years. On the $49 monthly plan that is $14.70 a month per customer, about $353 over the term. There is no cap on how many referrals you can earn on, and no minimum payout.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":3177,"question":3178,"answerHtml":3179},"what-does-my-audience-get","What does my audience get?","\u003Cp>Anyone who signs up through your link gets up to $49 off their first Podspun payment, applied automatically at signup. Nothing to type at checkout.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":3181,"question":3182,"answerHtml":3183},"do-i-have-to-be-a-podspun-customer-to-join","Do I have to be a Podspun customer to join?","\u003Cp>No. A free Podspun account is all you need, and signing up requires no card. The free account is the login that holds your link, your stats, and your payout setup. You never have to subscribe or build a site.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":3185,"question":3186,"answerHtml":3187},"how-do-payouts-work","How do payouts work?","\u003Cp>Payouts are automatic through Stripe. You connect a payout account once in your dashboard, and accrued commissions transfer to your bank daily. Stripe handles tax forms for US affiliates.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":3189,"question":3190,"answerHtml":3191},"when-is-a-commission-earned","When is a commission earned?","\u003Cp>Commissions accrue as your referral pays, starting with their first real payment and running for 2 years. A signup that never pays never earns a commission.\u003C\u002Fp>",{"slug":3193,"question":3194,"answerHtml":3195},"can-my-own-website-refer-people","Can my own website refer people?","\u003Cp>Yes. If you build on Podspun, the Podspun credit in your site's footer already carries your code, so every visitor who clicks it counts as your referral. You can also paste a badge or a promo card into any other site you run.\u003C\u002Fp>",[3197],{"slug":3198,"title":3199,"entries":3200},"referrals","Referrals and payouts",[3201,3202,3203,3204,3205,3206],{"slug":3173,"question":3174,"answerHtml":3175},{"slug":3177,"question":3178,"answerHtml":3179},{"slug":3181,"question":3182,"answerHtml":3183},{"slug":3185,"question":3186,"answerHtml":3187},{"slug":3189,"question":3190,"answerHtml":3191},{"slug":3193,"question":3194,"answerHtml":3195}]